Sony Alpha DSLR-A700 Review, Phil Askey & Simon Joinson


Review based on a production Alpha DSLR-A700 with firmware version 2.0

It's been almost two years since Konica Minolta pulled out of the photo business and transferred its entire camera division to Sony, and well over a year since the first Sony DSLR (the DSLR-A100) was announced. Two years is a long time in the digital SLR market, but the three years Minolta (latterly Konica Minolta, now Sony) SLR users have been waiting for a high end model to replace the innovative Maxxum (Dynax) 7D must have felt like a lifetime. But, finally, it's here, and it looks very much like the mockup shown earlier in the year.

Like the A100, the new camera still wears its Konica Minolta heritage very much on its sleeve, and when you start to look a little more closely at the specification it's obvious that there's still an awful lot of Konica Minolta DNA in the A700. This is hardly surprising given that the circumstances behind its development.

And, just as the A100 was obviously based on - and designed to be a successor to - the KM 5D, the A700 follows on from the 7D, and - despite lots of Sony touches and an attractive new design - 7D users are likely to find using the new model reassuringly familiar.

But of course Sony doesn't only have existing system users in its cross hairs; the A700 is designed to go head to head with the latest 'prosumer' models from Nikon, Canon and Pentax. Whether the A700 offers enough to really put Sony on the DSLR map will be decided when we get to look properly at the image quality, but on specification, features and handling it certainly seems to have what it takes to play with the big boys.

Interestingly the one thing the A700 doesn't have is any form of live view; when we spoke to Sony about this the answer was simple; they believe that the compromises involved in current systems are satisfactory, and they won't implement live view until they can 'get it right'. Whether the lack of live view has any real relevance in a camera at this level remains to be seen; we doubt it.

The A700 shares many technologies with earlier Konica Minolta models (including, naturally, the lens mount), plus all those introduced in the A100 - though virtually all have been uprated or upgraded in one way or another (we've been told the A100 and A700 share virtually no components). From the sensor to the construction of the body to the GUI to the extensive feature set, this is a very different camera to the entry-level A100 (more of which later in this review). We'll start by looking at what's specifically new to this model:

What's new (highlights)

12.2 megapixel APS-C 'Exmor' CMOS
For its first 'advanced amateur' model Sony has dropped the CCD used in the A100 and moved to a totally new 12MP CMOS sensor. Designed to offer low noise and high speed (thanks to its on-chip A/D conversion) the 'Exmor' sensor puts the A700 in direct competition with Nikon's new D300.

Bionz Image Processor
Continuing Sony's habit of slapping a daft name on every component is an all-new version of the Bionz image processor, optimized for the new CMOS sensor. Again, this is claimed to boost speed and features a two-stage RAW noise reduction system. The combination of fast sensor and fast processor mean the A700 can offer 5 frames per second for up to 18 raw 12MP files.

New AF Sensor
The A700 features an 11 point focus system with a newly developed Center Double Cross AF sensor, claimed to offer 'the highest precision AD ever in a D-SLR'. The center focus point has two horizontal and two vertical sensors plus a new high precision (horizontal) sensor in the middle. This sensor has a baseline that is about twice as long as earlier AF sensors, enabling in theory, twice the focusing accuracy with lenses with a maximum aperture of F2.8 or larger.
Faster focusing
Sony has also redesigned the focus mechanics, AF algorithm and microprocessor to offer faster AF. The target, apparently, was the fastest AF in any SLR, and to match Minolta's Maxxum 7 film SLR.

New High Speed shutter
Carbon fibre shutter offering 1/8000 sec top speed and 1/250th sec x-sync (1/200th if SteadyShot is on). Sony is quoting a 100,000 shutter cycle life.

Anti-Blur
Refinements to the Super SteadyShot CCD-shift stabilization system are now claimed to deliver up to 4 stops advantage.

Optical Pentaprism
In place of the A100's pentamirror design comes an optical pentaprism viewfinder with anti reflective coating offering better brightness, better eye relief and high magnification. The spherical acute matte focus screen is now interchangeable.

Aluminum chassis/Magnesium body
Newly-developed high strength aluminum chassis which is 5% lighter and 3x stronger than the A100. Sony tells us the aluminum used is as strong as duralumin and required the development of new processing technology (it is apparently very difficult to work with). The body shell itself is constructed from Magnesium Alloy.

Environmental Sealing
The A700's buttons and levers are sealed to protect against dust and moisture (though it's worth pointing out that the camera is in no way 'waterproof' or 'splashproof').

X-Fine 3.0" LCD
One of the first things you notice about the A700 is the stunning 3.0 screen. With 922,000 (well, 640 x 480 x RGB) pixels it has a resolution of 267ppi, plus high contrast and a wide viewing angle. A new high resolution GUI takes full advantage of the new screen.

Full 1080 HD output
The A700 has an HDMI terminal and offers full 1080i HDTV output, plus a new 16:9 aspect ratio shooting option for TV viewing. The A700 is the first SLR to support Sony's new PhotoTV HD viewing protocol (which basically tells a Bravia TV to optimize the picture for stills viewing and produces better quality).

Wireless remote control
The A700 includes a wireless remote control offering a fairly comprehensive set of controls (though all but the shutter release only work when the camera is attached to a TV).

Dual Storage Formats
Not sure how important this will be to most users, but the A700 now offers both Memory Stick Duo and CompactFlash storage options.

New kit lens
Along with the A700 comes a new compact wide range bundle lens, the DT 16-105mm F3.5-5.6. The lens covers a range equivalent to 24 to 160mm and has internal focusing (though not zooming).

New Vertical Grip
Most interesting of the new accessories launched with the A700 is the VG-C70AM Vertical Grip. The grip offers a portrait shooting shutter button, two control dials (and a full set of buttons) and accepts two battery packs.

Other new / upgraded features of note:

  • New advanced Dynamic Range optimizer functions (also supported in RAW)
  • New software bundle with all-new raw converter
  • Dedicated AF illuminator (red LED)
  • New Creative Styles (expansion of color modes function on A100)
  • 0.3 EV steps (or 0.5 EV if you prefer)
  • ISO 3200-6400 expanded range
  • Compressed Raw mode and X-Fine JPEG mode
  • High ISO noise reduction control
  • Grip sensor (optional trigger for eye control)
  • RGB histograms
  • New 'Quick Navi' control system

3 years on: A700 vs Konica Minolta Maxxum (Dynax) 7D

Before we look at the A700 and how it compares to Sony's first DSLR (the A100) and the rest of the market it's worth having a quick look at how it compares with the Konica Minolta 7D. Our first impression of the A700 was that in spirit (and very much in reality when you look closely) it is the successor to KM's first (and only) high-end digital SLR, introduced almost exactly 3 years ago at PMA 2004. it's obvious that the A700 contains a lot of Minolta DNA (there are elements of the D7D and the Maxxum/Dynax 7 film SLR in its design and control layout) and it's fair to say that - for users of Minolta's lens system - it can be considered a (long awaited) successor.

Although the styling has been given a modern twist and the D7D's button / switch overkill has been toned down a little, it's not hard to see where Sony's designers started from, and there are many features from the D7D that made it almost unchanged into the A700. These include the basic control layout (the second dial has been lost and replaced by a simpler on-screen 'Quick Navi' system), the magnesium alloy construction, the eye-start focus, CCD-shift IS and high level of customization and the optional vertical shooting grip. For potential upgraders looking for a reason to trade up from a D7D to Sony's new 'Advanced Amateur' model here's just a brief taste of what three years difference makes:

  • Twice as many pixels: 12MP CMOS sensor (vs 6MP CCD)
  • New shutter with higher maximum speed and higher sync speed
  • Bigger screen with three times the resolution
  • Improvements to focus speed and accuracy
  • Faster (5 fps) continuous shooting capabilities and better buffering
  • New 40 segment honeycomb metering
  • Better GUI and huge range of new features
  • HDTV output
  • Creative Styles and lots of new parameters to play with
  • HDTV output

Exmor CMOS sensor

The A700 is the first DSLR to feature Sony's new CMOS sensor (now christened 'Exmor' - apparently not named after the national park in Devon or its eponymous ponies). Actually to be more accurate it's the first DLSR that we know of to use the new sensor (other manufacturers tend not to boast about using Sony technology in their flagship cameras, but there has been some conjecture about the Nikon D300, for example).

But I digress. The interesting thing about the new Exmor sensor - announced a couple of months ago (see news story) - is that it takes a very different approach to A/D conversion (turning the analogue output of the sensor into the digital 0's and 1's that will be processed and turned into the final raw or JPEG file). Instead of using a separate A/D processor further down the imaging pipeline, the Exmor has lots of them built into CMOS sensor itself (there's one per column - that's over 4000 in this chip).

The advantage, in theory, is lower noise (though Sony's original technical documents talk about a big boost in speed too), since the analog pathway is greatly reduced and analog signal noise reduction can happen a lot earlier in the process. I'm not going to go into any more detail here about the technicalities of the Exmor sensor's unique design (mainly because the information we have is quite sketchy), but it is certainly an interesting development. We will be interested to see how well it performs in the real world (the proof, as with all these things, is in the pudding).

Below is how Sony makes this all seem very simple and friendly using evil spiky noise bugs getting mixed in with lovely golden balls of analog signal:

The A700's process in simple terms - the key thing here is that the job of turning each pixel's analog output into a digital file is split between the Exmor sensor (with on-chip column A/D conversion) and the Bionz processor (raw data NR and image processing).
In a conventional CCD-based system noise in the the analog output from the sensor builds due to the (relatively) long signal path before digital conversion.
The A700's sensor produces a digital output because there is an A/D converter on every column, meaning the analog signal path is short. This in theory means less noise in the analog signal and a cleaner output for the digital NR systems to work with.

Compared to Alpha 100 - key differences

Although the A700 and A100 are clearly aimed at very different parts of the market (entry level and advanced amateur) the mere fact that this is only Sony's second DSLR model means that many potential purchasers will be looking closely at what the key differences are. In the hand the design and construction gap between the two models is huge, but there are also some significant differences in the key spec - the cameras share very few components and only the metering system appears to be identical. The key differences be summed up simply as follows (there's a more detailed list in the table below):

  • New 12MP CMOS sensor with on-chip A/D
  • New 3.0" high resolution screen
  • 'Semi pro' construction and environmental sealing (bigger and heavier too)
  • Upgraded Autofocus system
  • Faster continuous shooting (5fps)
  • Additional Color Modes (now renamed Creative Styles)
  • Pentaprism finder (vs Pentamirror) and interchangeable focus screens
  • Vertical Grip option & remote control
  • Hugely improved interface and ergonomics; more control, more customization options
  • Scores of minor (and some major) feature enhancements

 
Sony Alpha A700

Sony Alpha A100
Body material • Aluminum chassis
• Magnesium Alloy body shell
• high grade plastic exterior
• Environmental seals
• Plastic (interior construction unknown)
Sensor • 23.5 x 15.6 mm CMOS sensor 'Exmor'
• RGB Color Filter Array
• Built-in fixed low-pass filter
• 13.05 million total pixels
• 12.25 million effective pixels
• On-chip Column A/D Conversion & NR
• 23.6 x 15.8 mm CCD sensor
• RGB Color Filter Array
• Interline interlaced CCD
• Built-in fixed low-pass filter
• 10.8 million total pixels
• 10.2 million effective pixels
Image sizes (3:2) • 4288 x 2856 (L RAW )
• 4272 x 2848 (L)
• 3104 x 2064 (M)
• 2128 x 1424 (S)
• 3872 x 2592 (L)
• 2896 x 1936 (M)
• 1920 x 1280 (S)
Aspect ratios • 3:2
• 16:9
3:2
File Formats • Raw
• Compressed Raw
• Raw + JPEG
• JPEG
• RAW
• RAW + JPEG Fine
• JPEG
JPEG compression • Three level
• Two level
Auto Focus • TTL CCD line sensors (11-points, 10 lines with center dual cross sensor)
• EV 0 to 18 (ISO 100) detection range
• Predictive focus control for moving subjects

• TTL CCD line sensors (9-points, 8 lines with center cross-hair sensor)
• EV -1 to 18 (ISO 100) detection range
• Predictive focus control for moving subjects

AF assist
illuminator
• Yes (built-in LED lamp)
• Range approx 1m - 7m
• Via internal flash, must be raised
• 1.0 - 5.0 m range
Custom modes Three None
ISO sensitivities • Auto (200 - 1600) - upper/lower limit selectable
• ISO 100
• ISO 200
• ISO 400
• ISO 800
• ISO 1600
• Up to ISO 6400 (expanded range)
• Auto (100 - 800)
• ISO 100
• ISO 200
• ISO 400
• ISO 800
• ISO 1600
• Lo80 (ISO 80, Low key)
• Hi200 (ISO 200, High key)
Exposure compen. • -3.0 to +3.0 EV
• 0.3 or 0.5 EV steps
• -2.0 to +2.0 EV
• 0.3 EV steps
Bracketing • Single or continuous bracketing
• 3 or 5 frames
• 0.3, 0.5 or 0.7 EV steps
• 3 frames
• 0.3 or 0.7 EV steps
Shutter speeds • 30 to 1/8000 sec
• Bulb
• 30 to 1/4000 sec
• Bulb
Flash X-sync • 1/250 sec
• 1/200 sec (with Super SteadyShot on)
• 1/160 sec
• 1/125 sec (with Super SteadyShot on)
Custom WB memories Three One
Color modes • Standard
• Vivid
• Neutral
• Clear
• Deep
• Light
• Portrait
• Landscape
• Sunset
• Night view
• Autumn Leaves
• B&W
• Sepia
• Adobe RGB
• Standard
• Vivid
• Portrait
• Landscape
• Sunset
• Night view
• B&W
• Adobe RGB
Image parameters • Contrast (-3 to +3)
• Saturation (-3 to +3)
• Sharpness (-3 to +3)
• Zone Matching (-1 to +2 steps)
• Brightness (-3 to +3 steps)
(Available in all color modes)
• Contrast (-2 to +2)
• Saturation (-2 to +2)
• Sharpness (-2 to +2)
(Available in all color modes)
Noise reduction • Long exposure for exposures longer than 1 second
• High ISO NR High/Normal/Low at ISO 1600 or higher
• User controllable: On / Off
• Long exposure for exposures longer than 1 second
• User controllable: On / Off
Continuous • H: Approx 5fps max
• L: Approx 3fps max
• RAW: Up to 18 frames
• cRAW (compressed): Up to 25 frames
• RAW+JPEG: Up to 12 frames
• JPEG (XFINE): Up to 16 frames
• JPEG (STD/FINE): Unlimited (to card capacity)
• RAW: 3 fps, up to 6 frames
• RAW+JPEG: 3 fps, up to 3 frames
• JPEG: 3fps, unlimited
Viewfinder • Optical glass pentaprism
• Spherical Acute Matte focusing screen (interchangeable)
• Magnification approx. 0.9x
• Eye-relief 25 mm from eyepiece, 21 mm from frame
• Pentamirror
• Spherical Acute Matte focusing screen (not changeable)
• Magnification approx. x0.83
• Eye-relief 20 mm from eyepiece, 16 mm from frame
LCD monitor • 3.0 " 'Xtra Fine' TFT LCD
• 920,000 pixels
• 270 ppi
• Anti-reflective coating
• 2.5" TFT LCD ('Clear Photo LCD Plus')
• 230,000 pixels
• Anti-reflective coating
Control dials Two One
Video Out • AV (Selectable NTSC or PAL)
• HDMI (1920 x 1080i, 1280 x 720p, 720 x 580p, 720 x 576p)
• 'PhotoTV' HD settings applied with BRAVIA TV
• AV (Selectable NTSC or PAL)
Storage • Compact Flash Type I/II
• Memory Stick Duo / Pro Duo
• Compact Flash Type I/II
Vertical Grip Optional vertical Grip VG-C70AM None
Dimensions 141.7 x 104.8 x 79.7 mm 133 x 95 x 71 mm (5.2 x 3.7 x 2.8 in)
Weight • No battery: 690 g (1.5 lb)
• With battery: 768 g (1.7 lb)
• No battery: 545 g (1.2 lb)
• With battery: 638 g (1.4 lb)
Other

• New GUI and improved control
• More customization options
• AF/MF button
• Improved DRO functionality
• Wireless remote control
• PC control via USB
• Grip sensor
• Improvements to Super SteadyShot
• RGB histogram in playback mode
• Clipped shadow warning in playback
• New playback options
• Flash Sync socket

 

Design compared to the A100

Although there is a vague family resemblance, the A700 is a very different camera to the A100 (the second dial has gone, for one thing). Yes, there are elements of (Konica) Minolta in there (particularly the Maxxum/Dynax 7 and 7D), but the Sony styling cues introduced with the A100 have developed significantly giving the A700 a real identity of its own. To my eyes it's not the most handsome camera ever built, but it's certainly a big step up from the first Sony DSLR (which looks and feels a little 'cheap' for want of a better word) - even if it lacks the finesse in detailing (such as surface textures and finishes) of something like the NIkon D200/D300. And in use it did start to grow on me.



Sony Alpha DSLR-A700 Specifications

Price (body only)

• $1400 [check]

Body material * Magnesium Alloy chassis, high grade plastic exterior
Sensor * • 23.5 x 15.6 mm CMOS sensor 'Exmor'
• RGB Color Filter Array
• Built-in fixed low-pass filter
• 13.05 million total pixels
• 12.25 million effective pixels
• On-chip Column A/D Conversion & NR
Image sizes *

• 4288 x 2856 (L RAW )
• 4272 x 2848 (L)
• 3104 x 2064 (M)
• 2128 x 1424 (S)
• 4272 x 2400 (L) 16:9
• 2128 x 1200 (S) 16:9

File qualities / formats * • RAW (.ARW 2.0)
• Compressed or uncompressed RAW option
• RAW + JPEG Fine
• JPEG Extra Fine
• JPEG Fine
• JPEG Standard
Dust reduction • Static-resistant anti-dust coating
• CCD-shift dust reduction mechanism
Lenses • Sony Alpha lenses
(also compatible with Minolta A-type bayonet mount lenses)
FOV crop 1.5x
Super SteadyShot • CCD-Shift 'Super SteadyShot' system
• Five level LED shake indicator in viewfinder
• Claimed equivalent to 2.5 – 4 steps in shutter speed *
Auto Focus * • TTL CCD line sensors (11-points, 10 lines with center dual cross sensor)
• EV 0 to 18 (ISO 100) detection range
• Predictive focus control for moving subjects
AF area selection

• Wide AF area
• Spot AF area (center)
• Focus area selection (any of 11)

Focus modes • Single-shot AF
• Direct Manual Focus
• Continuous AF
• Automatic AF
• Manual focus
AF assist
illuminator *
• Yes (built-in LED lamp)
• Range approx 1m - 7m
Eye-start AF Yes, selectable from menu (optionally with grip sensor trigger*)
Shooting modes

• Auto
• Programmed AE (with shift)
• Aperture priority AE
• Shutter priority AE
• Manual
• MR (memory recall) / Custom
• Scene modes (below)

Scene modes • Portrait
• Landscape
• Macro
• Sports Action
• Sunset
• Night view/portrait
Sensitivity

• Auto (200 - 1600) - upper/lower limit selectable *
• ISO 100
• ISO 200
• ISO 400
• ISO 800
• ISO 1600
• Up to ISO 6400 (expanded range) *

Metering modes • Multi-segment (40 segment Honeycomb pattern)
• Center-weighted
• Spot
Metering range • EV 0 to 20 (Multi-segment / Center-weighted) *
• EV 2 to 20 (Spot metering) *
(at ISO 100 with F1.4 lens)
AE Lock • AEL button (customizable)
• Half-press shutter release
AE Bracketing • Single or continuous bracketing
• 3 or 5 frames
• 0.3, 0.5 or 0.7 EV steps *
Exposure compen. • -3.0 to +3.0 EV *
• 0.3 or 0.5 EV steps *
Shutter Electronically-controlled, vertical-traverse, focal-plane Shutter
Shutter Speed * • 30 to 1/8000 sec
• Bulb
Flash X-sync * • 1/250 sec
• 1/200 sec (with Super SteadyShot on)
Aperture values Depends on lens, 0.3 EV steps
DOF preview Yes, dedicated button
White balance

• Auto
• Daylight
• Shade
• Cloudy
• Tungsten
• Fluorescent
• Flash
• Color temperature (2500 - 9900 K)
• Manual (Custom) - 3 memories *

White balance fine tuning • Auto (none)
• Preset WB: -3 to +3
• Fluorescent WB: -2 to +4
• Color temperature WB: G9 to M9 (Magenta to Green)
White balance bracketing • 3 frames
• Hi or Lo steps
Dynamic range optimizer

• Off
• Standard
• Advanced Auto *
• Advanced
• DRO advanced bracketing (3 frames, High/Low selectable) *

Color space • sRGB
• Adobe RGB
Color modes • Standard
• Vivid
• Neutral *
• Clear *
• Deep *
• Light *
• Portrait
• Landscape
• Sunset
• Night view
• Autumn Leaves *
• B&W
• Sepia *
• Adobe RGB
Image parameters * • Contrast (-3 to +3)
• Saturation (-3 to +3)
• Sharpness (-3 to +3)
• Zone Matching (-1 to +2 steps)
• Brightness (-3 to +3 steps)
(Available in all color modes)
Noise reduction * • Long exposure for exposures longer than 1 second
• High ISO NR High/Normal/Low at ISO 1600 or higher
• User controllable: On / Off
Viewfinder *

• Eye-level fixed optical glass pentaprism
• Spherical Acute Matte focusing screen (interchangeable)
• Magnification approx. 0.9x
• 95% frame coverage
• Dioptric adjustment (-3 to +1.0)
• Eye-relief 25 mm from eyepiece, 21 mm from frame
• Eyepiece cup removable
• Viewfinder info bar

LCD monitor * • 3.0 " 'Xtra Fine' TFT LCD
• 920,000 pixels (640 x 480 x 3 (RGB))
• 270 ppi
• Anti-reflective coating
Flash • Built-in pop-up flash (manual release)
• Metering: ADI, Pre-flash TTL, Manual flash control
• Guide number 12 (ISO 100/m)
• Angle of coverage 24 mm (35 mm equiv.)
• Flash sync 1/250 sec, 1/200 sec (SteadyShot on) *
Flash modes

• Auto
• Fill Flash
• Rear Sync
• Slow sync
• Manual Flash
• Red-eye Reduction (pre-flash)
• Wireless/Remote Off-camera Flash
• High Speed Sync.

Flash compensation * -3.0 to +3.0 EV in 0.3 or 0.5 EV steps
External flash (optional) • Sony HVL-F56M (guide no. 56)
• Sony HVL-F36M (guide no. 36)
• Macro Twin Flash Kit HVL-MT24AM
• Ring Light HVL-RLAM
• Off camera flash shoe FA-CS1 AM
Drive modes • Single-frame
• Continuous (H/L selectable) *
• Self-timer (10 or 2 sec)
• Continuous bracket
• Single-frame bracket
• White balance bracket
• DRO bracket *
Continuous
shooting *
• H: Approx 5fps max
• L: Approx 3fps max
• RAW: Up to 18 frames
• cRAW (compressed): Up to 25 frames
• RAW+JPEG: Up to 12 frames
• JPEG (XFINE): Up to 16 frames
• JPEG (STD/FINE): Unlimited (to card capacity)
Self-timer

• 10 sec
• 2 sec
• Mirror up function (optional)*

Orientation sensor Yes, for shooting, playback and control panel display
Connectivity * • USB 2.0 Hi-Speed (mass storage, Multi-LUN or PTP)
• Video out (NTSC or PAL)
• HDMI type C mini jack
• DC-IN
• Remote terminal
• PC control (with supplied software)
Remote control * • Wired: with optional RM-S1AM or RM-L1AM
• Wireless: with included remote control
Video out • AV (Selectable NTSC or PAL)
• HDMI (1920 x 1080i, 1280 x 720p, 720 x 580p, 720 x 576p)
• 'PhotoTV' HD settings applied with BRAVIA.
Storage * • Compact Flash Type I/II
• Memory Stick Duo / Pro Duo
• Supports FAT12 / FAT16 / FAT32
Power * • NP-FM500H Lithium-Ion rechargeable battery (1650 mAh)
• Battery charger included
• Optional AC adapter
• Batter life Approx 650 shots (CIPA standard)
Vertical grip * • Vertical Grip VG-C70AM
• One or Two NP-FM500H batteries with auto switchover for power (additional battery is optional).
Dimensions 141.7 x 104.8 x 79.7 mm (5.6 x 4.25 x 3.25 in)
Weight (body) • No battery: 690 g (1.5 lb)
• With battery: 768 g (1.7 lb)


Design

The A700 is a pretty successful combination of the old and the new, with the control layout showing heavy Konica Minolta influence (as mentioned earlier, the spirit of the original Maxxum 7D lives on in this camera) but the styling taking a considerable step forward. 7D users will immediately notice the lack of a second dial on top of the camera, though we can happily report that we don't miss it, thanks to the A700's new GUI and control system. As with the 7D the camera positively bristles with buttons, switches, levers and dials, which can seem a little daunting at first. The advantage of retaining the Konica Minolta ethos of putting as many dedicated controls on the body as possible becomes more and more apparent the more you use the camera, and having so much control (quite literally) at your fingertips pays real dividends in situations where you need to react quickly to changing conditions.

Build quality is very solid; a real step up from the A100 and certainly a match for the Canon 40D, though if we're being brutally honest the plastics used still feel a little insubstantial, especially when compared to a true 'semi pro' model like the Nikon D300. The grip has a fine-grained rubber coating that could do with a little more 'grip', but overall the impression - in the hand - is very positive.

In your hand

The great news is that ergonomics are excellent; the A700 is not only very comfortable to use, but the key controls (shutter release, dials and multi selector) are perfectly positioned. As mentioned above I'd prefer the body to have a little more grip (a stickier rubber) to give that added bit of reassurance when holding the camera in one hand, but from a design point of view it's hard to fault the shape, balance or overall 'feel'.

Side by side

We'll look more closely at how the A700 compares with its direct competitors when we complete our full review, but as the shot below shows this is a bigger, more serious looking camera than the A100 - and it's a good 130g heavier too. Interestingly the A700 is around 100g / 0.2lb lighter than the 7D was, and it is actually the most lightweight in its class, though size-wise there is isn't a huge difference between the A700 and any of its nearest competitors.

Camera Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Body weight
(inc. battery & card)
Sony Alpha DSLR-A100 133 x 95 x 71 mm (5.2 x 3.7 x 2.8 in) 638 g (1.4 lb)
Sony Alpha DSLR-A700 142 x 105 x 80 mm (5.6 x 4.2 x 3.2 in) 768 g (1.7 lb)
Pentax K10D 142 x 101 x 70 mm (5.6 x 4.0 x 2.8 in) 793g (1.7 lb)
Canon EOS 40D 146 x 108 x 74 mm(5.7 x 4.2 x 2.9 in 822 g (1.8 lb)
Nikon D300 147 x 114 x 74 mm (5.8 x 4.5 x 2.9 in) 925 g (2.0 lb)

LCD Monitor

The A700 features a new 3.0 inch 'XFine' TFT monitor that boasts 922,000 pixels (640x 3 (RGB) x 480) and appears to be the same unit used on Nikon's new D300. We have to say, it's very, very impressive; sharp, detailed and contrasty, but it's the resolution that really catches your eye. At 270 ppi it's basically impossible to see the pixels with the naked eye, and the visual effect is similar to a good photo print. This makes checking focus in playback a lot easier without the need to zoom right in, and simply makes viewing saved pictures a real treat. We've seen LCD sizes creeping up over the last few years but the latest screens (featured on cameras such as the A700 and the D300) represent a breathtaking step forward in quality. Very, very nice.

The new GUI uses high resolution, beautifully aliased fonts and graphics to give an almost 'print like' quality that is easy on the eye even if it doesn't really make any difference to the actual taking of pictures (nothing wrong with that - I like the 11 speaker system in my car, but it doesn't make it go any faster).

Like the A100 the A700's screen has a pretty effective anti-reflective coating, and like the A100 you'll find yourself wiping smears from it pretty much every time you look at it.

Recording mode display

As per previous Konica Minolta digital SLR's and the A100 before it, the A700 doesn't have any control panel LCD displays, instead it uses the LCD monitor to provide a virtual control panel which summarizes camera settings (there are two levels of detail) and rotates automatically when the camera is placed in the portrait orientation. The big difference is that you can now access the information shown in the display and change settings directly from there (more of which later).

A full breakdown of available information is shown in the diagrams below (camera in horizontal orientation on left, vertical orientation on the right). Note that the diagrams are in the most detailed mode.

Information (advanced mode)

  1. Exposure Mode
  2. Shutter Speed / Aperture
  3. EV scale / Exp comp. / Flash comp.
  4. Focus Area mode
  5. Metering Mode
  6. Sensitivity (ISO)
  7. Drive mode
  8. AF mode
  1. Creative Style
  2. Dynamic Range Optimizer setting
  3. White Balance
  4. Frames remaining
  5. Memory Card
  6. Size
  7. Quality
  8. Battery level

Viewfinder

The A100 had a pretty bright viewfinder but the A700's is a big improvement, as it uses a solid glass prism (rather than a pentamirror). The view, for a cropped camera, is big, bright and very clear, and you don't need to touch the eyepiece with your eyeball to see the entire frame, which is nice. No surprise to see Minolta's eye-start sensor below the viewfinder.

Viewfinder view

Through the viewfinder you will see the center spot-metering circle and 11 AF areas indicated. The selected / in-use AF area is indicated on a half-press of the shutter release with a red glow. The 'Anti-Shake scale' indicates how much the camera is having to compensate for movement, this is obviously a combination of the current actual movement, focal length and shutter speed, ideally you should be aiming to keep this as low as possible. The viewfinder display is very similar to the A100, though it has been tidied up a little, and there's a few new icons - though still, annoyingly, no ISO in the viewfinder. Note the 16:9 framing guide for those advanced SLR users who prefer to view their pictures on the TV.

The focusing screen image in the diagram above is simulated.

Battery / Battery Compartment

The A700 features yet another slight battery variation. The new NP-FM500H InfoLITHIUM is exactly the same size as the NP-FM55H used by the A100, but it has a very slightly different spec (1650 mAh). Though the battery itself is backwardly compatible (the new battery will power the A100), the reverse isn't true - you can't use the A100's battery to power the A700. The battery is charged in around 175 minutes (235 minutes for a 'full charge') using the supplied charger (which can also act as a mains adapter for the camera if you buy an optional cable). Battery life is quoted as 650 shots (using the CIPA standard) but our experience would seem to suggest that is a little on the optimistic side (using the main LCD for status display draws a lot of energy).

Compact Flash Compartment

The A700 sees the return of Memory Stick (DUO) compatibility - poor A100 users had to make do with CompactFlash alone (I'm sure there'll be a huge sigh of relief from semi professional photographers that their SLR can now accept the same slow, pricey memory cards as their PlayStation). The card compartment door is located on the right side of the camera and forms part of the hard grip. The door is spring loaded and flips open once slid back. Inside is the Compact Flash Type II card slot which can accept Type I or Type II cards (including FAT32 cards) and a smaller Memory Stick DUO slot. If both are inserted a menu option allows you to choose which is used for recording/playback.

Connections / Accessory shoe

The A700's connectors are gathered together on the left side of the camera (looking from the rear) under very sturdy (and quite rigid) rubber flaps on proper hinges. At the front you'll find the x-sync socket (for studio flash), remote commander port (for the optional Minolta-standard remote) and DC-in socket. Behind these are a mini USB port (combined data and video out) and the mini HDMI socket for HDTV. On the top of the camera is the Minolta standard accessory shoe. The A700 supports USB 2.0 Hi-Speed (up to 480 Mbps).

Tripod Mount

On the bottom of the camera you'll find the metal tripod socket which is aligned exactly with the center line of the lens. Although there's no rubber foot there is plenty of 'real estate' available for a stable location on a tripod mount.

Internal Flash

The A700 has a pop-up flash on the top of the viewfinder prism, it is opened manually by flicking it up. When raised the flash is approximately 100 mm above the center of the lens, which is about 10 mm more than the A100. The built-in flash unit has a guide number of 12 and a maximum sync speed of 1/250 sec (1/200 sec with AS on).

Lens Mount

No surprises here, a standard Minolta A-type bayonet lens mount (now re-named the Sony Alpha mount of course, and given a rather garish orange trim). As usual there is a red indicator dot for aligning the lens and lock by rotating clockwise. Just like other Minolta AF SLR's the camera goes through a priming process when a len is attached by spinning the focus motor connector to ensure it has connected correctly to the lens. This mount supports either body driven focus or lenses with built-in focus motors.

Vertical Grip

With the introduction of the A700 comes with one very welcome optional extra, a very solid (but surprisingly lightweight) vertical grip, the VG-C70AM. The grip powers the camera using one (or optionally two) NP-FM500H batteries (again, no luck for owners of NP-FM55 batteries) and is attached by removing the battery from the camera. There is a small slot in the body of the grip to accommodate the A700's battery compartment door (in other words you don't have to take the door off). The grip has a vertical shutter release that is positioned lower than normal so it still lines up with the top of the lens and the viewfinder, meaning the camera feels remarkably similar whichever orientation you use it in. I have to say, handling with the VG-C70 attached is excellent.

The grip has a full complement of switches and buttons to replicate those on the rear of the camera, meaning when it is attached the A700 has well over 30 buttons, switches and dials on the exterior of the body

Controls built into the Vertical Grip

  • Fn (Function) button
  • C (Custom) button
  • Multi Controller
  • AEL / Slow Synch / Spot meter button
  • AF/MF button
  • AE-Compensation button
  • On/Off switch
  • Twin (front and rear) control dials.

Shutter Release Sound

In some of our digital SLR reviews we now provide a sound recording of a continuous burst of shots. Below you can see waveforms of a recording made of the DSLR-A700 shooting continuously JPEG Large/Fine for 30 seconds. The storage card used was a 2 GB SanDisk Extreme IV Compact Flash.

JPEG continuous, 30 seconds

Sony DSLR-A700 JPEG continuous 30 seconds; MP3 470 KB

Top of camera controls (left)

On the top right of the camera we have the exposure mode dial and the main power (on/off) slider switch.

Exposure modes

Position
 
Mode
 
Auto Program Exposure

This is essentially the camera's "point and shoot" mode. When you select this mode various settings return to their defaults (with most defaulting to 'auto'). However unlike other digital cameras in Auto mode they are not locked and can be adjusted (apart from creative style, which is fixed to 'standard').
P

Program Exposure (with shift)

Program exposure mode on the A700 can be shifted, this means that you can select one of a variety of equal exposures by turning the control dial, by default the exposure is shifted by shutter speed (indicated as PS), you can choose to shift by aperture (PA) by changing the 'Control dial set' option in the custom menu. If you turn off the direct AE compensation option you can use Aperture or Shutter speed shift by turning the rear or front control dials.

A

Aperture Priority

In this mode you select the aperture and the camera will calculate the shutter speed for the exposure (depending on metered value; metering mode, ISO). Aperture is displayed on the viewfinder status bar and the LCD monitor (if recording display is enabled), turn the front or rear control dial to select different apertures. Note that if you have direct AE compensation turned on one of the dials will control AE-C instead.

S

Shutter Priority

In this mode you select the shutter speed and the camera will calculate the correct aperture for the exposure (depending on metered value; metering mode, ISO). Shutter speed is displayed on the viewfinder status bar and the LCD monitor (if recording display is enabled), turn the front or rear control dial to select different shutter speeds. Note that if you have direct AE compensation turned on one of the dials will control AE-C instead.

M

Full Manual Exposure

In this mode you select the aperture and the shutter speed (and additionally Bulb shutter). Again by default the front dial controls shutter speed, the rear controls aperture, but this can be flipped using the custom menu. As you turn the dials the EV scale on the recording display and the viewfinder status line indicates how close the selected exposure is to the metered exposure (+/- 3 EV).

Scene exposure modes

Most of the settings in any of the scene exposure modes are the same as 'Auto' mode, that is Auto ISO, Multi-Segment metering etc. However there are obviously other parameters which vary with each mode, including the Creative Style mode, metering and white balance. You cannot change the Creative Style mode in any of the scene exposure modes.

Position
 
Mode
 
Portrait

Selects large apertures (small F numbers) to reduce the depth of field and make the portrait subject stand out from the background.
Landscape
Selects small apertures (large F numbers) to enlarge the depth of field and ensure more of the image appears to be sharp and 'in focus'.

Macro
Tends to select faster shutter speeds to avoid shake at high macro magnifications (although does tend to try to maintain an aperture of around F5.6).

Sports

Selects faster shutter speeds to capture moving action, also engages continuous drive mode. Uses Continuous AF and Continuous (burst) drive mode.
Sunset

Selects small apertures (large F numbers) to enlarge the depth of field and sets the white balance to preserve the warm colors.
Night view / portrait

Uses slow shutter speed and exposure / color settings suited to night photography. The difference (between night view and night portrait) is that one is without and the other with the flash.

Top of camera controls (right)

The majority of the A700's photographic controls are clustered around the top right-hand corner of the body within easy reach of your thumb. We'll look first at those found on the top plate. Here you'll find the shutter release and front control dial plus buttons giving direct access to AE compensation (+/-), White Balance, ISO and Drive mode.

Control Dials

Unlike the Alpha 100, but like the Konica Minolta 7D, the A700 has two control dials that are used to adjust exposure or settings after a button has been pressed. The "front control dial" is mounted in front of the shutter release button and the "rear control dial" is mounted horizontally on the rear right corner of the camera just under your thumb. The dials are also used to control shutter speeds and apertures, for scrolling images in playback and (if configured to do so) to offer direct, instant AE compensation control.

Buttons (shooting mode)

Changing ISO (not all settings shown) Changing WB (not all settings shown)

As mentioned a couple of pages back the A700 offers more than one way to access and control the various options and settings commonly used when taking pictures. The top panel buttons (white balance, AE-C, drive and ISO) offer direct control over settings using a 'hold down the button and turn the dial' process (incidentally you can disable this so pressing any of the top buttons always brings up the 'exclusive' menu for that item'.

Button
 
Action
 
DRIVE Drive mode (turn front dial whilst pressed to change setting)

 • Single frame advance
 • Continuous advance (turn rear dial to swap between L and H modes)
 • Self-timer (turn rear dial between 10 or 2 seconds)
 • Continuous bracketing (press up/down to select exposure step)
 • Single frame bracketing (press up/down to select exposure step)
 • White balance bracketing (press up/down to select Hi / Lo step)
 • DRO bracketing (press up/down to select Hi / Lo step)
 • Remote control (using supplied wireless remote)

Exposure compensation / Flash Output control

Hold this button and turn the front or rear dial to change the metered exposure using the on-screen scale. Note that the front or rear dial can be set to give direct access to exposure compensation (i.e. without the button held down)

ISO

ISO (turn front dial whilst pressed to change setting)

Hold this button and turn the rear dial to change the ISO (sensitivity) setting in 0.3EV steps. Hold this button and turn the front dial to change the ISO (sensitivity) setting in 1EV steps.

 • Rear Dial values: AUTO, ISO 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200, 4000*, 5000*, 6400*

 • Front Dial values: AUTO, ISO 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400*
(*expanded ISO range)

WB

ISO (turn front dial whilst pressed to change setting)

Hold this button and turn the front dial to cycle through the various white balance presets and custom modes. Use the rear dial to fine-tune the white balance.

Front dial

Used to change settings and navigate menus, by default also used to select shutter speed in M modes and for direct access to AE compensation in all auto modes. The function of the front dial can be customized to a certain degree. The front dial is also used for scrolling through images in playback mode.

Rear of camera controls

The rear of the camera is dominated by the large 3.0 " LCD monitor and is absolutely covered in switches and buttons. Running down the left side of the screen are a column of four buttons (Menu, Display, Delete and Play). To the right of the viewfinder are the AE lock (surrounded by a circular dial for changing the metering pattern) and AF/MF buttons, and the rear control dial. Below these is the new Multi Selector - a 'joystick' style four-directional controller with a central OK button. Below this are a customizable 'C' button and the new Fn button (used to activate the quick select functions of the information display). Finally the prominent Super SteadyShot switch sits at the bottom right of the body.

Shooting mode controls

Control
 
Function
 
MENU Menu

Enters or leaves the current mode menu, all menus are accessible once in the menu system but pressing this button in Play mode will take you directly to the Play section.
DISP

Display

Select recording information display mode:

 • Detailed display
 • Enlarged display
 • No display

Delete (record review).

During record review (image playback immediately after taking the shot) you can press this button to delete the image. This displays a Delete / Cancel confirmation box.
Play

Enters play mode, displays the last image taken or the last image browsed.
Multi Selector

The multi selector is used to navigate menus and make selections (using the center button). If the AF area is set to 'Local' the controller is also used to select your focus point when shooting. Pressing the center button forces the camera to focus on the center spot (irrespective of the focus area or spot currently in use).
AF/MF AF/MF button

If auto focus is active, pressing and holding this button temporarily switches to manual focus mode (and vice-versa). Alternatively the custom menu allows you to change the operation to a toggle mode (press once two switch between AF and MF, once again to switch back)
C

Custom button

By default pressing this button activates the Creative Style menu, though it can be customized to control any of the following:

 • AF Lock
 • AF/MF control
 • D.O.F preview
 • ISO
 • White Balance
 • Exposure Comp.
 • Flash Comp.
 • Drive Mode
 • AF Area
 • Image Size
 • Quality
 • Creative Style (default)
 • D-Range Optimizer (DRO)
 • Flash Mode
 • Memory

Fn Function button

Activates the Quick Navi screen, allowing direct control of all settings shown on the information display.
AEL AE Lock button / Slow Sync / M-Shift

By default acts as a standard AEL lock button (hold it down to lock the exposure), though you can change the behavior to 'Hold' (press once to activate AEL).

If the flash is on and you are not in M or S mode this button also activates the slow sync mode.

It can also be customized to act as a spot meter button.

In manual exposure (M) mode holding this button down activates a 'Manual Shift' option, which allows you to retain a fixed exposure but to change the aperture and shutter speed combination by turning the front dial.
Super SteadyShot

Used to enable or disable the 'Super SteadyShot' CCD-shift anti shake system.

Metering mode switch

Button
 
Action
 
Multi Segment Metering (40 segment)

Uses a honeycomb-pattern with 39 segments (plus one metering element that covers the rest of the frame) to calculate the best possible exposure. The metering is linked to the autofocus in order to ensure the main subject is correctly exposed
Center Weighted Metering

Measures light over the entire area of the image extra emphasis given to the center area.
Spot Metering

Uses a circular area in the center of the frame (as indicated in the viewfinder) to calculate the light value. This is used to meter individual subjects in the frame.

Play mode controls

Control
 
Function
 
MENU Menu

Enters or leaves the current mode menu, all menus are accessible once in the menu system but pressing this button in Play mode will take you directly to the Play section.
DISP

Display

Select play mode display:

 • Image with information overlay
 • Just image
 • Film strip (thumbs and single large image)

Also used to change the number of thumbnails in index view

Delete (play only)

In play mode press this button to delete the currently displayed / selected image. This displays a Yes / No confirmation box.
Play

Leaves play mode and returns to shooting. Note that you can achieve the same function by simply half-pressing the shutter release button.
Histogram

Switches to a histogram display view of the current image.
Multi Selector

Press left or right arrows to browse through the images, note that you can also use the control dial to achieve the same function. When magnified the controller is used to scroll around the image.
Rotate

Allows you to rotate the displayed image through 90, 180 or 270 degrees.
Magnify (zoom in)

In play mode enters the camera's magnify mode, press again to magnify the image further (up to 16x). Interestingly the A700 memorizes the last magnify 'level' used and returns to that when the button is pressed.

Index

Toggles index (thumbnail) mode on and off. To change the number of thumbnails use the DISP button.

Front of camera controls

On the front left of the camera located on the side of the lens mount surround is the Depth-of-Field preview button (press to temporarily stop the lens down to the metered or selected aperture). On the front right of the camera is the lens release button, below this the Focus mode switch which allows you to select between Single, Auto, Continuous and Manual focus modes. On the front of the grip is a new sensor that is used (optionally) to ensure the eye start focus system only activates if you're actually holding the camera.

Record mode display

As with the A100 (and the the Konica Minolta SLRs that came before it) the A700 does without a traditional LCD control panel information display and instead employs the more flexible (though more power hungry) method of using the LCD monitor as a record mode display for camera settings, exposure etc. In record mode you can press the Display button to toggle between the full recording mode display, 'enlarged' recording mode display (which has less information) or no display.

Note: apologies for the rather poor quality of some of the screen grabs on the next few pages - we had some problems with the composite video output on our A700.

Detailed recording mode display

Enlarged recording mode display

Using the Quick Navi menu

A key difference between the A700 and its predecessor(s) is that you can now change most settings directly from the info screen by pressing the 'Fn' button, which turns the screen into a 'Quick Navi' menu (similar to many other modern DSLRs). Using the multi-commander you simply move the highlight from one setting to another. Pressing the central button brings up a mini menu for that item, allowing you to change settings. It works well and my only complaint is that you can't change the button used to activate the Quick Navi menu - odd when so much customization is on offer - and the Fn button is too much of a stretch for your thumb (so changing settings is impossible if you're not holding the camera with both hands (and it feels unnecessarily fiddly). There is, however, a way to overcome this (see next section).

Pressing the Fn button turns on the Quick Navi screen. The left, right, up and down arrows on the multi-controller are used to move from one setting to another. Press the middle button on the controller and a menu appears allowing you to change the setting.
Selecting a Creative Style

Changing Exposure Comp. setting.

Using the direct access buttons

By default you see a dedicated menu - as shown above - when you press one of the external buttons (ISO, DRIVE, WB and +/-) on the top of the camera. An option in the custom menu allows you to change settings directly on the Quick Navi screen by pressing one of these buttons and turning the front control dial. For settings - such as white balance - with additional options, the rear dial cycles through the parameters. The table below shows the (default) function of each dial/button combo:

Button Front Dial Rear Dial
ISO Change ISO (1 EV steps) Change ISO (0.3 EV steps)
WB Cycle through WB presets • Presets: Change WB adjustments (+3 to -3)
• Kelvin: Change Kelvin value and color filter
• Custom WB: choose from 3 saved settings, create new setting
DRIVE Cycle through drive, bracketing, self timer, remote control modes • Continuous: Hi or Lo
• Self timer: duration
• Bracketing: EV step and number of frames
+/- AE compensation AE compensation (same as front dial)

One big advantage of using the Quick Navi screen in this way is that once you've pressed one of the direct access buttons you can use the multi-commander to move to any of the other on-screen settings (thus overcoming the rather awkward positioning of the Fn button).

The screens below show the front dial being turned (not all options shown)

AE comp. Drive

Record review / Play display

The A700 has four different record review (instant playback) / play displays; Image only, Image & information, Image & histograms (including blinking highlights/shadows) and a hybrid filmstrip/image view (shows last 5 shots as thumbs across the top). Record review will use the last selected play mode display format. During record review you can press the delete button to delete the image or the magnify button for a quick close-up view (useful for checking focus / blur). Note that blinking highlights / shadows are only shown in the histogram display mode (which is a pity).

Image only

Image and basic information

Image, full shooting data and histogram (note there are now RGB and Luminance histograms) 'Film strip' thumbnails + image

Magnification

Press the 'magnify in' button to display the image at the previously used magnification level. Use the controller to scroll around the image, the rear dial to change the magnification, the center button (on the controller) to switch to loupe mode (example below) and the front control dial to browse through images while remaining magnified.

Initial magnification (previous used) Turn the rear control dial to change the magnification level (fro 1.1x to 16x)
Press the button in the middle of the controller to switch to loupe mode; move the loupe using the controller, change the magnification level using the rear dial again. Press the center button again to return to magnify mode, press the magnify button to exit

Thumbnail index

The play mode menu allows you to select between 4, 9 or 25 thumbnails in index view. You can jump one page at a time using the rear control dial and you can jump from folder to folder (if you have more than one folder created) by pressing the button in the middle of the multi controller.

Four image index Nine image index
 
25 image index  


Camera Menus

The A700's menus (accessed by pressing the MENU button in any mode) are grouped into four sections; Record (4 pages), Custom (4 pages), Playback (2 pages) and Setup (3 pages). The menus are navigated using either the multi-controller or the control dials (rear scrolls horizontally through the menus, front scrolls up and down individual menus). It's a fast and efficient system.

Record menu

The record menu provides for configuration of settings which will affect the final image file as well as the behavior of some of the automatic settings. Many of the more common options can be accessed using the Quick Navi function or by pressing one of the external buttons, so there's not much need to visit this menu on a regular basis in everyday photography. The options for each item are revealed by pressing the center button on the multi-controller.

Option Values / Actions Notes
Page one
Image size  • L: 12M
 • M: 6.4M
 • S: 3.0M

- 4272 x 2848
- 3104 x 2064
- 2128 x 1424

Aspect Ratio  • 3:2
 • 16:9
 
Quality
 • RAW
 • cRAW
 • RAW & JPEG
 • RAW & JPEG
 • Extra Fine
 • Fine
 • Standard

- uncompressed RAW
- compressed RAW
- JPEG is a 'Fine'
- JPEG is a 'Fine'

D-Range Optimizer

 • Off
 • Standard
 • Advanced Auto
 • Advanced
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5

[clip]
Creative Style [clip]  • Standard
 • Vivid
 • Neutral
 • AdobeRGB

 

'Unswitcheable Styles'
• Custom options:
Contrast (+3 to -3)
Saturation (+3 to -3)
Sharpness (+3 to -3)

 • Standard
 • Vivid
 • Neutral
 • AdobeRGB
 • Clear
 • Deep
 • Light
 • Portrait
 • Landscape
 • Sunset
 • Night View
 • Autumn Leaves
 • B/W*
 • Sepia*

'Switcheable Styles'
• Custom options:
Contrast (+3 to -3)
Saturation (+3 to -3)
Sharpness (+3 to -3)
Brightness (+3 to -3)
Zone Matching (-1 to +2)
[clip]
- these creative styles are best thought of as 'starting points' that can be customized and saved into one of the three 'style boxes' for immediate recall

*saturation option not available

Custom Button  • AF Lock
 • AF/MF control
 • D.O.F Preview
 • ISO
 • White Balance
 • Exposure Comp.
 • Flash Comp.
 • Drive Mode
 • AF Area
 • Image Size
 • Quality
 • Creative Style
 • D-Range Optimizer
 • Flash Mode
 • Memory

Define the setting controlled by the 'C' button [clip]











– Saves the current settings

Exposure Step  • 0.5 EV
 • 0.3 EV
 
Page two
Flash Mode

 • Autoflash
 • Fill-flash
 • Rear sync.
 • Wireless

- AUTO / scene modes only

Flash control  • ADI flash
 • Pre-flash TTL
 • Manual Flash
 
Power Ratio  • 1/1 (GN12)
 • 1/2 (GN8.4)
 • 1/4 (GN6)
 • 1/4 (GN4.2)
 • 1/16 (GN3)
- manual flash output power
Flash Compens.  • +3 to -3 slider  
Flash default  • Auto flash
 • Fill-flash

ISO Auto max.  • 1600
 • 800
 • 400
[clip]
ISO Auto min.  • 400
 • 200
[clip]
Page three
AF-A setup

 • AF-A
 • DMF (direct manual focus)

- adjusts function of 'AFA' position on focus mode dial

AF area  • Wide
 • Spot
 • Local
 
Priority Setup .  • AF
 • Release
Choose whether the camera will release the shutter without focus lock
AF Illuminator  • Auto
 • Off

AF w/ shutter  • On
 • Off
– determines whether half-press activates the AF.
Long Exposure NR  • On
 • Off
- exposures of 1 second or longer
High ISO NR  • High
 • Normal
 • Low
- ISO 1600 and higher
Memory  • Select Register (1,2 or 3) Allows you to save current settings to one of three custom memory registers
Rec mode reset   Displays a 'Reset recording mode? OK /Cancel dialog box.

Custom menu

In addition to the record menu options the A700 also has four pages of custom menu options which allow for personalization of the camera to a very high degree.

Option Values / Actions Notes
Page one
Eye-Start AF  • On
 • Off


Eye-Start trigger  • w/ GripSensor
 • w/o GripSensor
determines whether the eye start AF requires you to be holding the grip to activate.
AF/MF button  • AF/MF control
 • AF lock
 
AF/MF control  • Hold
 • Toggle
Choose if the AF/MF button must be held or toggles focus mode.
AF drive speed  • Fast
 • Slow
Focus speed can be reduced for awkward subjects such as macros
AF area Disp.  • 0.3 sec display
 • 0.6 sec display
 • Display off

Controls how long the selected AF area is illuminated in the viewfinder

Focus Hold Button [clip]  • Focus Hold
 • D.O.F preview
Determines function of focus hold button (on lenses that have one).
Page two
AEL button [clip] • AEL hold
• AEL toggle
 • Spot AE hold
 • Spot AE toggle
Choose if the AEL button must be held or toggles AE lock, additionally this can be set to spot meter.
Ctrl dial setup  • Front SS / Rear F/no
 • Front F/no / Rear SS
Sets the function of the control dial in P and M modes [clip]
Dial Exp Comp.  • Off
 • Front dial
 • Rear dial

allows you to set one of the dials to offer direct access to exposure compensation.

Ctrl dial lock  • On
 • Off
When selected (on) the control dials only function when the shutter speed and aperture are displayed on-screen / in the viewfinder
Button ops.  • Exclusive Display
 • Quick Navi
Determines whether pressing the external buttons (ISO etc) brings up a dedicated menu or allows you to change settings directly on the Quick Navi screen.
Release w/o Card  • Enable
 • Disable
 
Release w/o Lens  • Enable
 • Disable
 
Page three
Red Eye Reduction  • On
 • Off

Exp. Comp. Set  • On: no lens
 • Off: no lens

 • Ambient & flash
 • Ambient only

Bracket order  • 0, -, +
 • -, 0, +

Auto Review  • 10 secs
 • 5 secs
 • 2 secs
 • Off
 
Auto Off w/ VF  • On
 • Off

When set to on the eye sensors are used to switch off the LCD

Rec. info. disp  • Auto rotate
 • Horizontal

Controls whether the recording information display is rotated or not

Img. Orientation  • Record
 • Not Record
 
Page Four
Custom Reset Enter

Displays a 'Reset custom functions? OK /Cancel dialog box.


Menus cont..

Play menu

Option Values / Actions Notes
Page one
Delete  • Marked frames
Selection index
 • All images
Yes
No

Format  • Enter
Yes
No
 
Protect  • Marked images
Selection index
 • All images
 • Cancel all
 
DPOF setup  • Marked images
Selection index
 • All on card
No. of copies?
 • Cancel all
 
Date Imprint  • On
 • Off
 
Index print  • Create Index
 • Delete Index
 
Playback Display  • Auto Rotate
 • Manual Rotate
 
Page two
Slide show  • Enter
Interval  • 30 sec
 • 10 sec
 • 5 sec
 • 3 sec
 • 1 sec
 

Setup menu

The last menu is the Setup menu which allows you to configure general camera settings (mostly digital related) such as USB transfer modes, video output etc. This menu is split across three pages.

Option Values / Actions Notes
Page one
LCD brightness  • Enter
Low (-5) to High (+5)

Info. disp. time  • 1 min
 • 30 sec
 • 10 sec
 • 5 sec
How long the recording information stays displayed on the LCD if no buttons are pressed.
Power save  • 30 min
 • 10 min
 • 5 min
 • 3 min
 • 1 min
The amount of time before the camera enters 'sleep' state, it can be woken by a half-press of the shutter release or one of the LCD buttons
Video output  • NTSC
 • PAL
 
HDMI output  • HD (1080i) priority
 • HD (720p) priority
 • SD priority
[clip]
Language  • English
 • French
 • Spanish
 • Italian
 • Chinese (Simplified)
 • Chinese (Traditional)

Varies by region

Date/Time set  • Enter
Date
Time
Date format
 
Page two
Memory Card  • CompactFlash
 • Memory Stick
[clip]
File number  • Series
 • Reset

Folder name  • Standard form
 • Date form
 
Select folder  • 100MSDCF
 • 101MSDCF
 • etc.
 
New folder  • Enter Creates a new running number folder
Transfer mode  • Mass storage
 • PTP
 • Remote PC
- USB 'mass storage device'
- For PictBridge etc
- For Remote Camera Control
MassStrg.card  • Both cards
 • Selected card
Which cards appear in the PC when connected via USB
Page three
Menu Start  • Top
 • Previous

Lets you choose to always display the last selected menu screen when you next hit the MENU button.

Delete confirm  • "Delete" first
 • "Cancel" first
Set the default option for the delete confirm box
Audio signals  • On
 • Off
 
Cleaning mode  • Enter
Yes
No
Enables manual cleaning of the sensor by locking up the mirror and opening the shutter.
Reset default  • Enter Displays a 'Reset Default? OK /Cancel dialog box.

Timings & File Sizes

The DSLR-A700's overall performance was extremely good, compared to other similar level digital SLRs the only noteworthy difference may be the subtle one second startup time (although off to shot is just 0.7 seconds, nothing which would ever get in the way). In our continuous shooting test the A700 proved to have a good buffer and fast processor and was limited only by the performance of the storage card, we got some amazing figures using a SanDisk Ultra IV CF card but had some strangely lacking performance from the Lexar 133x CF card (although a Lexar 300x CF was ok). The A700 also produced the highest USB transfer speed we've seen to date.

Timing Notes: All times calculated as an average of three operations. Unless otherwise stated all timings were made on a 3888 x 2592 JPEG Fine (approx. 3,200 KB per image).

The media used for these tests were:

  • 2 GB SanDisk Extreme IV CF card
  • 2 GB Lexar Pro 133x CF card
  • 16 GB SanDisk Extreme III CF card

Media comparison

Action
Time, secs
(2 GB SanDisk)
Time, secs
(2 GB Lexar)
Time, secs
(16 GB SanDisk)

Power Off to On *1

1.0 1.0 1.0
Power Off to Shot 0.7 0.7 0.7
Sleep to On <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
Power On to Off *2 1.7 1.7 1.6
Record Review RAW *3 1.0 1.1 1.3
Record Review JPEG *3 1.0 1.0 1.0
Play RAW <0.5 <0.5 <0.5
Play JPEG <0.5 <0.5 <0.5
Play Image to Image RAW <0.2 <0.2 <0.2
Play Image to Image JPEG <0.2 <0.2 <0.2

*1 Time taken from the power switch being turned to the ON position and the control panel display appearing on the main LCD.
*2 Time taken for the camera to completely power down, it first carries out a 'sensor shake' clean and then continues to access the storage card for just over a second.
*3 Time taken from the shutter release being pressed to the review image being displayed on the LCD monitor.

Continuous Drive mode

To test continuous drive mode the camera had the following settings: Manual Focus, ISO 200, Shutter Priority (1/2000 sec). Measurements were taken from audio recordings of the tests. Media used were the same as above.

The tests carried out below measured the following results for JPEG and RAW:

  • Frame rate - Initial frame rate, this was always 4.9 fps (+/- 0.01 fps)
  • Number of frames - Number of frames in a burst (until buffer full)
  • Buffer full rate - Frame rate if shutter release held down after burst (buffer full)
  • Next burst - How long after the last shot the camera indicates buffer space '9'
  • Write complete - How long after the last shot before the CF compartment light goes out

Burst of JPEG Large/Fine images

Timing
2 GB SanDisk
Extreme IV CF
2 GB Lexar
Pro 133x CF
16 GB SanDisk
Extreme III CF
Frame rate 4.9 fps 4.9 fps 4.9 fps
Number of frames Unlimited 183 103
Buffer full rate - n/a (uneven) n/a (uneven)
Next burst (buffer 9 indicated) - 5.7 sec 10.0 sec
Write complete - 20.2 sec 34.0 sec

Burst of JPEG Large/X.Fine images

Timing
2 GB SanDisk
Extreme IV CF
2 GB Lexar
Pro 133x CF
16 GB SanDisk
Extreme III CF
Frame rate 4.9 fps 4.9 fps 4.9 fps
Number of frames 178 40 38
Buffer full rate n/a (uneven) n/a (uneven) n/a (uneven)
Next burst (buffer 9 indicated) - 12.0 sec 13.1 sec
Write complete 3.2 sec 22.1 sec 24.5 sec

Burst of cRAW images

Timing
2 GB SanDisk
Extreme IV CF
2 GB Lexar
Pro 133x CF
16 GB SanDisk
Extreme III CF
Frame rate 4.9 fps 4.9 fps 4.9 fps
Number of frames 26 14 14
Buffer full rate 3.1 fps 0.7 fps 0.8 fps
Next burst (buffer 9 indicated) 3.4 sec 15.0 sec 12.9 sec
Write complete 4.5 sec 19.6 sec 17.0 sec

Burst of RAW images

Timing
2 GB SanDisk
Extreme IV CF
2 GB Lexar
Pro 133x CF
16 GB SanDisk
Extreme III CF
Frame rate 4.9 fps 4.9 fps 4.9 fps
Number of frames 20 13 14
Buffer full rate 2.1 fps 0.5 fps 0.6 fps
Next burst (buffer 9 indicated) 4.9 sec 22.0 sec 17.6 sec
Write complete 6.5 sec 28.5 sec 22.8 sec

The specified shooting speed of a full five frames per second wasn't quite achievable although I don't think anyone is going to miss the fractional 0.1 fps difference. Overall an impressive performance, especially using the SanDisk Extreme IV card which provided unlimited shooting in 'JPEG Fine' mode and almost 180 frames in 'JPEG X.Fine', the Lexar card performed less well (see below for more). While not aimed at sports photographers the A700 can still fire quickly enough and for long enough to be used for most purposes.

File Flush Timing

Timings shown below are the time taken for the camera to process and "flush" the image out to the storage card. Timing was taken from the instant the shutter release was pressed to the time the storage card activity lamp beside the compartment door went out. Media used were the same as above.

Image type
Time, secs
(2 GB SanDisk)
Time, secs
(2 GB Lexar)
Time, secs
(16 GB SanDisk)
Approx.
size
4272 x 2848 RAW + JPEG 1.5 3.7 3.4 22,700 KB
4272 x 2848 cRAW + JPEG 1.4 3.0 2.9 16,700 KB
4272 x 2848 RAW 1.2 3.0 2.6 18,600 KB
4272 x 2848 cRAW 1.1 2.4 2.2 12,600 KB
4272 x 2848 JPEG X.Fine 1.1 2.0 1.9 9,100 KB
4272 x 2848 JPEG Fine 1.0 1.4 1.6 4,100 KB

As you can see there's quite a large performance differential between the SanDisk Extreme IV and the Lexar Pro 133x . Further testing produced figures of 34 MB/sec for the SanDisk Extreme IV and just 8 MB/sec for the Lexar Pro 133x. We also tested an 8 GB Lexar Pro 300x (UDMA) CF card which produced the same 34 MB/sec performance as the SanDisk IV (so the 'problem' appears to be only with Lexar Pro 133x cards).

USB transfer speed

To test the DSLR-A700's USB transfer speed we transferred approximately 320 MB of images (mixed RAW and JPEG) from a SanDisk Extreme IV 2 GB CF card.

Method
Transfer rate
CardBus PCMCIA adapter 10.5 MB/sec
Sony DSLR-A700 (PTP device) 11.8 MB/sec
SanDisk Extreme IV USB 2.0 card reader 13.3 MB/sec
Sony DSLR-A700 (Mass storage device) 21.6 MB/sec

The DSLR-A700 in 'Mass storage device' mode delivered the fastest USB 2.0 transfer times of any camera to date, a mighty impressive 21.6 MB/sec means that which means two gigabytes of images would take just over ninety seconds to transfer. Kudos Sony.


Image parameters

The A700 provides four basic 'Creative Styles' (renamed from Color mode on the A100) as well as three user definable modes which provide the option to select a baseline Creative Style from one of no less than fourteen options. Each Creative Style modifies the color mapping and tonal appearance of the image (for A/B examples see Color in our Photographic tests). In the four basic Creative Style modes (Standard, Vivid, Neutral and Adobe RGB) you can adjust contrast, saturation and sharpness. Additionally in the three user definable modes you can also adjust brightness and zone. Sony has also improved the latitude of adjustment with seven levels for each setting (apart from zone which has four settings).

Image parameter adjustments

  • Creative Style: Standard, Vivid, Neutral, Adobe RGB, User def. 1 - 3
  • User def. modes: Standard, Vivid, Neutral, Adobe RGB, Clear, Deep, Light, Portrait, Landscape,
    Sunset, Night, Autumn, B/W, Sepia
  • Image parameter adjustments
    • Contrast: -3 to +3
    • Saturation: -3 to +3
    • Sharpness: -3 to +3
    • Brightness: -3 to +3 (User def. only)
    • Zone: -1 to +2 (User def. only)

Contrast adjustment

Adjusting the tone alters the shape of the 'S curve' used to map the linear image data captured by the sensor into the correct gamma. A lower contrast setting maintains more of the original data's dynamic range but leads to a flatter looking image. A higher contrast setting stretches the grayscale (dark to light) of the image and could lead to clipping of both shadow detail and highlights. Kudos to Sony for expanding the range of adjustment, you now have three levels either side of 'normal'.

  Thumbnail Luminosity histogram
-3
-1
0
+1
+3

Brightness adjustment

A brightness adjustment is fairly unusual, in fact I can think of only one or two other cameras which provide this option. Adjusting the brightness appears to shift the mapping of the 'black point' which could be useful for 'lifting' shadows on a bright day or delivering a more definite black in a studio situation.

  Thumbnail Luminosity histogram
-3
-1
0
+1
+3

Zone adjustment

The zone adjustment enables you to perform zone matching which effectively stretches or compresses the shadow or highlight areas of the grayscale. Use a negative setting to lift shadows for low-key shots or a positive setting to compress (and maintain) highlights for high-key shots. You can see this in effect in the histograms below.

  Thumbnail Luminosity histogram
-1
0
+1
+2

Image parameters (contd.)

Sharpness

The A700's default sharpness setting of zero is just enough to deliver good detail but not so much as to introduce any noticeable sharpening artifacts. Obviously if you prefer your images a bit crisper straight out of the camera you could opt for the +1 or +2 setting.

Sharpness: -3
Sharpness: -2

Sharpness: -1

Sharpness: 0 (Default)

Sharpness: +1
Sharpness: +2

Sharpness: +3

Saturation adjustment

Saturation adjustment allows you to control the strength of color in the final image. As you can see the A700's default color saturation (level zero) already delivers fairly punchy colors, for a more neutral response we'd recommend dropping down to -1.

  Thumbnail 25% crop
-3
-1
0
+1
+3

Super SteadyShot (Sensor-shift Image Stabilization)

The DSLR-A700 features Sony's 'Super SteadyShot' sensor-shift image stabilization system (a development of the 'Anti-Shake' system we first saw on the Konica Minolta 7D). This system works by moving the sensor in the opposite direction to the sensed shake movement of the camera.

The stabilization test

This test is designed to produce a determination of the relative improvement you should expect using the SteadyShot system compared to with it switched off. Twenty hand-held shots are taken of a static scene at reasonable shutter speed (1/80 sec in this case), ten without stabilization, ten with. The shutter speed is then decreased by a stop and twenty more shots taken, this is repeated down to 1/10 sec. The test chart was approximately 1.2 m away from the camera.

The resulting eighty images were then inspected and given a blur score from zero to three where zero represented a very blurred image and three a sharp image with no noticeable blur (see crop examples below). Obviously the amount of blur which is acceptable will depend on your personal taste and the final image size (for instance a '2: Soft' will still look fine as a 4x6 print or in a web gallery). Example crops from these four blur scores can be seen below.

0: Very blurred 1: Blurred
2: Soft 3: Sharp

Hand-held, no stabilization (75 mm equiv. FOV)

The results here show that at 1/80 sec all of our shots were sharp, but this dropped to just six at 1/40 sec and after that only a few 'acceptable but soft'.

Hand-held, with Super SteadyShot (75 mm equiv. FOV)

With 'Super SteadyShot' switched on you can see an immediate improvement. At 1/40 sec we had a total of seven sharp images, at 1/20 sec an impressive four sharp images and six other 'acceptable but soft' and even two sharp images at 1/10 sec. Overall a good performance.



Software

The DSLR-A700 is provided with a software CD which contains:

  • Picture Motion Browser 2.1.02 (Windows) - An easy to use and fast image and video clip
    cataloging and browsing application with a fairly unique calendar based animated interface.
     
  • Image Data Lightbox SR 1.0 (Windows / Mac OS X) - An image browsing and workflow
    application designed for rating and selecting images from a large collection. Provides synchronized
    side-by-side comparison of images in 2, 3 and 4 images per screen views.
     
  • Image Data Converter SR 2.0 (Windows / Mac OS X) - A further development of the previously
    seen Image Data Converter SR, provides advanced RAW conversion capabilities, adjustments
    include Creative Style, Sharpness (including overshoot / undershoot tuning), Highlight Color
    Distortion reduction and Noise Reduction.

RAW conversion

As is normal in our digital SLR reviews I like to compare the supplied RAW conversion software, any optional manufacturer RAW conversion software and some third party RAW converter. In the case of the A700 we had the supplied Image Data Converter SR as well as Adobe Camera RAW 4.3 beta.

  • JPEG - Large/Fine, Default settings
  • IDC - Image Data Converter SR 2.0.01.09280
  • ACR - Adobe Camera RAW 4.3 beta

Color reproduction

Place your mouse over the label below the image to see the color from a GretagMacbeth ColorChecker chart produced using each RAW converter. As you can see Image Data Converter matches the color response of the cameras internal image processor very closely (there are some very subtle differences but it's unlikely you'd see these in real life). As usual Adobe Camera RAW has its own 'different' color response, deeper blues but slightly paler reds.

           
           
           
           
JPEG Standard RAW Sony IDC RAW Adobe ACR

Sharpness and Detail

As you can see from the 100% crops below there's really very little difference in this comparison between JPEG from the camera, RAW converted using Image Data Converter and RAW converted using Adobe Camera RAW. If anything the ACR image perhaps has slightly crisper edges around high contrast (black on white) detail.

J
P
E
G

I
D
C

A
C
R

Resolution

The differences between these three are pretty obvious, and stark. The JPEG from the camera demonstrates good resolution beyond absolute resolution which would mean good representation of texture and distant detail. Adobe Camera RAW (as usual) delivers great per pixel sharpness and resolution. The biggest disappointment however is the output from Image Data Converter which produced a large amount of moire as well as blurring anything beyond 2500 LPH.

JPEG from camera Image Data Converter SR (RAW)
 
Adobe Camera RAW 4.3 beta (RAW)  


ISO / Sensitivity accuracy

In a new addition to our reviews we are now measuring the actual sensitivity of each indicated ISO sensitivity. This is achieved using the same shots as are used to measure ISO noise levels, we simply compare the exposure for each shot to the metered light level (using Sekonic L-358), middle gray matched. We estimate the accuracy of these results to be +/- 1/6 EV.

Like many recent digital SLRs all four in this comparison proved to be right on the spot with their indicated sensitivity, that is to say an indicated sensitivity of say ISO 200 was exactly that (unlike some older digital SLRs which were slightly more or less sensitive than indicated).

Indicated
sensitivity
Sony DSLR-A700
(actual sensitivity)
Canon EOS 40D
(actual sensitivity)
Nikon D300
(actual sensitivity)
Olympus E-3
(actual sensitivity)
ISO 100 ISO 100 ISO 100 ISO 100 ISO 100
ISO 200 ISO 200 ISO 200 ISO 200 ISO 200
ISO 400 ISO 400 ISO 400 ISO 400 ISO 400
ISO 800 ISO 800 ISO 800 ISO 800 ISO 800
ISO 1600 ISO 1600 ISO 1600 ISO 1600 ISO 1600
ISO 3200 ISO 3200 ISO 3200 ISO 3200 ISO 3200
ISO 6400 ISO 6400 n/a ISO 6400 n/a

ISO Sensitivity / Noise levels

ISO equivalence on a digital camera is the ability to increase the sensitivity of the sensor. The works by turning up the "volume" (gain) on the sensor's signal amplifiers (remember the sensor is an analogue device). By amplifying the signal you also amplify the noise which becomes more visible at higher ISO's. Many modern cameras also employ noise reduction and / or sharpness reduction at higher sensitivities.

To measure noise levels we take a sequence of images of a GretagMacBeth ColorChecker chart (controlled artificial daylight lighting). The exposure is matched to the ISO (ie. ISO 200, 1/200 sec for consistency of exposure between cameras). The image sequence is run through our own proprietary noise measurement tool (version 1.4 in this review). Click here for more information. (Note that noise values indicated on the graphs here can not be compared to those in other reviews). Room temperature is approximately 22°C (~72°F), simulated daylight lighting.

Sony DSLR-A700 vs. Canon EOS 40D vs. Nikon D300 vs. Olympus E-3

  • Sony DSLR-A700: Minolta 50 mm F1.4 lens, Manual exposure, Manual WB,
    Default Parameters (Standard), High ISO NR (Normal - default), JPEG Large / Fine
     
  • Canon EOS 40D: Canon 50 mm F1.4 lens, Manual exposure, Manual WB,
    Default Parameters (Standard), High ISO NR (Default; Off), JPEG Large / Fine
     
  • Nikon D300: Nikkor 50 mm F1.4 lens, Manual exposure, Manual WB,
    Default Parameters (Normal), High ISO NR (Normal), JPEG Large / Fine
     
  • Olympus E-3: Olympus 50 mm F2.0 Macro lens, Manual exposure, Manual WB,
    Default Parameters (Natural), JPEG Large / Fine
Sony DSLR-A700 ISO 100 Canon EOS 40D
ISO 100
Nikon D300
ISO 100
Olympus E-3
ISO 100

Sony DSLR-A700 ISO 200 Canon EOS 40D
ISO 200
Nikon D300
ISO 200
Olympus E-3
ISO 200

Sony DSLR-A700 ISO 400 Canon EOS 40D
ISO 400
Nikon D300
ISO 400
Olympus E-3
ISO 400
Sony DSLR-A700 ISO 800 Canon EOS 40D
ISO 800
Nikon D300
ISO 800
Olympus E-3
ISO 800

Sony DSLR-A700 ISO 1600 Canon EOS 40D
ISO 1600
Nikon D300
ISO 1600
Olympus E-3
ISO 1600

Sony DSLR-A700 ISO 3200 Canon EOS 40D
ISO 3200
Nikon D300
ISO 3200
Olympus E-3
ISO 3200

Sony DSLR-A700 ISO 6400 Canon EOS 40D
n/a
Nikon D300
ISO 6400
Olympus E-3
n/a

From ISO 100 to 400 there is virtually no difference from a noise point of view between any of these cameras, none exhibit noticeable any noise. At ISO 800 the DSLR-A700 begins to exhibit some chroma (blotchy color) noise, the cleanest of the remaining three appears to be the D300 followed by the EOS 40D and then E-3. At ISO 1600 the DSLR-A700's noise reduction appears to become stronger and while noise is still noticeable it's less pronounced, although this at the expense of image detail which is beginning to soften. By this point the E-3 is beginning to look quite grainy and has also lost some image detail to noise reduction, the EOS 40D has some chroma noise and the D300 remains fairly clean and detailed (thanks to Nikon's emphasis on chroma noise reduction). At ISO 3200 the DSLR-A700 image has become quite soft from noise reduction and large blotches of chroma noise can be seen across the image. Again the cleanest image at this sensitivity comes from the D300 with the best detail coming from the EOS 40D (although distracting chroma noise is visible), the E-3 is struggling at this point. Surprisingly at ISO 6400 the D300's image could be considered 'usable' although very noisy, the same could not really be said for the DSLR-A700.

Overall the DSLR-A700's performance trails both the Nikon D300 and Canon EOS 40D although does seem better than the Olympus E-3. What's clear is that Sony are using a fair amount of luminance noise reduction (too much) but probably not enough chroma noise reduction.

* It's worth noting that these results are with the cameras in their default modes, the EOS 40D for example does have an optional stronger chroma noise reduction option which delivers images with almost no chroma noise.

Noise graphs

Note that we normally show both gray and black results on the same graph, comparing four cameras this became too difficult to read hence we have two separate graphs, one for the gray patch (middle gray) and one for the black patch (shadows).

Luminance noise graph (gray patch)

As you can see the A700's gray noise takes a fairly predictable line through the sensitivity range, staying fairly low at all times although as you can see from the crops above this is at the expense of image sharpness.

Indicated ISO sensitivity is on the horizontal axis of this graph, standard deviation of luminosity on the vertical axis.

Luminance noise graph (black patch)

On the A700 line you can see a noticeable increase in noise reduction (a sudden dip) at ISO 1600.

Indicated ISO sensitivity is on the horizontal axis of this graph, standard deviation of luminosity on the vertical axis.

Chroma (color) noise graph

Indicated ISO sensitivity is on the horizontal axis of this graph, standard deviation of color on the vertical axis.


ISO Sensitivity / Noise levels (contd.)

In-camera High ISO noise reduction

The DSLR-A700 provides three different levels of noise reduction; Low, Normal and High. As you can see from the graph below using the High setting doesn't reduce noise by very much more and using the Low setting doesn't reduce noise reduction very much.

Indicated ISO sensitivity is on the horizontal axis of this graph, standard deviation of luminosity on the vertical axis (note that the standard deviation scale here has been extended 1.5x compared to the graphs on the previous page).

Noise reduction crop comparisons (ISO 800 - 6400)

Low
ISO 800
Normal
ISO 800
High
ISO 800

Low
ISO 1600
Normal
ISO 1600
High
ISO 1600

Low
ISO 3200
Normal
ISO 3200
High
ISO 3200

Low
ISO 6400
Normal
ISO 6400
High
ISO 6400

Noise reduction on 'RAW' image files

Our normal understanding of 'RAW' image files is that they are literally a record of the measured light levels (converted from an analog signal by the analog-to-digital converter) of each photosite on the sensor. However the A700's sensor design apparently (supported by official documentation - see page two of this review) includes noise reduction 'on the sensor' which means that the A700's RAW data is 'less raw' than we're used to. Worse still there's no option to disable this noise reduction circuit which means like it or not all RAW images have some noise reduction already applied to them.

Below we have a comparison of in-camera JPEG to RAW converted using Adobe Camera RAW with its Noise Reduction options set to zero (effectively 'no noise reduction'); RAW NONR. As you can see the Nikon D300's RAW images are just that, warts and all (but at least this means you can run your own noise reduction on them if you wish and you are getting the 'digital negative'). The A700 on the other hand clearly already has some luminance noise reduction applied to its RAW data which leaves the photographer with no option other than to simply accept Sony's decisions on noise reduction.

DSLR-A700 JPEG ISO 1600 DSLR-A700 RAW NONR
ISO 1600
D300 JPEG
ISO 1600
D300 RAW NONR
ISO 1600

DSLR-A700 JPEG ISO 3200 DSLR-A700 RAW NONR
ISO 3200
D300 JPEG
ISO 3200
D300 RAW NONR
ISO 3200

Dynamic Range

Our new Dynamic Range measurement system involves shooting a calibrated Stouffer Step Wedge (13 stops total range) which is backlit using a daylight balanced lamp (98 CRI). A single shot of this produces a gray scale wedge from (the cameras) black to clipped white (example below). Each step of the scale is equivalent to 1/3 EV (a third of a stop), we select one step as 'middle gray' and measure outwards to define the dynamic range. Hence there are 'two sides' to our results, the amount of shadow range (below middle gray) and the amount of highlight range (above middle gray).

To most people highlight range is the first thing they think about when talking about dynamic range, that is the amount of highlight detail the camera can capture before it clips to white. Shadow range is more complicated, in our test we stop measuring values below middle gray as soon as the luminance value drops below our defined 'black point' (about 2% luminance) or the signal-to-noise ratio drops below a predefined value (where shadow detail would be swamped by noise), whichever comes first.

Dynamic Range Optimization feature

One feature we first saw introduced with the DSLR-A100 is 'Dynamic Range Optimization', designed to deliver lighter shadow areas by boosting the lower end of the tone curve. The A100 provided just three options (Off, Standard and Advanced), the A700 expands this to Off, Standard, Advanced Auto and then five manual levels (Lv1 - Lv5). The A100 also imposed limits on when you could use DRO (certain metering modes, not RAW etc.), the A700 has no such limitations.

As you can see from the graph below (using our standard step wedges test shot) the A700 actually achieves this brighter shadow response by modifying the tone curve, each of its five levels enhancing this shadow boost (we were only able to plot the first three levels as the last two lifted our reference black levels too high for measurement to be made accurately). As you can also see from these plots the Standard and Advanced Auto settings produced slightly lighter midtones but didn't affect shadow response. Note that the big advantage to doing this kind of tonal manipulation in-camera is that it is applied to RAW data before it becomes a JPEG.

Dynamic Range Optimization studio samples

Sony's DRO system appears to be able to work at either end of the tonal range (lifting / maintaining highlights as well as boosting shadows). The most likely scenario for use however is to boost dark shadow areas of the image. We designed simple studio test scene to test DRO's ability to lift shadow detail. Half of the scene is directly lit, the other half in direct shadow. Looking at the first shot in the sequence below (DRO Off) you can see how the histogram looks in this scenario, a large gap in the center.

Take a little time to look down this sequence and you'll see that Sony's DRO options really do work (for this kind of scene). What didn't work in this scenario were the 'Standard' and 'Advanced Auto' options.

  Thumbnail Luminosity histogram
O
f
f

S
t
d

A
d
v

A
u
t
o

A
d
v

1

A
d
v

2

A
d
v

3

A
d
v

4

A
d
v

5

When DRO Standard works

The two images below have identical exposures (1/100 sec, F8 @ ISO 200) however the second image which has the DRO 'Standard' setting is clearly lighter, in this scenario DRO is apparently looking at the histogram and deciding that the image is slightly underexposed and adjusting the tone curve accordingly.

  Thumbnail Luminosity histogram
O
f
f

S
t
d

DRO Advanced Level 5 comparison across the ISO range

Of course one disadvantage to lifting the shadows is that you are also amplifying noise by the same amount, and because so few bits 'describe' the dark areas of the image this means that at its highest setting the DRO level will inevitably lead to increased noise in those lifted areas. As you can see from the crops below noise levels in these lifted areas becomes pretty much unacceptable from ISO 800 upwards.

  Thumbnail 100% crop
1
0
0
2
0
0
4
0
0
8
0
0
1
6
0
0
3
2
0
0
6
4
0
0

Dynamic Range Optimization real world samples

As you can see from the samples below (this mirrored our experience using this feature numerous times in the field) the 'Advanced Auto' mode seldom made any difference to shadow brightness, instead we would recommend using the manual ('Advanced') DRO option which can be surprisingly successful for scenes like this with huge differences in brightness.

DRO Off DRO Advanced Auto
 
DRO Advanced Lv5  
   
DRO Off DRO Advanced Auto
 
DRO Advanced Lv5  

Dynamic Range (contd.)

Create Style options

The graph below shows the dynamic range response from each of the A700's fourteen Creative Styles. As you can se each has a very slightly different curve mostly due to changes in contrast and brightness for each. The important point to note here is that no single Creative Style delivers more dynamic range than the 'Standard' mode and of course because of more contrasty responses some actually deliver less.

ISO Sensitivity and Dynamic Range

Due to engineering and design constraints some sensors optimum base sensitivity isn't ISO 100, we have seen this many times on various digital SLRs with base sensitivities of ISO 200. In our normal evaluation of dynamic range we discovered that in actual fact the A700's optimum base sensitivity is actually ISO 200, that using ISO 100 will lead to less highlight range (by 0.7 EV; two thirds of a stop).

What's more concerning is that the only reference to this fact in the A700 user manual is hidden in the following sentence: "The larger the number from the standard (ISO 200), the higher the sensitivity". The other hint being that if you factory reset the camera it defaults to ISO 200. There is also no indication on the camera display that sensitivities lower than ISO 200 (ISO 100, 125 and 160) are not optimum, however it does indicate this (with borders around the numbers) for ISO 4000, 5000 and 6400.

Understanding that ISO 200 is optimum we can see that at this sensitivity the A700 delivers almost nine stops of dynamic range, more importantly that almost four stops of this are highlight range (compared to the more typical three and a half stops for most DSLRs).

Sensitivity Shadow range Highlight range Usable range
ISO 100 -5.1 EV 3.2 EV 8.3 EV
ISO 200 -4.9 EV 3.9 EV 8.8 EV
ISO 400 -4.9 EV 3.9 EV 8.8 EV
ISO 800 -4.9 EV 3.9 EV 8.8 EV
ISO 1600 -4.3 EV 3.9 EV 8.2 EV
ISO 3200 -3.7 EV 3.9 EV 7.6 EV
ISO 6400 -3.4 EV 3.9 EV 7.3 EV

Dynamic Range compared

Despite ISO 100 not being the A700's optimum it still manages to deliver about the same highlight range as the Canon EOS 40D and Nikon D200. At ISO 200 the A700's highlight range extends about half a stop further than the EOS 40D and two thirds of a stop further than the D200.

Camera
Shadow range
Highlight range
Usable range
Sony DSLR-A700 (ISO 100) -5.1 EV 3.2 EV 8.3 EV
Sony DSLR-A700 (ISO 200) -4.9 EV 3.9 EV 8.8 EV
Canon EOS 40D (ISO 100) -5.7 EV 3.4 EV 9.1 EV
Nikon D200 (ISO 100) -5.0 EV 3.2 EV 8.2 EV

The wedges below are created by our measurement system from the values read from the step wedge, the red lines indicate approximate shadow and highlight range (the dotted line indicating middle gray).





RAW headroom

Experience has told us that there is typically around 1 EV (one stop) of extra information available at the highlight end in RAW files and that a negative digital exposure compensation when converting such files can recover detail lost to over-exposure. As with previous reviews we settled on Adobe Camera RAW for conversion to retrieve the maximum dynamic range from our test shots.

As you can see the default Adobe Camera RAW conversion delivers less dynamic range than JPEG from the camera (a more contrasty tone curve and less noise reduction in shadows). The best we could achieve was just over ten stops (10 EV) of total dynamic range - at the optimum ISO 200, more importantly almost a stop of that is in highlights (although with no guarantee of color accuracy).

  • ACR Default: Exp. 0.0 EV, Blacks 5, Contrast +25, Curve Medium
  • ACR Best: Exp. -2.5 EV, Blacks 1, Brightness + 50, Contrast -50, Curve Linear




WARNING: Although ACR was able to retrieve the 'luminance' (brightness) of wedge steps which were previously clipped there's no guarantee of color accuracy as individual channels may clip before others. This can be seen fairly clearly in the examples below, on the right the negative digital exposure compensation has revealed some more detail in the background but this soon turns into gray as one or more of the color channels clips.

Adobe Camera RAW default conversion Adobe Camera RAW with -2.5 EV digital comp.


Color reproduction

Here you can see a generated GretagMacbeth ColorChecker chart, place your mouse over any of the labels below it to see the color reproduction in that mode. Select a camera/setting combination from the 'Compared to' drop-down to comparative boxes inside each patch.

The A700 delivers a very similar color response to the Canon EOS 40D except for its rendition of the blue patches which have less red in them (hence the very slight purple tinge to the 40D patches). As you can see the A700's huge number of preset image 'Creative Styles' do provide a wide range of canned color and tone responses.

Sony DSLR-A700 Compared to:  
           
           
           
           
Standard Vivid Neutral Adobe RGB
Clear Deep Light Portrait
Landscape Sunset Night Autumn
B+W Sepia

Artificial light White Balance

I'm truly beginning to wonder if I'll ever be able to say anything good about automatic white balance in artificial light for digital SLRs. With each new model we see no real improvement and in some cases the camera's "best guess" is way off the mark, as you can see from the results below. Even the preset WB options on the A700 don't do a particularly good job at hitting the right color temperature.

Incandescent - Auto WB
Red: 16.2%, Blue: -24.9%, Very Poor
Incandescent - Incandescent preset WB
Red: 4.3%, Blue: -8.6%, Average
Fluorescent - Auto WB
Red: 13.4%, Blue: -23.2%, Poor
Fluorescent - Fluorescent preset WB
Red: 5.8%, Blue: -9.6%, Average

Long Exposure noise reduction / Night shots

Our usual 30 second exposure test produced no hot pixels from the A700, so the optional long exposure noise reduction option (dark frame subtraction using an equal exposure with the shutter closed) made no difference here.

Noise reduction Off Noise reduction On
ISO 100, 30 sec, F20 ISO 100, 30 sec, F20

Flash

The A700's built-in flash unit performed well delivering correctly exposed images (it even nailed middle-gray on our color patches tests shot) without any hint of color cast or white balance problems. With a human subject skin tones were natural and again well exposed.

Overall Image Quality / Specifics

It would be fair to say that as a baseline (at lower sensitivities) the A700 delivers very good images which demonstrate good resolution a 'standard' tone curve and natural color. My primary concern about image quality was the way in which Sony have implemented higher sensitivity noise reduction on the sensor. This implementation appears to produce two issues; firstly it's not possible to turn off this noise reduction or reduce it to a level where it does not interfere with image quality. Secondly that because it can't be turned off and that it occurs so early in the image pipeline that RAW images always have some amount of noise reduction applied to them; this is very obvious when converting higher sensitivity RAW files. Frankly I was pretty surprised to discover this and would have expected Sony to realize that most photographers expect RAW image files to contain exactly that; a 'raw' representation of the data from the sensor (one measurement per photosite) with no image processing, enabling them to process the image as they like with as much or as little noise reduction as they prefer.

Other noteworthy observations are the differences in dynamic range between ISO 100 and 200, with ISO 200 actually being 'base sensitivity' for the sensor but without any indication that this is actually the case on the camera (or clearly in the user manual), virtually useless automatic white balance in artificial light (although to be fair this is no different than most other digital SLRs today) and no difference in tonal balance using DRO Standard or DRO Advanced Auto options (although manual settings do work).

When ISO 100 isn't really ISO 100

So we've already established that there's a dynamic range difference between ISO 100 and 200 and that the sensor's base sensitivity is actually ISO 200 (although this isn't indicated on the camera). What this means in reality is that in ISO 100 mode the camera is effectively over-exposing and relying on the headroom available from the sensor to 'pull down' to a normal response. This can be seen clearly if you shoot RAW+JPEG at ISO 100 and process using a third party converter such as Adobe Camera RAW. The ISO 100 RAW image appears over-exposed and requires approximately -1.0 EV digital exposure compensation to achieve normal tone (note that ISO 200 RAW also required a -0.3 EV digital exposure compensation).

ISO 100 JPEG, 1/30 sec, F8 ISO 200 JPEG, 1/60 sec, F8
ISO 100 RAW, 1/30 sec, F8 ISO 200 RAW, 1/60 sec, F8
ISO 100 (as above but with -1.0 EV digital comp.) ISO 200 (as above but with -0.3 EV digital comp.)
by facestar 2007. 12. 28. 14:33

Sony Cyber-shot DSC-H9 Review, May 2007
Simon Joinson

Almost exactly 12 months after the launch of the Cyber-shot DSC-H2 and DSC-H5 Sony announced the replacement cameras; the DSC-H7 and the top-of-the-range model reviewed here; the DSC-H9. That Sony chose to increase the pixel count (to 8MP) and to include this year's 'must have' features (face detection and ludicrously high maximum ISO) can't have surprised many, but there are a few less predictable new features, and a few welcome changes. The former include Sony's unique 'NightShot' infra-red mode (seen on many camcorders as well as a few Cyber-shots over the years), a 15x zoom and HDTV (well, 1080i) output. The latter include an articulated (tilt-up) screen, improved focus system, faster performance and a new (in the box) remote control.

The super-zoom market is still one of the most competitive sectors and the H9 is up against some stiff competition from old foes such as Panasonic, Canon and Olympus. The H2 and H5 were both well-received when reviewed this time last year, so let's find out if Sony has built on that success or not.

Cyber-shot DSC-H9 vs DSC-H5 - key changes

  • New sensor (8MP versus 7MP)
  • longer lens range (15x up from 12x)
  • Higher maximum sensitivity (ISO 3200)
  • Tilt-up articulated screen
  • Lithium Ion battery
  • Control dial has moved to rear of camera
  • 9-point AF (was 3-point)
  • New Sports mode
  • HDTV (1080i) video output (via optional component cable)
  • Face detection
  • D-Range optimization (auto contrast)
  • In-camera retouching
  • Remote control included
  • NightShot function for shooting in the dark
  • Entirely new user interface
 

Sony DSC-H9

Sony DSC-H5
Sensor

• 1/2.5 " Type CCD
• 8.1 million effective pixels

• 1/2.5” CCD,
• 7.2 million effective pixels

Lens • Carl Zeiss Vario-Tessar
• 31-465mm (35mm equiv)
• 15x optical zoom
• F2.7-4.5
• 36-432mm equiv
• 12x optical zoom
• Carl Zeiss Vario-Tessar
• F2.8-3.7
Maximum Image Size 3264 x 2448
3072 x 2304
Sensitivity • Auto
• ISO 80-3200
• Auto
• ISO 80-1000
Top shutter speed 1/4000th 1/2000th
Autofocus modes • 9 Area Multi-Point AF
• Center AF
• Flexible spot AF
• 3 Area Multi-Point AF
• Center AF (selectable)
• Flexible spot AF
Scene modes • Twilight • Twilight Portrait • Portrait • Landscape • Beach • Snow • Fireworks • High Sensitivity • Advanced Sports Shooting • Twilight • Twilight Portrait • Portrait • Landscape • Beach • High-speed shutter • High Sensitivity
Continuous Shooting 100 shots, 2.2fps, 8MP (max) 1.1 fps, up to 7 frames
Flash range, Auto ISO Up to 9.8m (wide) Up to 9.0m (wide)
LCD screen • 3.0-inch tilt-up TFT
• 230,000 pixels
• 3.0 " TFT
• 230,000 pixels
Power • Lithium-ion NP-BG1 battery 2x AA
Battery life (CIPA standard, using LCD) 280 340
Weight (inc batteries) 546g 554g
Remote control Included No
Other • NightShot infrared system
• Face Detection
• HDTV output (optional cable)
• Bionz processing engine
• In-camera effects
 

Cyber-shot DSC-H9 vs DSC-H7

As we saw with the previous generation the DSC-H9 has a 'little brother', the DSC-H7. Basically a slightly cut down, cheaper version of the H9, the differences are actually fairly minimal - for most users the screen will be the key.

  • H9 has a larger (3.0 inch), higher-resolution tilting screen (H7: 2.5-inch non-articulated)
  • H9 has external buttons for metering and continuous shooting modes, H7 doesn't
  • H9 is around 32g (1.1 oz) heavier
  • H9 has NightShot function, H7 doesn't.

DSC-H9 specifications

Street price • US: $480
• UK: £320
Body Material Plastic
Sensor

• 1/2.5 " Type CCD
• 8.1 million effective pixels

Image sizes

• 3264 x 2448
• 2592 x 1944
• 2048 x 1536
• 640 x 480
• 3264 x 2176 (3:2)
• 1920 x 1080 (16:9)

Movie clips

• MPEG VX Fine / Standard
(640 x 480 @ 30 / 16 fps MPEG-1 with audio)

File formats • Still: JPEG
• Movie: MPEG VX (MPEG-1)
Lens

• Carl Zeiss Vario-Tessar
• 31-465mm (35mm equiv)
• 15x optical zoom
• F2.7-4.5

Image stabilization Super SteadyShot®
Conversion lenses Yes
Digital zoom • 2x (24x total)
• Up to 30x Smart Zoom (dependent on selected resolution)
Focus • Auto
• Macro
• Single
• Monitoring
AF area modes • 9 Area Multi-Point AF
• Center AF
• Flexible spot AF
• Contrast detect
AF assist lamp Yes
Focus distance • Normal: 50cm (19.7 in) minimum (W), 120cm (47.25 in) minimum (T)
• Macro: 1cm (0.4 in) wide only
Metering • Multi-pattern (49 zone)
• Center weighted
• Spot
ISO sensitivity • Auto
• ISO 80
• ISO 100
• ISO 200
• ISO 400
• ISO 800
• ISO 1600
• ISO 3200
Exposure compensation • +/-2EV
• 1/3 EV steps
Exposure bracketing +/- 0.3, 0.7, 1.0 EV
Shutter speed

• Auto: 1/4-1/4000sec
• P: 1"-1/4000sec
• S: 30"-1/4000sec
• A: 8"-1/2000sec
• M: 30"-1/4000sec

Aperture F2.7-5.6 (w) F4.5-8 (t)
Modes

• Program
• Aperture priority
• Shutter priority
• Manual
• 9-preset select scene modes

Scene modes • Twilight
• Twilight Portrait
• Portrait
• Landscape
• Beach
• Snow
• Fireworks
• High Sensitivity
• Advanced Sports Shooting
White balance

• Auto
• Daylight
• Cloudy
• Fluorescent 1, 2, 3
• Incandescent
• Flash WB
• Manual

Self timer • 10 or 2 secs
Continuous shooting 100 shots, 2.2fps, 8MP (max)
Image parameters Natural, Vivid, Sepia, B&W, Sharpness, Contrast
Flash

• Auto
• On
• Slow Synch
• Off
• Red-eye reduction
• Front/rear synch
• Auto/Daylight synch
• Range: 0.2 - 9.8m (wide) 1.2 - 6m (tele)

Viewfinder • 0.2" EVF
• 201K pixels
LCD monitor • 3.0-inch tilting TFT
• 230K pixels
Connectivity • USB 2.0 high speed
• HD
• AV w/multi-jack
• DC in
Print compliance PictBridge, DPOF
Storage • Memory Stick Duo / Pro Duo compatible
• 31MB internal memory
Power • Lithium-ion NP-BG1 battery
• BC-CSG Charger
Weight (inc batt) 554 g (1 lb 4.3 oz)
Dimensions 113.2 x 83 x 94 mm (4.6 x 3.3 x 3.7 in)

Design

Sony hasn't reinvented the wheel with the H9, and the design is very, very similar to the H2 and H5 that came before it. Maybe it's the materials, maybe because it's a bit lighter, but the H9 doesn't have quite the same 'quality' feel as the H5. In fact everyone who picked it up commented on how light it was, which helps when walking around all day, but doesn't help stability - nor does it inspire confidence. A few of the buttons have moved around and the command dial has migrated from the handgrip to the rear panel, but overall the recipe is the same as it has been since the original H1.

In your hand

Like the models that preceded it, the H9 is well-balanced and fits the hand nicely (the grip is slightly different to the H5, and I prefer it, but everyone's hands are different). Although you can easily shoot holding the camera in one hand, it's a lot steadier (and a lot easier to use the zoom control) if you use both. As a point and shoot camera it's suprisingly easy to use, but if you like to change your exposure, ISO, white balance etc settings a lot the H9 takes an awful lot of getting used to - partly because of the reliance on menus, partly because the new control dial is in a much less useful place than it used to be. The camera is also quite deep, but this will only be an issue if you're blessed with tiny hands.

Body elements

One big change over the previous 'H' models is the use of a Lithium Ion battery pack (presumably to deal with the power demands of that huge screen). Battery life isn't terrible, but it isn't great - especially if you use the LCD screen (as opposed to the viewfinder) and leave the IS on all the time. Sony quotes 280 shots per change (LCD, CIPA standard), but we struggled to get more than about 200 per charge. Spare battery a good idea.
Directly beside the battery is the Memory Stick Duo (or PRO Duo) slot. The H9 - like most recent Cyber-shot models - doesn't ship with a card, but there is a measly 31MB of internal memory to get you started (enough for about 10 shots).
The electronic color viewfinder appears to be the same as the one used on the H5, so it's still a bit small (it's like watching a film from the very back of the cinema), but the resolution is good and it's fairly bright. One small point - the new design doesn't have much of an eyecup at all, meaning in bright light the viewfinder can be hard to see.
The screen is simply superb, and puts most competitors to shame. At 3.0-inches and 230,000 pixels it's the same as the H5. Like the H5 the H9's screen could do with being a bit brighter - it's nigh on impossible to see in bright light. This is despite a fancy anti-glare coating (which you need to polish continually as it shows every finger - or nose - print).

Of course the big change is that the screen is now articulated, albeit in a way that only allows a limited degree of movement (apparently there are patent issues surrounding the side-hinged approach used by Canon). The screen can be tilted up and and through 90-degrees - great for waist-level or over the head shooting. The only downside is that mechanism adds further to the depth of an already quite chunky body.

The H9's flash pops up automatically when needed, and it's got a great range (up to 9.8m / 32 feet), but be aware that this relies on the auto ISO going very high, so don't expect miraculous image quality at anything over a few meters. There is a very bright AF illuminator that allows the H9 to focus in total darkness up to a distance of around 1.5m.

Making a reappearance on a Cyber-shot for the first time in half a decade is 'NightShot' - Sony's infrared 'night vision' technology (featured on most of its camcorders). Flip this switch and an invisible infrared light is activated allowing you to take monochrome pictures (with a lovely 'desert storm' green glow) in total darkness. It's great for sleeping kids or shy badgers.
The biggest change over the previous H range is the new lens, which now covers an even more ambitious 15x zoom range. The good news is that Sony hasn't just stretched the long of the zoom; the wide end got wider too, the lens now covers an incredibly versatile 31-465mm equivalent range. The only downside of this focal length largesse is that the maximum aperture at the long end has dropped nearly two thirds of a stop (from F3.7 to F4.5).
As with previous models Sony supplies a lens adaptor ring and a rather unwieldy bayonet-fit lens hood that adds considerably to the bulk of the camera but is essential for avoiding flare on bright days. If you like to use filters on the front of your lens be warned: the lens adapter has a huge - and decidedly non-standard - 74mm thread.
On the left side of the body (viewed from the rear) you'll find the usual Sony multi-connector. This doubles as a video out and USB port (and can provide 1080i HDTV signal with the optional component cable). Why Sony didn't go the whole hog with HDTV output and allow a digital connection (HDMI) I don't know - that would be really impressive. Above the connector is the NightShot on/off slider switch.
On the opposite side of the body is a funny little square connector for use with the (optional) mains adapter.
The standard four-way controller offers instant access to flash, macro, display mode and self-timer functions, and is used to navigate the on-screen menus. Around this is the new control wheel, which has moved from it's (much more sensible) position on the front of the grip - this is very easy to knock with your thumb accidentally too. Note the new 'home' button, used to access all basic settings no matter what mode you are currently in.
The mode dial sits next to the recessed power switch on the top of the camera. Here you'll find all the manual exposure modes, movies, plus the four most commonly-used scene modes (portrait, advanced sports, twilight and landscape).
The shutter release is perfectly positioned on the top of the grip. Directly behind the shutter release are two buttons for metering and drive modes (the drive button also activates the various bracketing options).
Last but not least the H9 ships with a fairly sophisticated remote control. Nice touch.

Operation and controls

I have to say that - despite a raft of spec and performance improvements over the H2/H5 - the H9 is a real disappointment when it comes to to actually using all those advanced features. The problem is twofold; there is still the lack of external controls that we complained about last time, but this is seriously compounded by a new user interface that may look nice but is over complicated and often awkward to use. The newly positioned rotating dial is a huge step backward from the 'click and turn' finger wheel used on the previous model - it's not as fast (mainly thanks to the fact you have to press the center button to switch between settings), and it's nowhere near as easy to use without taking your eye away from the screen.

Of course the truth is that in normal photography you aren't changing all the settings with every shot, but I do like fast access to ISO, white balance, AE compensation and Aperture (program shift is perfect for most situations), and most of the time you can just leave everything on auto and just 'point and shoot'... but I found myself cursing Sony for making it so fiddly to change such basic settings on a regular basis.

Elsewhere flash, macro, metering and burst modes do get their own buttons, and the main screen offers direct access to ISO and AE-C.

Rear of camera

The back of the camera is where we find the most important external difference to the H2/H5; the 3.0-inch screen dominates, though there's still room for some controls above and to the right. At the top, next to the electronic viewfinder, are (from left) the finder/LCD button, the play mode button and zoom rocker (which you'll struggle not to press accidentally if you try to hold the camera with one hand). Below the zoom controls are the menu button, the four-way controller and control dial and the new 'home' button. AE compensation, which had its own button the H5, is now accessed via the screen. The big screen means the controls are a little cramped, and we found the control dial a little too easy to nudge accidentally (which will change settings).

Top of camera

The H9 - like most of its direct competitors - has an 'SLR-like' design with a fairly deep body and deep grip. As you can see, the body is actually quite deep if you include the articulated LCD.

Display and menus

Although what you see on-screen when actually taking pictures hasn't changed significantly since the last 'H' cameras, the latest generation of Cyber-shots has an entirely new menu system. It's a fairly radical departure from the system used on previous cameras (which had remained fundamentally unchanged for many years), and appears to have been inspired by the user interface of Sony's other personal electronics devices, particularly the PSP and PS3. This extends to the the use of a 'home' screen with all the basic camera settings and functions gathered into one place - accessible at the push of a button no matter what the camera is doing at the time.

The system looks great but is overly complex, often counter intuitive, has inconsistent navigation and takes forever to master. Having a two-level menu system with several ways to access the same settings just means it takes longer to learn and as I used the H9 I kept wondering if the designers had forgotten that its primary - only - function is to take pictures and movies.

The only saving grace is that you can avoid entering (and getting lost in) the menu system most of the time because the key settings are accessed from the main record screen.

As usual the DISP button cycles through the various on-screen display options. This is the most basic in P mode - shooting settings are shown along the bottom. ISO, AE-C, program shift and focus pattern can be changed directly using the control dial (in a system very similar to that used by Kodak on its high end cameras). Note that the aperture and shutter speed settings are updated continually (i.e. you don't need to wait until you half-press for metering). Half-press the shutter release and the camera will lock focus and exposure. The H9 has three AF area options (center, flex spot and - as shown here - area).
The most detailed display has additional information - plus a live histogram. The grid lines you see in all these shots are optional. A new virtual mode dial appears when you turn the real mode dial - useful if you don't want to take your eye off the screen (though it stays around for too long).
The control dial on the back of the camera is used to change ISO, exposure values (in A,S,M modes), program shift (P mode), AE compensation and focus pattern. Because you need to use the 'OK' button when selecting which setting to change it's nowhere near as fast as the front control wheel on the H5 - a real usability step backwards. Manual focus is also set via the control dial.
A switch on the side of the camera turns on one of the H9's more unusual features, NightShot. This allows you to photograph in total darkness using infrared illumination. Two buttons behind the shutter release allow you to cycle through continuous shooting (including bracketing) and metering modes.
Pressing the menu button in record mode brings up a scrolling menu of less commonly-accessed settings (image size, color mode, white balance, flash AEC, red-eye mode, contrast & sharpness settings, stabilization). I was disappointed that you can't use the control dial to scroll up and down the list - you have to use the arrow keys. Note that the menu is actually shown as an overlay on top of the live preview. The contrast menu has the usual 'low', 'standard' and 'high' options, plus a 'Dynamic Range Optimiser' setting that automatically sets the contrast according to what you are photographing.
As with record mode you have three choices when it comes to the amount of information overlaid on images viewed in playback mode; none, basic and advanced (with histogram, shown here). You can scroll through images using the left-right buttons or the control dial. Pressing the left (wide) zoom key brings up a display of 3x3 thumbnails of saved images. Unusually for a camera with such a large screen you can't view a greater number of (smaller) thumbnails.
Pressing the right (tele) zoom key allows you to magnify images up to 5x. You can also scroll around magnified images using the four-way controller. The play menu offers the usual range of options, including protecting, rotating and deleting images, plus slide shows and print ordering (DPOF).
New for the H9 are a set of built-in image effects (under the 'retouch' menu item). Here you can apply soft focus vignettes, turn parts of the image black and white, remove red-eye and add a 'cross filter' or fisheye effect. The tools are actually pretty good - if you like that kind of thing.
Most offer several options for the location and strength of the effect. It's worth giving the slide show function a quick mention, as its one of the most advanced we've yet seen, with professional transitions and a choice of background music (you can even add your own music). In conjunction with the remote control and HDTV output it's a fairly powerful way to show your pictures on a television without any other equipment.
Pressing the 'Home' button - no matter where you are in the menus or what you are doing with the camera - brings up the camera's 'home' page. This is supposed to be a simple way to access the most common functions - and change some less common settings, but since it isn't in any way customizable it's hard to see the point of it. The play tab has options to switch directly to play mode (like pressing the play button), index display or slideshow. Next to this is the print tab (where you can go straight to the printing page and, oddly, download music for use in slideshows). Then there is the 'Manage Memory' tab - the only place you can format the card (as well as create new folders and copy between the internal memory and MS Duo card).
The settings tab has several pages of general camera and shooting options. The shooting settings include options for single or continuous focus, AF illuminator, digital zoom, conversion lenses and more.

Timing & Performance

The H9's overall performance is roughly the same as the H2 and H5 that came before it. Although it's a little slower than some direct competitors when it comes to many basic camera operations - startup, power off, playback and so on, the H9 never feels slow in use (and we are talking about differences measured in 1/10ths of a second). Where it really matters - focus speed, shutter lag, shot-to-shot times (without flash) and so on - the H9 no worse than most super zoom cameras, and is a lot faster than many. The rather lackluster burst mode on the H5 has been beefed up a little, and now offers very nearly 2 frames per second for as many shots as you want.

Although a touch faster than its predecessors, the focus system feels like it could be faster at the long end of the zoom, as even in continuous AF mode the focus hunts every time you half-press the shutter. This means that you can be watching the live preview, everything is perfectly focused, and when you half press the shutter the focus moves in and out briefly - but quite dramatically - before settling exactly where it was before you did anything. The only saving grace is that the focus is - in good light - very fast anyway, and the hunting only really occurs at the extreme long end of the zoom; at wider angles the focus feels almost DSLR-like, it is so fast. In low light or at short subject distances the telephoto focus does get dramatically slower, but if this is the type of photography you're likely to be doing a lot of you really need an SLR.

The only other slightly disappointing results were fairly long shot-to-shot times with flash, especially if using the red-eye reduction mode.

Timing Notes

All times calculated as an average of three operations. Unless otherwise stated all timings were made on an 8MP JPEG image (approx. 2210 KB per image). The media used for these tests was a 1.0 GB Sony Memory Stick PRO Duo card.

Action Details
Time, secs

Power: Off to Record

  2.5
Power: Off to Play Image displayed 1.6
Power: Record to Off Lens retracted and all activity ceased 2.2
Power: Play to Off When buffer is empty, lens extended 2.2
Power: Play to Off When buffer is empty, lens retracted ~0.5
Record Review Image displayed 1.0
Mode: Record to Play   1.3
Mode: Play to Record Lens already extended ~ 0.9
Mode: Play to Record Lens retracted ~ 2.2
Play: Magnify To full magnification (5x) ~ 4.4
Play: Image to Image Time to display each saved image ~ 0.2 *1
Play: Thumbnail view 2 x 3 thumbnails ~1.6 *2

Action Details
Time, seconds
Zoom from Wide to Tele 31 to 465 mm (15 x) Hi Speed 2.1
Zoom from Wide to Tele 31 to 465 mm (15 x) Lo Speed 4.7
Half-press Lag (0->S1) Wide angle ~ 0.25 - 0.6 *3
Half-press Lag (0->S1) Telephoto ~ 0.5 - 1.1 *3
Half to Full-press Lag (S1->S2) LCD live view ~ 0.07
Half to Full-press Lag (S1->S2) Electronic Viewfinder ~ 0.06
Full-press Lag (0->S2) LCD live view, wide angle ~ 0.4
Off to Shot Taken LCD live view ~ 2.9
Shot to Shot Flash off (autofocus)
~ 1.3
Shot to Shot Flash on (red-eye reduction off) 3.1 *4
Shot to Shot Flash on (red-eye reduction on) 6.0 *4
*1 Time to display low res thumbnail - to load the entire file (if you want to zoom in for example) takes around 0.6 seconds.
*2 3x4 thumbs takes another 0.8 seconds
*3 Focus can be very fast indeed, but varies widely depending on light levels, subject distance and subject type. There is little measurable difference in speed between the three area AF modes.
*4 In this test the subject distance is only 3 feet (0.9 m) - the recycle time will increase at greater subject distances, and if the batteries are running low (as long as 8 seconds)

Lag Timing Definitions

Half-press Lag (0->S1)
Many digital camera users prime the AF and AE systems on their camera by half-pressing the shutter release. This is the amount of time between a half-press of the shutter release and the camera indicating an auto focus & auto exposure lock on the LCD monitor / viewfinder (ready to shoot).
 

(Prime AF/AE)
Half to Full-press Lag (S1->S2)
The amount of time it takes from a full depression of the shutter release button (assuming you have already primed the camera with a half-press) to the image being taken.
 

(Take shot, AF/AE primed)
Full-press Lag (0->S2)
The amount of time it takes from a full depression of the shutter release button (without performing a half-press of the shutter release beforehand) to the image being taken. This is more representative of the use of the camera in a spur of the moment 'point and shoot' situation.
 

(Take shot, AF/AE not primed)

Continuous mode

The tables below show the results of our continuous shooting test, indicating the actual frame rate along with maximum number of frames and how long you would have to wait after taking the maximum number of frames before you could take another shot. Media used for these tests was a 1.0 GB Sony Memory Stick PRO Duo card. Shutter speed was kept above 1/160 sec during these tests.

The H9 has a single continuous (burst) mode that averages just under two frames per second (a distinct improvement on its predecessor), and there appears to be no practical limit on the number of shots per burst.

Image Type
Mode
Avg. frames
per sec
Frames in a burst *1
After
burst
*2
8MP JPEG Continuous 1.9 fps 100+ ~ 1.6s pause
5MP JPEG Continuous 1.9 fps 100+ ~ 1.5s pause
3MP JPEG Continuous 1.9 fps 100+ ~ 1.5s pause

*1 In a single "burst" (finger held down on shutter release).
*2 The H9 can shoot indefinitely (until the card is full or the battery exhausted) at any file size - there is a slight delay of around one and a half seconds after a burst whilst the last few images are written to the card.

File Write / Display and Sizes

Timings shown below are the time taken for the camera to process and "flush" the image out to the storage card, the timer was started as soon as the shutter release was pressed and stopped when activity indicator went out. This means the timings also include the camera's processing time and as such are more representative of the actual time to "complete the task". The media used for these tests was a 1.0 GB Sony Memory Stick PRO Duo card.

Image Type
Time to store
(secs)

Time to display
(secs)

File size *1
(approx.)
Images on a *2
1.0 GB Card
8MP JPEG ~1.3 ~0.6 *3 2,210 KB 312
5MP JPEG ~1.2  ~0.6 *3 1,700 KB 397
3MP JPEG ~1.2  ~0.5 *3 1,100 KB 637
0.3MP JPEG (VGA) ~0.9  ~0.5 *3 120 KB 6121

*1 All file sizes are an average of three files. As is the case with JPEG it's difficult to predict the size of an image because it will vary a fair amount depending on the content of the image (detail and noise).
*2 Camera estimation.
*3 Time shown is to load the full image (thumbnails are displayed in around 0.2 secs)

With write speeds averaging around 1.7MB/s the H9 is no speed demon, but you'd never know as it is more than made up for by the large, fast buffer and small file sizes.

White Balance

The H9 has seven white balance presets (daylight, cloudy, fluorescent 1, 2 and 3, incandescent and flash) in addition to the default auto white balance and a custom (manual) option. In our tests the auto WB system worked pretty well in all outdoor situations (though we did notice a slight warm tone to daylight shot), coped very well with mixed light sources, but struggled to correct the color cast caused by shooting under artificial (indoor) lighting. If you want neutral tones in such situations you need to use manual white balance.

Incandescent - Auto WB
Red 16.0%, Blue -25.4%
Very Poor
Incandescent - Incandescent preset WB
Red 5.1%, Blue -4.3%,
Average
Fluorescent - Auto WB
Red 2.7%, Blue -10.7%,
Average
Fluorescent - Fluorescent preset WB
Red 6.2%, Blue -6.5%,
Average

Flash Performance

The built-in pop-up flash has a range (using auto ISO) of up to around 9.8 m (32 feet) at the wide end of the zoom, dropping to 6.0 m (19.7 feet) at the long end - pretty impressive for a camera in this class (though be aware that at great distances the ISO may get pushed too high for really great quality). We found exposure and color to be very reliable, with the flash quenching well at distances down to about 10cm. There is a slight warm tone to flash photos, but in most cases this is better than being too cool, and produces nice skin tones. One minor complaint is the flash shot-to-shot time (partly due to the pre-flash metering used), which stretches to just over three seconds when red-eye reduction is turned on. If the batteries are low or your subject is a few feet away flash recycle times can rise to as much as 6 or 8 seconds.

Skin tone - Warm tone, good exposure Color chart -Slight warm tone,
good exposure

Macro Focus

The H9's macro mode is even better than its predecessor, and lets you get as close as 1cm at the wide end of the zoom, capturing an area 35mm (1.37 inches) across. Obviously there are some limitations on the usefulness of a macro mode than requires you to get so close to the subject for really impressive magnifications. The biggest is the issue of the camera casting such a large shadow over the subject that you can't see it. If you prefer to shoot your close ups from a more respectable distance the long end of the zoom does allow you to get down to around 120cm (about 47 inches) to capture an area just under 10cm across, which isn't bad at all for a zoom this big (though there is some corner softness and mild distortion).

Wide macro - 35 mm x 26 mm coverage
92 px/mm (2338 px/in)
Distortion: High
Corner softness: Low
Equiv. focal length: 31 mm
Telephoto macro - 97 mm x 72 mm coverage
34 px/mm (853 px/in)
Distortion: Mild
Corner softness: Mild
Equiv. focal length: 465 mm

Barrel and Pincushion Distortion

Although the measurements aren't terrible for a camera with such a huge focal length range, the H9 produces images with visibly more distortion than most of its competitors. There is fairly strong barrel distortion at the wide end and noticeable pincushion distortion at all longer focal lengths (not just the longest setting). Of course it always looks worse when shooting test charts, but if you need straight edges (such as copying documents or artwork) then this ain't the camera for you.

Barrel distortion - 1.3% at Wide angle
Equiv. focal length: 36 mm
Pincushion distortion - 0.1% at Telephoto
Equiv. focal length: 465 mm

Specific image quality issues

Away from the studio in the 'real world', overall impressions of the H9's output are mixed, to say the least. On a positive note the focus, exposure and color are generally excellent (though the default settings may produce output that is a little 'overcooked' for purists). Highlight clipping is pretty low too, and the sheer versatility of such a wide zoom range - combined with fast focus and an effective stabilizer - means there are few photographic challenges it can't handle.

But look a little closer - particularly at a pixel level - and you start to see the compromises involved in squeezing a 31-465mm equiv. lens and 8 million pixels into such a compact form. We're not sure if it's noise reduction, poor demosaicing or over-compression, but viewed on-screen the images just don't look very pleasant, with visible artefacts and more than a fair share of optical issues.

On the optical side the main issues are chromatic aberration, purple fringing, particularly at the wide end of the zoom, and excessive noise reduction. The latter causes smearing of low contrast detail (hair, foliage etc) even at low ISO settings and can add a watercolor-like dappling to out of focus areas and other soft details.

In fact at the very widest zoom setting it's kind of hard to find anything really positive to say about the H9's photos; at wider apertures there is a noticeable fall off in sharpness at the edges (on our sample it's much stronger on the left than the right), strong fringing and an overall lack of crisp detail. If you stop the lens down you get less fringing but diffraction starts to soften the images.

I should stress that unless you're in the habit of printing your images at large sizes or peeping at pixels the H9's output is unlikely to disappoint, and it has a remarkably high 'hit rate', with few focus or exposure failures. But for us the output was uninspiring.

A couple of side notes; firstly the lens hood is definitely useful for reducing flare and should be left on whenever possible when shooting outdoors. Secondly we were surprised to find that even in sunny weather the H9's program mode tended to default to rather small apertures and slow shutter speeds (we're guessing this is to reduce the fringing and edge softness).

This is doubly problematic; over about F5.6 diffraction effects start to soften the H9's output - the lens' sweet spot is around two stops in from the maximum aperture (resolution drops fairly rapidly at higher F numbers), and you can easily end up with shutter speeds too slow to guarantee a blur-free result.

This problem reaches its zenith in the new Advanced Sports Shooting mode, which on a bright day was giving me 1/60th second at F7.1!! This means that all that predictive focus cleverness is totally wasted. This can only be described as a bug in the firmware, and needs to be fixed (there's no way round this either - unlike normal program mode the sports mode doesn't have program shift or ISO control).

Chromatic Aberration & Purple Fringing

All super zoom cameras suffer from some fringing (though Panasonic's processing removes it before you ever see it), and this camera's predecessor (the H5) was the worst offender. The H9 seems to be just as bad, and it is fairly prevalent at the edge of the frame when shooting at the wide end of the zoom and around high contrast edges. Unusually we found evidence of purple fringing even where the edge wasn't particularly high contrast (see example below). There's also fairly strong chromatic aberration at all focal lengths (though most obviously at longer zoom settings), although to be fair it's harder to spot this in normal prints as the fringes are only a few pixels wide in most shots. Either way this whole fringing issue - be it lens related or CCD related - is something Sony really needs to sort out in future models.

100% crop 465mm equiv., F5.6
100% crop 31mm equiv., F5.0

Noise reduction at low ISO settings

We can forgive noise reduction artefacts creeping into shots at higher ISO settings, but there are times when they are all too visible in low ISO shots too - even at base ISO. The watercolor effect tends to be most obvious on soft, out of focus areas (such as when shooting at full zoom with a wide aperture to minimize depth of field) - if I was to guess what was happening it is that the Bionz processor is mistaking soft detail as areas of solid color and applying heavy NR thinking it won't be seen, though you can sometimes see messy edges even in areas full of detail.

It's certainly not something you see in every shot (and you'd need to be printing pretty big for it to be an issue) but without any control over noise reduction or the option of shooting raw I just wish Sony hadn't turned up the Bionz processor's NR controls so high.

100% crop 465mm equiv., F5.6

Corner/edge softness

At the wide end of the zoom the sharpness drops off fairly rapidly as you move away from the center of the frame, particularly at wider apertures. Combined with the almost inevitable fringing and visible distortion this means that - a welcome addition or not - the new wideangle capabilities of the H9 are not suited to photography intended for large prints. Note that none of the examples below are anywhere near the widest aperture.

100% crop 31mm equiv., F5.6
100% crop 31mm equiv., F4.5
100% crop 31mm equiv., F5.6


ISO Sensitivity / Noise levels

ISO equivalence on a digital camera is the ability to increase the sensitivity of the sensor. The works by turning up the "volume" (gain) on the sensor's signal amplifiers (remember the sensor is an analogue device). By amplifying the signal you also amplify the noise which becomes more visible at higher ISO's. Many modern cameras also employ noise reduction and / or sharpness reduction at higher sensitivities.

To measure noise levels we take a sequence of images of a GretagMacBeth ColorChecker chart (controlled artificial daylight lighting). The exposure is matched to the ISO (ie. ISO 200, 1/200 sec for consistency of exposure between cameras). The image sequence is run through our own proprietary noise measurement tool (version 1.4 in this review). (Note that noise values indicated on the graphs here can not be compared to those in other reviews.)

Sony DSC-H9 vs Olympus SP-550UZ vs Panasonic DMC-FZ8

Sony DSC-H9
ISO 80

n/a

Olympus SP-550UZ
ISO 50

 

Sony DSC-H9
ISO 100
Panasonic DMC-FZ8
ISO 100
Olympus SP-550UZ
ISO 100
Sony DSC-H9
ISO 200
Panasonic DMC-FZ8
ISO 200
Olympus SP-550UZ
ISO 200

Sony DSC-H9
ISO 400
Panasonic DMC-FZ8
ISO 400
Olympus SP-550UZ
ISO 400
Sony DSC-H9
ISO 800
Panasonic DMC-FZ8
ISO 800
Olympus SP-550UZ
ISO 800
Sony DSC-H9
ISO 1600
Panasonic DMC-FZ8
ISO 1250
Olympus SP-550UZ
ISO 1600
Sony DSC-H9
ISO 3200
Panasonic DMC-FZ8
ISO 3200
Olympus SP-550UZ
ISO 3200

With tiny, high pixel count chips noise is always going to be an issue, and to a large degree this is more a test of the effectiveness (both measurable and visible) of a camera's noise reduction system. Designers have to balance the desire to produce smooth, clean results with the need to retain as much detail as possible (if you blur away the noise, you blur away image detail too).

All 'super zoom' cameras struggle with noise since they have particularly small sensors (they have to be small or the lenses would be the size of a trash can) - this is one of the key compromises we have to accept if we want a lightweight camera with a lens this big. Sony's approach to noise reduction seems to be that you can't have enough of it, and once you get to ISO 200 or over the combined effects of noise and heavy NR are enough to cause a serious loss of fine detail. It's not significantly worse than most of its competitors (though the NR - and therefore detail loss - is amongst the heaviest); this is what you get when you stuff eight million pixels into a 1/2.5-inch CCD sensor.

Luminance noise graph

Cameras compared: Sony DSC-H9, Olympus SP-550UZ, Panasonic DMC-FZ8
Note: FZ8 ISO 100-1250 only measured

Indicated ISO sensitivity is on the horizontal axis of this graph, standard deviation of luminosity is on the vertical axis.

The graph shows what we'd observed in real life photographs: the H9's noise levels at ISO 80-400 are very low. Since Sony doesn't have a magic sensor this can only be the result of heavier than average noise reduction.

RGB noise graph (ISO 50-1600 only)

Cameras compared: Sony DSC-H9, Olympus SP-550UZ, Panasonic DMC-FZ8
Note: FZ8 ISO 100-1250 only measured

Indicated ISO sensitivity is on the horizontal axis of this graph, standard deviation of each of the red, green and blue channels is on the vertical axis.

Once again ISO 80-400 noise is very low, thanks to the Bionz noise reduction process, but as our tests show, this comes at a price; the loss of fine detail at anything over base ISO. it's still better than either of the other cameras in this comparison.

Low contrast detail

What the crops and graph don't show is the effect of noise reduction on low contrast fine detail such as hair, fur or foliage. An inevitable side effect of noise removal is that this kind of detail is also blurred or smeared, resulting in a loss of 'texture'. In this test the crops below show the effect of the noise reduction on such texture (hair) as you move up the ISO range.

100% Crops, F3.5
ISO 80 ISO 100 ISO 200
ISO 400 ISO 800 ISO 1600
   
ISO 3200    

These crops illustrate perfectly the extent to which the H9's heavy-handed noise reduction has an increasingly destructive effect on fine, low contrast detail even when photographed from a fairly short distance (these crops show how hair appears in a typical head and shoulders portrait). Even at ISO 80 there is some detail being lost through 'smearing', though it's mainly an issue for distant foliage - and even then only if you're producing prints over 10x8 inches (or of course peeping at pixels like this). Things get increasingly bad as you move up the ISO range, with ISO 200 the point where our 'acceptable' threshold starts to give way. ISO 400 looks distinctly painterly, and ISO 800-3200 may all well be created by a random pixel generator.

So then, if you're shooting landscapes (with lots of distant foliage) or anything with fine, low contrast texture, and you want to produce anything over a postcard sized print you need to stick to ISO 80 or 100, and even then be prepared to lose something to noise reduction. As mentioned earlier in the review, this camera really needs a low NR option for those of us that like to make our own decisions about how much detail we're prepared to sacrifice for a 'smooth' result.


Image stabilization

The optical image stabilization ('Super Steady Shot') system used on the H9 works, though I would say it is perhaps marginally less effective than those found in the Canon S3 IS and Panasonic FZ series. The H9 has two modes: Continuous (IS on all the time) and 'Shooting' (stabilization is only activated when the button is half-pressed to lock exposure). The first option makes framing easier - the Steady Shot system steadies the preview image - but obviously uses more battery power (it's on all the time).

I certainly found it made handheld shots at 2 even 3 shutter speeds slower than normal perfectly possible, though beyond 1 stop it's nowhere near 100% reliable. The 100% crops below show the effectiveness of the IS system when shooting at full tele at speeds as low as 1/50 sec.

Real world example: 144mm (equiv), 1/50th Second, hand-held
Stabilization off Stabilization on

The stabilization test

In this simplified version of our SLR IS test, four hand-held shots were taken of a static scene with the stabilization off and on. The shutter speed was decreased and repeated (from 1/1000 sec to 1/20 sec). The zoom was set to its maximum position (465mm equiv.), the test target was 6 m away from the camera. The test was repeated three times and an average taken.

The resulting images were then inspected and given a blur score - 'Sharp' (no visible blurring at 100%), 'Mild Blur' (the kind of camera shake that is tolerable at small print sizes) and 'Heavy Blur' (virtually unusable due to camera shake) and 'Very Heavy Blur' (little discernible detail).

As the charts below show the IS system does give you a couple of stops' advantage, though it isn't quite as reliable as some we've tried. Even at only one stop below the recommended minimum shutter speed (using the focal length reciprocal rule of thumb) you may only get one really sharp shot in three, so you need to take a few safety shots if the shutter speed drops too far.

Hand-held, no stabilization (465mm equiv.)

As you can see from the chart below only at 1/500th sec or above can we be confident of getting sharp results from the majority of shots, and once you get to 1/125th sec and below the majority of shots are heavily blurred, and none are sharp.

Hand-held, stabilization on (465mm equiv.)

With stabilization on the results are better - we got no blurred shots at all above 1/250th sec, and the majority of shots down to 1/125 sec have little or no blur. If you're shooting at one to three stops below the recommended minimum shutter speed you have a one in three chance of getting a completely sharp image.

Dynamic Range Optimization

Although the H9 offers a fairly standard range of image parameters (color presets, sharpening, contrast) it also offers a version of Sony's Dynamic Range Optimization (first seen on the Alpha digital SLR) - this is the default setting. DRO works in a similar way to Nikon's D-Lighting and HP's Adaptive Lighting technologies, using a form of contrast masking to reduce the clipping of highlights and shadows in scenes with a very wide dynamic range. The difference is that the processing is done on the raw data at the point of capture by the Bionz processor, rather than applied later (HP and Nikon offer this type of adjustment as an option in playback mode), which should mean there is more information to work with.

The effect is subtle, but it does work - mainly by lifting the shadows a little (it's helped by an excellent metering system that does a good job of preserving highlights). Compared to HP's and NiIkon's systems the results show less noise and also look more natural (though any attempt to compress dynamic range in this way tends to produce output that looks a little 'processed').

Apologies for the slightly different framing; these were taken handheld (I intended to go back and re-shoot using a tripod but it's rained continually since).

Standard contrast 100% crop
DR Optimizer (default) 100% crop
Low contrast 100% crop
High contrast 100% crop

Movie mode

Once at the vanguard of DSC movies Sony is now in danger of being left behind by companies such as Canon and Panasonic who both offer higher than VGA resolution clips on their latest models. The H9 - like most recent Cyber-shots - offers movie capture up to 640 x 480 pixels at 30 frames per second using its MPEG-VX setting. You need to use a Memory Stick PRO Duo if you want to shoot movies at the maximum size.

The movies are recorded in MPEG-1 format, which means they are small (much smaller than standard M-JPEG or AVI movies), but the small sizes come at a price. MPEG-1 movies use a much less efficient compression system than the more modern MPEG-4, which results in visible compression artefacts - take a look at the samples below and you'll see it's much worse in scenes shot at the wide end of the zoom with a lot of fine detail.

Overall quality using the fine setting is far from the best we've seen, but it isn't too bad (the compression artefacts can sometimes be quite obvious), and you can keep shooting until the card runs out (this will give you about 12.5 minutes on a 1GB card at the 640 x 480-pixel / 30fps setting). Using the 'normal' quality produces files with distractingly visible compression artefacts (and jerky motion thanks to the lower frame rate), and I'd avoid using it.

The focus system tends to hunt a little when shooting videos at the long end of the zoom, something you can only stop by switching to manual focus, which is a pain. Like the H5, the H9 allows you to zoom whilst filming though this does exacerbate the focus hunting.

As with stills recording you can choose the amount of information overlaid on the live preview image (though there's no histogram). There is an EV compensation (lighter or darker) control in the bottom right of the screen - and a focus mode control.
In movie mode you get a slightly more basic set of menus offering options for white balance, image stabilization and picture effects. You can also choose from one of three movie settings; 640 x 480 pixels/16.6 or 30 fps and 320 x 240 pixels at 15 fps.
In playback mode you get some basic controls for playing movies, allowing you to play, pause, rewind/cue. Nothing fancy.

Sample movies

640 x 480 pixels @ 25 fps
File size: 2.4MB
Duration: 6.2 secs

Standard Quality Mode with zooming

Click on the thumbnail to view the movie (caution: large file!)


640 x 480 pixels @ 30 fps
File size: 9.7MB
Duration: 7.24 secs

Fine Quality Mode

Click on the thumbnail to view the movie (caution: large file!)


by facestar 2007. 12. 28. 14:26

Nikon Coolpix P5100 Review, November 2007
Richard Butler & Simon Joinson

Based on a production Nikon Coolpix P5000 Firmware version 1.0

Announced just six months after the launch of the P5000, the Nikon P5100 is a gentle re-working of the existing model with a slightly larger, more pixel-dense sensor and hardware-based face-detection. Beyond that, the changes are predominantly cosmetic alterations to the existing model. The camera is Nikon's flagship compact camera, with the 'P' denoting 'performance.' Although it may not visually leap out from a line-up of contemporary compacts, its magnesium alloy body and manual exposure controls belie the unassuming appearance. It aims to offer a greater degree of manual control than the majority of compact cameras and has a strong feature set to help it stand apart. We were actually very impressed with the P5000's image quality and feature set, and only really complained about the sluggish performance. So has Nikon fixed the P5000's Achilles' heel in this update? Lets find out!

Differences compared with P5000

  • Faster, hardware-based face-detection, allowing more faces to be identified
  • Expeed processing 'concept'
  • Continuous flash shooting mode (3 consecutive frames at ~1fps)
  • Distortion control to counteract lens distortion
  • Improved user interface
  • Marginally larger sensor making the lens slightly wider-angle (35mm vs 36mm)
  • Fractionally shorter battery life (240, rather than 250 shots, CIPA standard)
  • 1:1 aspect ratio shooting mode
  • Can add black borders to images

Unlike the names applied to image processors by many of Nikon's rivals, Expeed doesn't specifically refer to any particular technology or set of features. Rather, it is a "digital image-processing concept," so shouldn't be taken to imply any kinship to the D3 and D300 DSLR models that share the name, beyond the the use of similar Nikon algorithms and know how.

Key features

  • 12 megapixel 1/1.8-inch CCD
  • 3.5x Zoom-Nikkor lens
  • Lens shift VR (Vibration Reduction)
  • ISO 64-1600 (3200 in 5MP mode)
  • BSS (Best Shot Selector) identifies and saves the sharpest image automatically from ten sequential shots
  • P/A/S/M modes plus 16 scene modes
  • Compatibility with system-expanding accessories
  • Macro shooting enables shooting from as close as 4cm (1.6 in.)
  • SDHC card compatibility
  • Approx. 52 MB of internal memory
  • Face-priority AF, In-Camera Red-Eye Fix, D-Lighting
  • 2.5-in wide viewing angle TFT LCD with anti-reflection coating

Nikon Coolpix P5100 specifications

Street price

• US: $370
• UK: £260

Body Material Metal and plastic
Sensor

• 1/1.72 " Type CCD
• 12.43 million pixels total
• 12.1 million effective pixels

Image sizes

• 4000 x 3000
• 3264 x 2448
• 2592 x 1944
• 2048 x1536
• 1600 x 1200
• 1280 x 960
• 1024 x 768
• 640 x 480
• 3984 x 2656 (3:2)
• 3984 x 2232 (16:9)
• 2992 x 2992 (1:1)

Movie clips

• Motion JPEG (AVI) with sound
• TV movie (640) at 30fps/15fps,
• Small size (320) at 15fps
• Smaller size (160) at 15fps
• Sepia (320) at 15fps
• Monochromatic (320) at 15fps
• Without sound: Time-lapse movie at 30fps

File formats • JPEG Exif V2.2
• DCF
• DPOF
• Motion JPEG AVI
Lens

• 3.5x Zoom-Nikkor (35-123mm equiv.)
• f/2.7-5.3
• 7 elements in 6 groups

Image stabilization Lens-shift VR
Conversion lenses Yes (optional)
Digital zoom up to 4x
Focus • Contrast Detection AF
• Macro
• Infinity lock
AF area modes

• Auto (9-area automatic selection)
• Manual (99-area manual selection)
• Center
• Face-priority AF mode

AF assist lamp Yes
Focus distance

• 30cm (1 ft.) to infinity (∞) [W], 70cm (2 ft. 4 in.) to infinity (∞) [T]
• Macro close-up mode: 4cm (1.6 in.) to infinity (∞) [W], 40cm (1 ft. 4 in.) to infinity (∞) [T]

Metering • Through-the-lens (TTL) metering
• 256-segment matrix
• Spot
• Center-weighted
• Spot AF area
ISO sensitivity • Auto (64 - 800)
• ISO 64
• ISO 100
• ISO 200
• ISO 400
• ISO 800
• ISO 1600
• ISO 2000
• ISO 3200 (5MP or lower only)
Exposure compensation • -/+ 2EV
• in 1/3 EV steps
Exposure bracketing

• 3 shots
• +/- 0.3, 0.7, 1.0EV

Shutter speed 1/2000 to 8 s
Aperture • Six blade iris diaphragm
• 10 (in steps of 1/3 EV)
Modes

• Auto shooting mode
• Program (auto)
• Shutter Priority Auto
• Aperture Priority Auto
• Manual
• Movie mode
• Scene mode
• High-sensitivity shooting mode
• Anti-shake mode

Scene modes Face-priority AF, Portrait, Landscape, Sports, Night Portrait, Party/Indoor, Beach/Snow, Sunset, Dusk/Dawn, Night Landscape, Close up, Museum, Fireworks show, Copy, Back Light, Panorama Assist, Voice recording
White balance

• Auto
• Daylight
• Cloudy
• Fluorescent
• Incandescent
• Preset

Self timer • 10 or 3 secs
Continuous shooting

• Single
• Continuous (approx.1.0fps ,image quality Normal, image size 12M)
• Continuous flash
• Interval timer shooting

Image parameters Normal, Softer, Vivid, More vivid, Portrait, Custom, Black-and-white
Flash • Built-in
• Range: (W) 0.3 to 8.0m (1 ft. to 26 ft. 3 in.), (T) 0.3 to 4.0m (1 ft. to 13 ft. 1 in.)
• Flash Hot Shoe
• Auto, Auto with red-eye reduction, Anytime flash, Flash cancel, Slow sync., Rear-curtain sync.
Viewfinder • Real-image zoom viewfinder
• Approx 80% vertical x 80% horizontal
LCD monitor • 2.5-in wide viewing angle TFT LCD with anti-reflection coating
• 230,000-dot
• Approx 97% vertical x 97% horizontal (record mode)
Connectivity • USB
• AV out (NTSC / PAL)
Print compliance PictBridge, DCF, DPOF, EXIF print
Storage • SD / SDHC / MMC card (optional)
• Approx 52MB internal memory
Power • Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL5 (supplied)
• AC Adapter EH-62A (optional)
Weight (No batt) Approx. 200 g (7.1 oz.) without battery and SD memory card
Dimensions Approx. 98 x 64.5 x 41 mm (3.9 x 2.5 x 1.6 in.) excluding projections

Design

The P5100 is vaguely reminiscent of Canon's 'A-Series' cameras at first glance but this resemblance is quickly dismissed once you pick it up. The magnesium alloy body also gives a slightly misleading first impression - it's disconcertingly light - but the slightly cold feel and textured surface of the alloy soon make you appreciate that it's actually a pretty rugged and understated little thing.

In your hand

The P5100 is a small camera considering the amount of controls it offers the user. Despite this, it handles very well. The grip is excellent, with the rubberized thumb pad on the back giving a good, firm hand position on the body. The shutter, zoom switch and control wheel are all accessible without re-positioning your hand: it's all very well laid out.

Body elements

A thin, and rather flexible, cover conceals both the battery and SD card slot. The P5100 is equally happy to accommodate standard or high capacity SD cards. The EN-EL5 battery lasts for a perfectly acceptable 240 shots (in CIPA standard tests).
A single combined mini USB and AV (audio video) output port sits under a small flexible plastic cover on the left side of the body (looking from the front).
The optical viewfinder, complete with flash and AF ready lights is pretty standard stuff. It's tiny, the field of view is nowhere near the full frame (around 80% along each axis) and it's so far from the lens that you'll get parallax errors if you shoot subjects nearer than about 2M. But it's no worse than any other similar camera, and comes in useful in very low or very bright light, or when you need to preserve battery power.

The 2.5-inch, 230,000-pixel screen is very sharp and pleasant to use. It only shows 97% of the shot in each direction, which is awkward for setting up our test shots but no real problem for real-world use. As before (with the P5000) the screen can be a little difficult to see in bright light.

As well as a usefully powerful flash (effective up to 8m at the wide end of the lens and 4m at the long end), the P5100 carries a full-function hot shoe over from its predecessor. You can mount Nikon's SB-800 or SB-600 external flashes, both of which are larger than the camera itself, or the more compact SB-400 that would be much more manageable.
The 3.5x Zoom Nikkor lens covers a range equivalent to approximately 35-123mm on a 35mm camera. The maximum aperture is usefully bright (f/2.7) at wideangle but is two whole stops slower at the long end (a shutter-speed-troubling f/5.3).
The main mode dial sits atop the camera right next to the shutter release and main power switch. From here you can choose between the various automatic and manual modes. There are positions on the dial for Anti Shake and high ISO modes, plus a separate 'Setup' mode (for changing basic camera settings).
Control and navigation of menus is shared between the control wheel and the four-way controller. In most instances the control wheel simply gives you a faster method of scrolling through the same options but this isn't true of all operations, which takes a little getting used to.

Operation and controls

The body and button layout is retained from the P5000 and promises a revised user interface. We said good things about the design of the P5000 and they are equally true of its successor: the grip at the front and a thumb-rest at the back are rubberized and the choice and arrangement of the buttons is clear and sensible.

Rear of camera

The rear of the camera is where you'll find most of the external controls. The control layout is completely unchanged with a four-way controller on one side and all the other buttons slotted down the left-hand side of the large, clear LCD screen. A function button can be set to give direct access to one of ten settings. The choices range from parameters you might want to change regularly such as ISO and white balance to specific features that you might occasionally want to turn on and off, such as distortion control.

Top of camera

The design of the P5100 is hardly radical but is nicely executed with the shutter button and zoom switch well positioned above a comfortable grip. The on/off button is within easy reach but requires enough sustained pressure to ensure it is never accidentally engaged.

Display and menus

The Nikon's compact camera user interface has been one of our bugbears for some time. The P5100 does feature some incremental improvements but still contains at least one frustrating quirk or inconsistency in every operating mode. The menus are simple and clear with most options sensibly located and, as with any camera, anyone using the P5100 regularly will find they adapt to its idiosyncrasies. This doesn't completely justify a control system that simply doesn't feel as thought-through or finished as some of its competitors, however.

The live view can either show just the scene being shot, overlays of shooting parameters or an overlay with gridlines to aid composition and keeping things level. In this instance, manual mode shows the shutter speed and aperture values. The shooting menu gives access to most of the most commonly-used settings. Except VR (image stabilization), which is rather oddly located in the 'Setup' menu, that has to be accessed via the mode dial (we guess the presumption is you're going to leave it on most of the time).
In manual mode, rotating the control wheel changes the shutter speed or aperture. Pressing 'right' on the four-way controller (AE Comp) switches from one to the other. To shift back to modifying the value displayed on the left, you again press the right-hand side of the four-way controller. Although pressing AE Comp is logical, it takes a great deal of self-control not to press 'left' and bring up the self-timer menu.

In most modes, exposure compensation brings up a scale on the left edge of the screen. The bar across the bottom lingers if you don't confirm your selection, giving you continued access to the settings but allowing you to keep shooting.

All menus can be viewed as icons (in this case the shooting menu), which allows each one to appear as a single screen, once you've remembered what each icon signifies.
In scene mode the menu button brings up the special scenes, from sports to museum. You can use the four-way controller or the control wheel to make your selection and have to press 'OK' to confirm. The function button brings up the same options in a similar-looking menu. However, you can't use the four-way controller and unlike every other option on the camera, don't need to confirm your selection.
Playback mode shows the reviewed image, the image with limited shooting information overlaid or a small version of the image with shooting parameters and histogram. Pushing the zoom switch to the right zooms the image in to 3x magnification and lets you jump around the image using the four-way controller. From here the zoom switch lets you zoom in or out. Overlaid information is retained but cannot be switched on or off once zoomed.
Pushing the zoom button to the left from playback mode zooms out to a 2x2 grid of images. Doing so again zooms out to a 3x3 display. Alternatively, scrolling the control wheel from playback mode allows you to rapidly scroll through images. Once you've found the correct image, press 'OK' to display that image.
Playback menu has the usual range of options (including Nikon's unusual D-Lighting option). The setup menu has five pages of more basic options (including card formatting and, oddly VR).

Timing & Performance

It has been one of the aspects of Nikon's compact cameras that we've been critical of in the past - and the one area of the P5000 we really wanted to see improved - but speed and responsiveness is still a problem for the P5100. In an age where image quality improvements have almost ground to to a standstill, usability factors such as this are important differentiators between very similar competing models, so it's an area Nikon should be working hard on improving. Unfortunately, the P5100's performance is still severely lacking in several key areas, most noticeably in the two most important: focus and shutter lag.

Of these it is the former that causes most concern; it's not unusual for the P5100 to take over a second to focus even in good light, and not only does this rule out any kind of action shot (unless you pre-focus), it tries your patience even when you're shooting totally static subjects. The shutter lag, by comparison, is merely average. Other areas of concern include long shot to shot times and unimpressive continuous shooting capabilities. This is certainly not a camera for snapping active children. Or in fact anything that moves.

Timing Notes

All times calculated as an average of three operations. Unless otherwise stated all timings were made on a 4000 x 3000 FINE JPEG image (approx. 4,186 KB per image). The media used for these tests was a 1.0GB SanDisk Extreme III SD card.

Action Details
Time, secs

Power: Off to Record

  1.9
Power: Off to Play Image displayed 2.1 *1
Power: Record to Off Lens retracted and all activity ceased 2.0
Power: Play to Off When buffer is empty, lens already retracted 0.6
Power: Play to Off When buffer is empty, lens extended ~1.8
Record Review Image displayed ~1.0
Mode: Record to Play   0.4
Mode: Play to Record Lens already extended 0.5
Play: Magnify To full magnification (10x) 1.9
Play: Image to Image Time to display each saved image (low res) ~0.2
Play: Image to Image Time to display full res image (allows zooming) 1.5
Play: Thumbnail view 2 x 2 thumbnails ~0.2 *2

Action Details
Time, seconds
Zoom from Wide to Tele 34 to 123 mm (3.5 x) 1.1
Half-press Lag (0->S1) Wide angle, Multi or Center AF ~1.0
Half-press Lag (0->S1) Telephoto, Multi or Center AF ~1.2
Half to Full-press Lag (S1->S2) LCD live view ~ 0.09
Half to Full-press Lag (S1->S2) Viewfinder ~ 0.06
Full-press Lag (0->S2) LCD live view, wide angle ~1.1
Off to Shot Taken LCD live view 2.8
Shot to Shot Flash off 2.8
Shot to Shot Flash on 2.8*3
Shot to Shot Flash on (red-eye mode) 6.5
*1 The p5100 can be powered up directly into playback mode by holding the play button for around a second. This figure includes the delay before the camera turns on (designed to avoid accidental activation).
*2 You can also view 3x3 or 4x4 thumbnails by pressing the zoom button a second or third time. This adds around 0.4 / 0.9 seconds to the time taken.
*3 Shot to shot time with flash depends on subject distance, scene brightness and condition of battery. This is the best you can expect with a short subject distance.

Lag Timing Definitions

Half-press Lag (0->S1)
Many digital camera users prime the AF and AE systems on their camera by half-pressing the shutter release. This is the amount of time between a half-press of the shutter release and the camera indicating an auto focus & auto exposure lock on the LCD monitor / viewfinder (ready to shoot).
 

(Prime AF/AE)
Half to Full-press Lag (S1->S2)
The amount of time it takes from a full depression of the shutter release button (assuming you have already primed the camera with a half-press) to the image being taken.
 

(Take shot, AF/AE primed)
Full-press Lag (0->S2)
The amount of time it takes from a full depression of the shutter release button (without performing a half-press of the shutter release beforehand) to the image being taken. This is more representative of the use of the camera in a spur of the moment 'point and shoot' situation.
 

(Take shot, AF/AE not primed)

Continuous mode

The tables below show the results of our continuous shooting test, indicating the actual frame rate along with maximum number of frames and how long you would have to wait after taking the maximum number of frames before you could take another shot. Media used for these tests was a 1.0GB SanDisk Extreme III SD card. Shutter speed was kept above 1/100 sec during these tests.

There is a single continuous shooting mode that offers a rather unimpressive 0.7 frames per second at the best quality setting (rising fractionally as you reduce the image size/quality), and there is a limit to how many shots you can take before the buffer is full and the rate slows down to an even more painful crawl. 3 frames in a burst is hardly impressive but that's what happens when you try to throw 12MP's worth of data about. Combined with its slow focusing speed, this means the P5100 shouldn't be your first choice for blink-and-you'll-miss-it moments.

Continuous drive mode

In burst mode the Coolpix 5100 shows a brief review image for each frame taken. Focus and exposure are fixed with the first frame.

Image Type
Mode
Avg. frames
per sec
Frames in a burst *1
After
burst
*2
4000 x 3000 JPEG Fine Continuous

0.7 fps

3 0.3 fps
4000 x 3000 JPEG Normal Continuous 0.9 fps 6/7 0.3 fps
3264 x 2448 JPEG Fine Continuous 0.9 fps 6/7 0.3 fps
2592 x 1944 JPEG Fine Continuous 0.9 fps 8 0.3 fps
2048 x 1536 JPEG Fine Continuous 0.9 fps 18 0.4 fps

*1 In a single "burst" (finger held down on shutter release) until the buffer is full.
*2 With the shutter release held down it is possible to continue shooting after the initial burst at around one frame every 3.2 seconds, though the camera re-focuses between each frame. The buffer takes around 5 seconds to completely clear if you want to shoot another full burst.

When you consider that competitors such as the Canon G9 offer 1.5 frames per second with no practical limit to the number of shots per burst you can see that the P5100 isn't the best 'action camera' on the market.

File Write / Display and Sizes

Timings shown below are the time taken for the camera to process and "flush" the image out to the storage card, the timer was started as soon as the shutter release was pressed and stopped when activity indicator went out. This means the timings also include the camera's processing time and as such are more representative of the actual time to "complete the task". The media used for these tests was a 1.0GB SanDisk Extreme III SD card.

Image Type
Time to store
(secs)

Time to display
(secs)
*3

File size *1
(approx.)
Images on a *2
1.0 GB Card
4000 x 3000 JPEG Fine 3.2 ~1.5 4,186 KB 167
4000 x 3000 JPEG Normal 3.2 ~1.5 2,066 KB 333
4000 x 3000 JPEG Basic 3.2 ~1.5 1,226 KB 659
3264 x 2448 JPEG Fine 3.2 ~1.5 2,204 KB 250
2592 x 1944 JPEG Fine 3.2 ~1.5 1,829 KB 394

*1 All file sizes are an average of three files. As is the case with JPEG it's difficult to predict the size of an image because it will vary a fair amount depending on the content of the image (detail and noise).
*2 Camera estimation.
*3 The P5100 initially shows low resolution preview versions of each image. Jumping from one image to the next takes around 0.2 seconds. This column shows the time take to render the high-res version of the image.

Although the buffer is large enough to store multiple images, the time between taking a shot and the card write light going out is a ponderous 3.2 seconds. At around 4MB per image, it's fair to say that the camera is not making the most of the card's write speed.

White Balance

In addition to the standard auto white balance, the Coolpix P5100 has five white balance presets (daylight, incandescent, fluorescent, cloudy, and flash) and a manual setting. To set the white balance manually, simply choose the PRE option and a small preview appears; point the camera at a white or gray object and press 'OK'. The manual white balance setting is remembered even if you switch the camera off. In use the auto WB did a good job when shooting in daylight (very occasionally scenes with an unusual expanse of color fooled the system, but this was thankfully rare). Things are a little less impressive in artificial light, often producing a fairly strong cast. As with most compact cameras in most instances it is better to use a WB preset (or manual WB) in such situations.

Incandescent - Auto WB
Red 4.1%, Blue -3.9%
Average
Incandescent - Incandescent preset WB
Red 6.9%, Blue -12.7%
Average
Fluorescent - Auto WB
Red 7.5%, Blue -15.3%
Poor
Fluorescent - Fluorescent preset WB
Red 6.9%, Blue -8.8%
Average

Flash Performance

Flash has always been one of Nikon's strong points and the P5100's built-in flash does a pretty good job in both exposure and color terms, and offers a respectable 0.3 to 8M shooting range (at wideangle with auto ISO). We found the flash to be very reliable in typical shooting conditions (social occasions indoors in low light). There is a tendency to slight under exposure, though this can be fixed very easily in post-processing, and there is a slight warm tone, which is no bad thing if you mostly shoot people. We did not see any blown-out flash shots in our testing - overexposure is considerably more difficult to deal with than the slight underexposure seen here.

The In-Camera Red-Eye Fix (seen on many recent Nikon models) works well - far better than cameras that rely purely on a pre-flash system; the Nikon system actually finds and corrects red-eye using its on-board processor. The only downside to this highly effective red-eye removal system is a rather severe performance hit - with shot-to-shot times stretching to around seven seconds. Of course the big difference between the P5100 and 99% of the other compacts on the market is that you have the option to add a fully dedicated external flash thanks to the inclusion of a hot shoe connection.

Skin tone - SLight warm cast,
very slight underexposure
Color chart - Warm cast,
Good exposure

D-Lighting

The P5100 has Nikon's 'D-Lighting' feature, designed to lighten shadows without affecting the highlights in the image. The effect - basically a form of in-camera contrast masking - is an option after an image has been taken with the results saved as a new file so your original isn't damaged. For high-contrast images the results are pretty impressive (though inevitably they come at a price - slightly higher shadow noise and some lost highlight detail). There is no control over the amount of lighting applied, but it tends to get the balance right, producing natural looking pictures without any tone mapping/high dynamic range creepiness.

Original image 40 mm equiv., 1/165 sec, F2.7 After D-Lighting has been
applied in-camera.

Macro Focus

As with previous Coolpix models the P5100 has a good macro mode, but one that performs at its best in a small region of the zoom (near the wide end), when you can get down as close as 4cm, capturing an area just over 45mm across. Distortion at the closest focus point is fairly low and is eliminated entirely by switching distortion control on. Edge-to-edge sharpness is reasonable. Close focus at the long end of the zoom is less impressive in terms of how close you can get (40cm), but the quality is good. As in many of our tests, we found the P5100 occasionally struggled to focus in macro mode.

Wide macro*1 - 44 x 33mm coverage
89 px/mm (2267 px/in)
Distortion: Very low
Corner softness: Moderate
Equiv. focal length: 35 mm
Mid Zoom macro - 110 x 82 mm coverage
36 px/mm (920 px/in)
Distortion: Very Low
Corner softness: Moderate
Equiv. focal length:123 mm
*1 Wideangle macro shown has distortion control turned on. Click here for the version with distortion control turned off.

Barrel and Pincushion Distortion

The P5000 set new standards for Nikon compact cameras in terms of distortion, with no measurable distortion at the long end of the zoom. The P5100 improves on this because the 1.4% barrel distortion at the wide end carried over from the P5000 can now be corrected for.

Barrel distortion - 1.4% at Wide angle
Equiv. focal length: 35 mm
Pincushion distortion - 0.0% at Telephoto
Equiv. focal length: 123 mm

The P5100 offers a distortion control mode that corrects for the distortion noted above. Some of Nikon's competitors apply a degree of distortion correction 'behind the scenes,' whereas it is an optional setting on the P5100. Turning it on adds to the processing the camera has to do on each image, so continuous shooting, bracketing and BSS modes are unavailable, making it somewhat restrictive. It also makes little difference at the long end of the zoom, which doesn't feature any distortion anyway, but corrects the barrel distortion at the wide-angle end of the lens near-perfectly. Our tests registered 0.1% pincushion distortion, which is within the limits of error of the test. Click here to see the chart. It is particularly useful in Macro mode, allowing undistorted images to be produced at even the closest focusing distance.

Specific Image Quality Issues

A camera with a compact sensor churning out 12 million pixels is unlikely to be a low-light superstar and the real-world photos we took prove this to be the case. At anything above moderate sensitivities the Nikon's output starts to get pretty grainy to an extent that even extensive post processing will struggle to save. To be fair, this is equally true of the other 12MP cameras on the market and the Nikon is fairly restrained with its noise reduction, so detail isn't just smudged away. At low ISO settings, the results are very good, with with the P5100 producing very natural looking colors and generally exposing very well. The images can look a little flat compared with other point-and-shoots because Nikon takes a fairly conservative approach to saturation and sharpening. This is ideal if you want to tweak the images on a computer later and can be boosted through the 'Optimize Image' menu if you want the 'straight-between-the-eyes' impact that other brands tend to offer by default. In fact we were actually very impressed with the natural color and smooth tonality of the images, along with the clean, artefact-free appearance (at the lowest ISO settings) - these are the kind of results SLR users will feel right at home with.

The lens is pretty slow at the long end of the zoom, requiring slow shutter speeds or higher ISO. Thankfully the very effective VR image stabilization system does a good job of helping keep results sharp as the shutter speed drops. Other than that, its performance impressive, with very little in the way of chromatic aberration or fringing. There is a little corner softness but you have to really hunt around for it. Diffraction begins to impact image quality at all but the widest of apertures, with fine detail starting to disappear as soon as the lens is stopped-down to small apertures. Again, this problem is caused by small sensors running into the limits of physics, so is just as much of an issue for other small sensor cameras, particularly those with relatively slow lenses.

Highlight clipping (and exposure issues)

The P5100 generally meters very well, with only the very occasional bit of overexposure in difficult-to-expose scenes with extremes of light and shade. Impressively, this was only the case in two or three of more than 400 images we took during the test of the camera.

35 mm equiv., F5.4 35 mm equiv., F5.4
35 mm equiv., F5.4 35 mm equiv., F5.4

Purple fringing

As mentioned above there is some purple fringing, but you need to look long and hard to find it in 99% of shots - even those taken against the light. Even then it's so mild as to be insignificant. This example comes from a shot in which almost any digital camera would produce fringing.

100% crop 35 mm equiv., F4.8

ISO Sensitivity / Noise levels


Standard Test
ISO equivalence on a digital camera is the ability to increase the sensitivity of the sensor. The works by turning up the "volume" (gain) on the sensor's signal amplifiers (remember the sensor is an analogue device). By amplifying the signal you also amplify the noise which becomes more visible at higher ISO's. Many modern cameras also employ noise reduction and / or sharpness reduction at higher sensitivities.

To measure noise levels we take a sequence of images of a GretagMacBeth ColorChecker chart (controlled artificial daylight lighting). The exposure is matched to the ISO (i.e. ISO 200, 1/200 sec for consistency of exposure between cameras).

The image sequence is run through our own proprietary measurement tool which measures the standard deviation (normalized) of the middle gray patch (indicated by the red rectangle above). Note that noise values indicated on the graphs below should not be compared to those in other reviews.

Nikon Coolpix P5100 vs Canon PowerShot G9 vs Nikon Coolpix P5000

Nikon Coolpix P5100
ISO 64
Canon PowerShot G9
ISO 80

Nikon Coolpix P5000
ISO 64

Nikon Coolpix P5100
ISO 100
Canon PowerShot G9
ISO 100

Nikon Coolpix P5000
ISO 100

Nikon Coolpix P5100
ISO 200
Canon PowerShot G9
ISO 200

Nikon Coolpix P5000
ISO 200

Nikon Coolpix P5100
ISO 400
Canon PowerShot G9
ISO 400

Nikon Coolpix P5000
ISO 400

Nikon Coolpix P5100
ISO 800
Canon PowerShot G9
ISO 800

Nikon Coolpix P5000
ISO 800

Nikon Coolpix P5100
ISO 1600
Canon PowerShot G9
ISO 1600

Nikon Coolpix P5000
ISO 1600

Nikon Coolpix P1000
ISO 2000
n/a Nikon Coolpix P5000
ISO 2000
 

Small sensors with high pixel counts usually mean large amounts of noise and the P5100 is no different. It may have a very slightly larger sensor than its predecessor but it also has more sensor sites crammed onto it, so there's no real improvement in performance at high sensitivities. It appears that the P5100 is using marginally higher NR than its predecessor (presumably to counter a slightly noisier sensor), something confirmed in the graphs at the bottom of the page. The net effect is that 'real word' detail is roughly unchanged between the P5100 and its predecessor.

To a large degree this test is more an assessment of the effectiveness (both measurable and visible) of a camera's noise reduction system. Designers have to balance the desire to produce smooth, clean results with the need to retain as much detail as possible (if you blur away the noise, you blur away image detail too). These crops show that all manufacturers find it difficult to produce an acceptable result at anything over base ISO from 12 million pixels crammed into a tiny sensor. By ISO 400 both the P5100 and G9 are showing both noise and a loss of detail from noise reduction. Above that, both do equally badly with noise increasing and detail being lost. Which is not to say that these cameras are bad examples of their kind - we have yet to see a 12MP compact that avoids noise and detail loss at anything above moderate ISO settings. It's interesting to see that at anything over the lowest ISO settings there appears to be very little advantage to the extra pixels the P5100 provides over the P5000 - if anything the softening effect of noise reduction at the highest ISO settings makes the P5100's output actually worse than its predecessor.

Low contrast detail

What the crops and graph don't show is the effect of noise reduction on low contrast fine detail such as hair, fur or foliage. An inevitable side effect of noise removal is that this kind of detail is also blurred or smeared, resulting in a loss of 'texture'. In a new test the crops below show the effect of the noise reduction on such texture (hair) as you move up the ISO range.

100% Crops
ISO 64 ISO 100 ISO 200
ISO 400 ISO 800 ISO 1600
 
ISO 2000 ISO 3200  

No surprises here - at ISO 200 and above noise reduction starts to have an effect on low contrast detail, but we've seen far worse. ISO 400 and 800 are usable for smaller prints, though the light-handed approach to chroma NR means that you are beginning to see colored blotches at ISO 400, getting progressively worse as you increase sensitivity. We'd actually like to see a little less luminance NR and a little more chroma NR, since this would help retain detail and look more pleasant. ISO 3200 (5MP size) uses pixel binning to produce a very smooth, almost featureless result that is, to put it mildly, of limited use.

Luminance noise graph

Indicated ISO sensitivity is on the horizontal axis of this graph, standard deviation of luminosity on the vertical axis.

RGB noise graph

Indicated ISO sensitivity is on the horizontal axis of this graph, standard deviation of each of the red, green and blue channels are on the vertical axis.


Movie mode

As is now the norm on cameras of this type the P5100 offers a maximum movie size of 640x480 pixels - enough to fill most television screens at 30 frames per second (though it doesn't have any of the fancy higher resolution - or wide screen - capabilities now seen on some top of the range models). It still has a good selection of options, though:

  • TV Movie (640 x 480 pixels at 15 or 30 fps)
  • Small Size (320 x 240 pixels at 15 fps)
  • Smaller Size (160 x 120 pixels at 15 fps)
  • Time Lapse Movie (up to 1800 stills at specified intervals, combined into a movie up to 60 secs long)
  • Sepia movie (320 x 240 / 15fps)
  • Black and White movie (320 x 240 / 15fps)

The AVI files are actually pretty small - at the best quality setting (640x480 / 30fps) you're burning around a megabyte every second. Despite this the image quality is - though not the best - actually pretty good; there are mild compression artifacts, but the motion is smooth and for most users there will be little cause for complaint.

The image stabilization works well too; one of the real advantages of a lens-shift (as opposed to CCD shift) system. Frustratingly, only auto white balance is available in movie mode, lending an interesting yellow cast to all your indoor movies. Most damningly, though, like many of the recent Nikon compacts, the sound drops out for the last second or so of every single clip. There is also no ability to edit the length of files, in-camera, demanding additional software if you want to use video for anything more than a bit of fun.

You cannot use the optical zoom during filming (though you can set it before you start), but you can enable and use the digital zoom, though you will see a distinct loss of quality if you do.

The movie screen is a simplified version of what you see when shooting stills, with an indication of the time remaining on the card.
The movie menu is very basic; here you'll find movie options (size, frame rate and special effects) and autofocus mode (single or continuous).
As mentioned above there are plenty of options for the size and quality of movie clips. There are no in-camera movie editing options.

Sample movies

640x480 pixels @ 30fps
3 seconds
File size: 3.0 MB

Click on the thumbnail to view the movie (caution: large file!)

640x480 pixels @ 30fps
6 seconds
File size: 6.3 MB
Focal length: 123mm equiv.
VR on

Click on the thumbnail to view the movie (caution: large file!)


Image stabilization

The optical image stabilization system used on the Coolpix P5100 is based on the VR (Vibration Reduction) lens-shift technology first seen on Nikon's professional SLR lenses, and seen on previous models such as the P3 and P4. As with the P5000 there is only one mode, which automatically detects panning. Being a lens-based system the preview image is stabilized when the VR is turned on, which helps with framing; it also means you get the benefit of stabilization when shooting movies.

With short zooms like this (max focal length 123mm equiv.) image stabilization is considerably less essential than with a 10x or 12x 'super zoom'. At anything over about 1/125th sec you're not going to suffer from camera shake a great deal. At the short end of the zoom camera shake becomes a problem at around 1/15th sec (depending on how steady-handed you are). Speeds slower than this are difficult to stabilize reliably irrespective of the system you are using.

If you take a few 'safety' shots when pushing the system hard (1/8th at 123mm for example), you'll usually get at least one 'keeper'. This is where Nikon's excellent 'Best Shot Selector' (which takes a series of up to 10 shots and only saves the sharpest) proves its worth.

The example below shows how - with a bit of luck - you can get a sharp shot a good four stops slower than you would expect from a non-stabilized camera (It can't work miracles, though and pushed this hard is still showing up some shake even with VR, and continued to do so in around half the shots we took).

Real world example: 123mm (equiv), 1/8th Second, hand-held.
Stabilization off Stabilization on

The stabilization test

In this simplified version of our SLR IS test, four hand-held shots were taken of a static scene with the stabilization off and on. The shutter speed was decreased and repeated (from 1/250 sec to 1/8 sec). The zoom was set to its maximum position (123mm equiv.), the test target was 3.0m away from the camera. The test was repeated ten times and an average taken.

The resulting images were then inspected and given a blur score -

  • Sharp (no visible blurring at 100%)
  • Mild Blur (the kind of camera shake that is tolerable at normal 'postcard' print sizes)
  • Heavy Blur (blur visible even at small print sizes)
  • Very Heavy Blur (totally unusable due to camera shake - little if any detail visible).

As the charts below show the VR system offers around a 2 stop advantage, (though how much you get from it will depend on how steady your hand is in the first place). As mentioned above the reason it's no greater is simple; the zoom isn't long enough for most users to need VR at anything under 1/250 sec and we've yet to see a system that can consistently stabilize speeds of 1/8th sec or slower, so there's a fairly narrow band of shutter speeds for the VR to work on.

Hand-held, no stabilization (123mm equiv.)

We had no problem getting 100% sharp shots at the long end of the zoom at anything over 1/125 second. Once we dropped below 1/60 sec things got increasingly shaky.

Hand-held, stabilization on (123mm equiv.)

With stabilization on the improvement is obvious, and represents an advantage of around 2 stops. The key difference is that at 1/60 sec you're getting a 100% hit rate, and in the 1/8 to 1/60 sec region your chances of a usable shot are considerably higher - if you take a few safety shots (or make use of Nikon's 'Best Shot Selector' function) you can certainly expect to get something usable at anything at 1/15 sec or higher at the long end of the zoom. The VR considerably increases the likelihood of getting a sharp shot. However, its ability to stabilize at 1/15th and 1/8th sec are only really useful for stationary objects - anything else will move too much in that time.


by facestar 2007. 12. 28. 14:20

Canon EOS-1Ds Mark III Preview
Phil Askey, August 2007

The EOS-1Ds Mark III becomes the seventh Canon professional EOS-1D series digital SLR, although only the third of the 's' suffix sub-category which indicates a full frame sensor. Three years since the last EOS-1Ds, the Mark II, the Mark III pushes digital SLR resolution over the twenty megapixel barrier with specifically twenty-one-point-one million pixels (5616 x 3744) on its 36 x 24 mm (full 35 mm frame) sensor. Canon also claim to have increased the 'light gathering efficiency' of the sensor by reducing the amount of (wasted) space between microlenses, hence despite the resolution increase the Mark III still provides sensitivity up to ISO 3200 (with boost enabled).

As well as increasing resolution Canon has pushed continuous shooting up a step with five frames per second over the Mark II's four frames per second. This means that at full speed the two DIGIC III image processors are dealing with an impressive 185 MB/sec. Other improvements include the larger screen, Live View, a fourteen-bit A/D converter and fourteen-bit RAW files, UDMA Compact Flash support (up to 45 MB/sec) and a whole range of features (such as dual storage slots and Picture Styles) inherited from the EOS-1D Mark III.

Model line history

The EOS-1Ds Mark III represents a 26% increase in resolution over the EOS-1Ds Mark II which in turn represented a 50% increase in resolution over the original EOS-1Ds.

Model
Announced
Effective pixels
Sensor size
Continuous High (JPEG) LCD monitor
EOS-1D Sep 2001 4.2 mp 1.3x crop 8.0 fps, 21 frames 2.0"
EOS-1Ds Sep 2002 11.1 mp Full frame 3.0 fps, 10 frames 2.0"
EOS-1D Mark II Jan 2004 8.2 mp 1.3x crop 8.3 fps, 40 frames 2.0"
EOS-1Ds Mark II Sep 2004 16.7 mp Full frame 4.0 fps, 32 images 2.0"
EOS-1D Mark II N Aug 2005 8.2 mp 1.3x crop 8.3 fps, 48 images 2.5"
EOS-1D Mark III Feb 2007 10.1 mp 1.3x crop 10.0 fps, 110 images 3.0" (Live view)
EOS-1Ds Mark III Aug 2007 21.1 mp Full frame 5.0 fps, 56 images 3.0" (Live view)

Canon EOS-1Ds Mark III vs. EOS-1Ds Mark II feature and specification differences

 

Canon EOS-1Ds Mark III

Canon EOS-1Ds Mark II
Sensor • 21.1 million effective pixels
• 6.4 µm pixel pitch
• 16.7 million effective pixels
• 7.2 µm pixel pitch
Image processor Dual DIGIC III DIGIC II
A/D converter 14-bit 12-bit
Image sizes • 5616 x 3744
• 4992 x 3328
• 4080 x 2720
• 2784 x 1856
• 4992 x 3328
• 3600 x 2400
• 3072 x 2048
• 2496 x 1664
RAW files • CR2 format, 14-bit
• RAW full resolution
• sRAW (5.2 MP)
CR2 format, 12-bit
RAW full resolution
Dust reduction High speed vibration of filter None
Auto focus • 45-point TTL CMOS sensor
• 19 cross-type for F2.8 or faster lens
• 45-point TTL CMOS sensor
• 7 cross-type for F4 or faster lens
AF adjustment Yes No
Metering 63-zone linked to AF points 21-zone linked to AF points
Shutter 300,000 exposure durability 200,000 exposure durability
Noise reduction Optional High ISO No option
White balance Up to five personal WB presets Up to three personal WB presets
Image parameters • Picture Styles (six default, three user)
• Sharpness: 0 to 7
• Contrast: -4 to +4
• Saturation: -4 to +4
• Color tone: -4 to +4
• B&W filter: N, Ye, Or, R, G
• B&W tone: N, S, B, P, G
• Color matrix (five default, two user)
• Sharpness: 0 to 5
• Contrast: -2 to +2
• Saturation: -2 to +2
• Color tone: -2 to +2
Viewfinder • 100% frame coverage
• Magnification: 0.76x
• Eyepoint: 20 mm
• 100% frame coverage
• Magnification: 0.70x
• Eyepoint: 20 mm
ISO in viewfinder Yes No
LCD monitor • 3.0" TFT LCD
• 230,000 pixels
• 7 brightness levels
• 2.0" TFT LCD
• 230,000 pixels
• 5 brightness levels
LCD Live View Yes No
Playback modes Exposure line at top in single image view No exposure in single image view
Silent shooting Yes (quieter release) No
Continuous shooting • 5.0 / 3.0 fps
• Up to 56 JPEG Large/Fine images
• 5.0 fps
• Up to 32 JPEG Large/Fine images
Auto rotate • On (recorded and LCD display)
• On (recorded only)
• Off
• On
• Off
My Menu Up to six menu options can be customize No
Menu languages 18 15
Custom functions 57 20
Hot-shoe water resistance Yes (with 580 EX II) No
Storage • Compact Flash slot (UDMA support)
• SD card slot (SDHC support)
• USB drives via WFT-E2/E2A
Compact Flash slot
• SD card slot
Data connectivity • USB 2.0 Hi-Speed • USB 1.1
• Firewire IEEE 1394
Battery power Lithium-Ion LP-E4 rechargeable battery Ni-MH NP-E3 rechargeable battery
Dimensions 150 x 160 x 80 mm (6.1 x 6.2 x 3.1 in) 156 x 158 x 80 mm (6.1 x 6.2 x 3.1 in)
Weight • No battery: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb)
• With battery: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb)
• No battery: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb)
• With battery: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)

Canon EOS-1Ds Mark III specifications

List price (body only) US: $7,999
EU: €7,999
Body material Magnesium alloy (exterior, chassis and mirror box)
Sensor * • 36 x 24 mm CMOS sensor
• Full 35 mm size frame
• RGB Color Filter Array
• Built-in fixed low-pass filter (with self-cleaning unit)
• 21.9 million total pixels
• 21.1 million effective pixels
• 6.4 µm pixel pitch
• 3:2 aspect ratio
Image processor * Dual DIGIC III
A/D conversion * 14 bit
Image sizes (JPEG) * • 5616 x 3744 (L; 21.0 MP)
• 4992 x 3328 (M1; 16.6 MP)
• 4080 x 2720 (M2; 11.0 MP)
• 2784 x 1856 (S; 5.2 MP)
Image sizes (RAW) * • 5616 x 3744 (RAW; 21.0 MP)
• 2784 x 1856 (sRAW; 5.2 MP)
File formats

• RAW (.CR2; 14-bit)
• JPEG (EXIF 2.21) - Fine / Normal
• RAW + JPEG (separate files)

File sizes (approx.) * • JPEG L: 6.4 MB
• JPEG M1: 5.2 MB
• JPEG M2: 3.9 MB
• JPEG S: 2.2 MB
• RAW: 25.0 MB
• sRAW: 14.5 MB
JPEG quality options Each JPEG size (L, M1, M2, S) can be set to a quality level of 1 to 10 (1 high compression, low quality - 10 low compression, high quality)
Lenses • Canon EF lens mount (does not support EF-S lenses)
• No field of view crop (1.0x)
Dust reduction * • "EOS Integrated Cleaning System"
• Self-cleaning sensor unit (filter in front of sensor vibrates at high frequency at start-up and shutdown - can be disabled)
• Dust Delete Data - Data from a test shot is used to 'map' dust spots and can be later removed using Canon DPP Software
Auto focus • 45-point TTL
• 19 cross-type points, require F2.8 or faster lens *
• Center cross-type point requires F4.0 or faster lens
• 26 assist points, require F5.6 or faster lens *
• TTL-AREA-SIR with a CMOS sensor
• AF working range: -1.0 to 18 EV (at 23°C, ISO 100)
Focus modes • One shot AF
• AI Servo AF
• Manual focus
AF point selection • Auto
• Manual (all 19 or inner 9 / outer 9)
AF assist External Speedlite only
Exposure modes • Program
• Aperture-priority
• Shutter-priority
• Manual
• Bulb
Metering

• 63 zone metering linked to 19 AF points *
• Metering range: 0 - 20 EV
• Modes: Center, Linked to AF point, Multi-spot (up to 8 readings)

Metering modes

• Evaluative (63 zone linked to active AF point)
• Center-weighted average
• Partial (8.5% of picture area)
• Spot metering (2.4% of picture area)

AE lock • Auto: One Shot AF with evaluative metering
• Manual: AE lock button
Exposure compensation • +/- 3.0 EV
• 0.3 or 0.5 EV increments
Exposure bracketing • 2, 3, 5 or 7 shots
• +/- 3.0 EV
• 0.3 or 0.5 EV increments
Sensitivity

• ISO 100 - 1600
• 0.3 or 1.0 EV increments
• ISO 50 (Enhanced L)
• ISO 3200 (Enhanced H)

Shutter • Focal-plane shutter
• 300,000 exposure durability *
• 30 - 1/8000 sec
• 0.3, 0.5 or 1.0 EV increments
• Flash X-Sync: 1/250 sec
• Bulb
Aperture values • F1.0 - F91
• 0.3, 0.5 or 1.0 EV increments
• Actual aperture range depends on lens used
Noise reduction • Long exposure (1 sec or longer)
• Optional for High ISO (default Off) *
White balance • Auto
• Daylight
• Shade
• Cloudy
• Tungsten
• Fluorescent
• Flash
• Custom (up to 5 can be stored)
• Kelvin (2500 - 10000 K in 100 K steps)
• Personal WB (up to 5 can be preset in software *)
WB bracketing • +/-3 levels
• 3 images
• Blue / Amber or Magenta / Green bias
WB shift • Blue (-9) To Amber (+9)
• Magenta (-9) to Green (+9)
Picture style * • Standard
• Portrait
• Landscape
• Neutral
• Faithful
• Monochrome
• User def. 1
• User def. 2
• User def. 3
Custom image parameters * • Sharpness: 0 to 7
• Contrast: -4 to +4
• Saturation: -4 to +4
• Color tone: -4 to +4
• B&W filter: N, Ye, Or, R, G
• B&W tone: N, S, B, P, G
Color space • sRGB
• Adobe RGB
Viewfinder • Eye-level pentaprism
• 100% frame coverage
• Magnification: 0.76x * (-1 diopter with 50 mm lens at infinity)
• Eyepoint: 20 mm
• Dioptric adjustment: -3 to +1 diopter
• Precision matte screen Ee-C IV (interchangeable)
• Eye-piece shutter available via lever
Mirror • Quick-return half mirror (transmission:reflection ratio 37:63)
• Mirror lock-up (once or multiple exposures)
Viewfinder info • AF points
• Focus confirmation light
• Metering mode
• ISO sensitivity *
• Shutter speed
• Aperture
• Manual exposure
• AE Lock
• Exposure compensation amount
• AEB level
• Spot metering circle
• Flash ready
• Red-eye reduction lamp on
• High-speed sync
• FE Lock
• Flash compensation amount
• Warnings
• Maximum burst for continuous shooting
• Buffer space
LCD monitor * • 3.0" TFT LCD
• 230,000 pixels
• 7 brightness levels
LCD Live view * • Live TTL display of scene from CMOS image sensor
• 100% frame coverage
• Real-time evaluative metering using CMOS image sensor
• Best view or exposure simulation
• Grid optional (thirds)
• Magnify optional (5x or 10x at AF point)
• Aspect ratio masking for 6:6, 3:4, 4:5, 6:7, 10:12 and 5:7
• Remote live view using EOS Utility 2.0 (via USB or WiFi/Ethernet using WFT)
• Manual focus only
Record review • Off
• On (histogram via INFO button)
• Display mode same as last used Play mode
• 2 / 4 / 8 sec / Hold
Playback modes *

1. Single image with exposure, file number, storage slot
2. As 1 but also image count and quality
3. Detailed exposure information, thumbnail and luminance histogram
4. Less detailed exposure info., thumbnail, luminance and RGB histograms

Playback features • Optional blinking highlight alert
• Optional AF point display
• Magnified view (up to 10x)
• 2x2 or 3x3 thumbnail index
• Jump (by 1, 10, 100 images / by screen, date or folder) *
• Delete / Protect
• Record audio clip up to 30 seconds
Flash • No built-in flash unit
• E-TTL II auto flash / metered manual
• Flash compensation +/-3.0 EV in 0.3 or 0.5 EV increments
• X-Sync: 1/250 sec
• High-speed flash with EX-series speedlites up to 1/8000 sec
• Hot-shoe & PC Terminal
Drive modes • Single
• Silent (single frame) *
• High-speed continuous: 5 fps * (adjustable 5 - 2 fps)
• Low-speed continuous: 3 fps * (adjustable 4 - 1 fps)
• Self-timer: 2 or 10 sec (3 sec with mirror lock-up)
Burst buffer * • Large/Fine JPEG: 56 frames
• RAW: 12 frames
• RAW+JPEG: 10 frames
Orientation sensor Yes
Auto rotation * • On (recorded and LCD display)
• On (recorded only)
• Off
Custom functions * 57 custom functions in 4 groups
My Menu * Up to six menu options can be customized
Menu languages * • English
• German
• French
• Dutch
• Danish
• Portuguese
• Finnish
• Italian
• Norwegian
• Swedish
• Spanish
• Greek
• Russian
• Polish
• Simplified Chinese
• Traditional Chinese
• Korean
• Japanese
Firmware User upgradable
Wireless Via WFT-E2/E2A (optional)
Connectivity

• USB 2.0 Hi-Speed *
• Video out
• N3 type wired remote control
• PC Sync flash terminal

Storage • Compact Flash Type I or II (supports UDMA *)
• SD card slot (supports SD/SDHC *)
• External USB hard drives (requires WFT-E2/E2A) *
• Canon Original Data Security Kit supported ("Original Image Data")
Storage options * • Record to one memory card
• Record same image to both CF and SD cards (backup)
• Record RAW image to CF and JPEG to SD card
• Overflow (once one card becomes full camera uses next card)
• Copy from one card to another
Power • Lithium-Ion LP-E4 rechargeable battery * (supplied & charger)
• AC adapter
Power information • Current power source
• Remaining capacity
• Current shutter count on this battery charge
• Recharge performance
Dimensions * 150 x 160 x 80 mm (6.1 x 6.2 x 3.1 in)
Weight (no batt) * 1205 g (2.7 lb)
Weight (inc. batt) * 1385 g (3.1 lb)

* New or changed compared to the EOS-1Ds Mark II

Press Release

Jump to:

Canon strengthens pro lineup with 21 Megapixel
EOS-1Ds Mark III

Amstelveen, The Netherlands, 20 August, 2007: Canon raises the stakes in the professional photography market with the launch of the 21 Megapixel, 5 frame per second EOS-1Ds Mark III. Delivering 14-bit depth resolution from a newly developed 35mm full frame CMOS sensor, Canon’s new flagship digital SLR produces files that convert to over 100MB uncompressed 16-bit TIFF, setting a new benchmark in image resolution and sharpness for 35mm-format digital photography.

As well as producing outstanding colour rendition, Dual DIGIC III processors drive 5 fps continuous shooting for up to 56 Large JPEGs (12 RAW) – unrivalled by any other camera at this resolution. This capacity to shoot such large images uninterrupted is regarded as a big driver in switching studio photographers to the EOS platform.

The EOS-1Ds Mark III inherits the new technology platform introduced earlier this year in the EOS-1D Mark III, including 63-zone exposure metering, 19 cross-type auto focus system, a 3.0” LCD with Live View mode and EOS Integrated Cleaning System. The Highlight Tone Priority function expands dynamic range for more depth and detail in bright areas. The launch is supported with the announcement of Canon’s new ultra wide-angle lens, the Lens 2.

“Taking image quality and versatility to unprecedented levels, the EOS-1Ds Mark III redefines commercial photography conventions”, said Karz Suzuki, Head of Canon Professional Services. “The camera will strengthen Canon’s popularity amongst professional studio photographers. Culminating 20 years of EOS development, the EOS-1Ds Mark III represents a definitive moment in our company’s photographic history.”

Key features

  • 21 Megapixel full frame (35mm) CMOS sensor
  • 5 fps continuous shooting for up to 56 frames
  • Dual “DIGIC III” processors
  • Highlight Tone Priority
  • Auto focus system with 19 cross type sensors and 26 focus assist points
  • EOS Integrated Cleaning System
  • ISO 100-1600 (expandable to L:50 H:3200)
  • 3.0” 230K pixel LCD with Live View mode
  • Redesigned viewfinder now wider and brighter

Image quality

The EOS-1Ds Mark III produces files that exceed the standard resolution requirements of leading agencies and stock libraries. The third generation CMOS sensor incorporates a new pixel design with on-chip noise reduction circuitry to ensure high image quality all the way to ISO 1600. 14 bit A/D converters provide a total colour depth of 16,384 tones per pixel - delivering smoother gradations and more accurate colour reproduction.

The option to expand to H:3200 will be welcomed by professionals working in churches and sensitive situations where the use of flash is not permitted or desired. Where discretion is paramount, a silent drive mode delays shutter re-cocking for as long as the shutter release remains depressed.

Highlight Tone Priority mode gives wedding and landscape photographers the option to boost dynamic range for highlights when shooting above ISO 200 – reproducing more tonal detail from wedding dresses, clouds and other bright objects.

Precision and control

The auto focus system includes 19 cross-type sensors with sensitivity up to f/2.8, spread across the AF area to better accommodate off-centre subjects. An additional 26 AF assist points help with AF tracking accuracy.

The control layout includes a dedicated AF-ON button on the back of the camera, allowing users to instantly switch auto focus on when composing. The viewfinder is now brighter with a wider angle of view, while the 63-zone metering system gives photographers a greater degree of control over exposure.

New LCD with Live View

The bright 3.0” LCD monitor provides 230K pixels resolution for precise framing and reviewing. Live View mode displays a real-time image on the LCD, including a selectable grid overlay and a live histogram that simulates image exposure. For the studio environment, remote Live View lets the photographer compose, adjust settings and capture the shot from a PC using the supplied EOS utility software.

New controls and menu

The EOS-1Ds Mark III’s menu incorporates a tab structure that eliminates scrolling for vastly improved readability and ease of use. Improving on previous models, personal settings and custom functions are consolidated into 57 custom functions grouped into four logical categories. Photographers can also now see at a glance any default setting changes. The My Menu option allows photographers to store frequently used settings on a separate menu for immediate access. Settings for recently released accessories such as the Speedlite 580EX II and the Wireless File Transmitter WFT-E2 can be controlled directly from the LCD. Along with a new dedicated ISO button, ISO is permanently displayed on the top LCD panel.

Reliability

Shutter durability is increased by 50% to 300,000 cycles. A magnesium alloy casing with dust and moisture resistant seals protects the body. The EOS Integrated Cleaning System reduces, repels and removes dust from the sensor to significantly limit the need for manual cleaning. To avoid image loss, a warning alarm sounds if the memory card door is opened while images are still being written.

Connectivity

Interfaces include video out (for display in both NTSC and PAL formats – with the Live View mode ideal for live display to clients during the shoot) and USB 2.0. To prevent the USB cable becoming accidentally dislodged during shooting, a special connection secures it to the camera body.

Compatibility and accessories

As well as full compatibility with all EF lenses and EX Speedlite flashes and accessories, the EOS-1Ds Mark III is supported by the recently released Wireless File Transmitter WFT-E2. The WFT-E2 enables secure wireless uploads to FTP servers as well as remote access via HTTP and PTP protocols. The unit also connects wirelessly to external storage media and supports GPS tagging when used with a portable GPS device. For assignments where image protection and authenticity are crucial, the EOS-1Ds Mark III is compatible with the Original Data Security Kit OSK-E3.

New lens

Today’s launch coincides with the release of the EF 14mm f/2.8L II USM: Canon’s new professional L-series ultra wide-angle lens for the photographer requiring a slightly different perspective. As with many L-series lenses and the Speedlite 580EX II, the EF 14mm f/2.8L II USM incorporates environmental sealing to match that of the EOS-1Ds Mark III, creating a fully weatherproof camera system. Aspherical and UD lens elements produce exceptional image quality with improved corner-to-corner sharpness. The ring-type USM delivers fast, silent auto focus with full-time manual focus override. A circular aperture produces pleasing bokeh at wide apertures and Super Spectra coatings suppress ghosting and flare by suppressing internal reflections from lens element and sensor surfaces.

Software

The EOS-1Ds Mark III is packaged with a comprehensive software suite to streamline the photographer’s workflow. This includes Digital Photo Professional (DPP) RAW conversion/processing software for complete RAW image processing control. DPP also integrates with camera features such as the Dust Delete Data and Picture Style. The camera also comes with EOS Utility, ImageBrowser/Zoom Browser and Photostitch.

Technologies Explained

CMOS

Canon’s CMOS technology is one of the company’s key competitive advantages, with noise reduction circuitry at each pixel site delivering virtually noise-free images. In comparison with CCD technology, the lower power consumption characteristics of Canon’s CMOS sensors also contribute to longer battery life.
Signal conversion in Canon’s CMOS sensors is handled by individual amplifiers at each pixel site. Unnecessary charge transfer operations are avoided, vastly speeding up the process of getting signals to the image processor. Noise generation is reduced, power consumption is limited and faster frame rate potential is increased.

EOS Integrated Cleaning System

The EOS Integrated Cleaning System combats sensor dust in three important ways: Reduce, Repel and Remove.

  1. Reduce – Internal camera mechanisms are designed to minimise dust generation. The redesigned body cap prevents dust generation through wear on the cap itself.
     
  2. Repel – Anti-static technologies are applied to the low-pass filter covering the front of the sensor so as not to attract dust.
     
  3. Remove – A Self-Cleaning Sensor Unit uses hi-frequency vibrations to shake dust from the infrared filter for a period of approximately one second after each start up. For instant shooting after power up, this feature is disabled immediately the shutter release is depressed.

Canon has also developed an internal Dust Delete Data system, which can map the position of visible dust on the sensor. This can then be deleted automatically after the shoot with the latest Digital Photo Professional software.

Picture Style

Picture Style pre-sets simplify in-camera control over image qualities. Picture Style pre-sets can be likened to different film types – each one offering a different colour response. Within each selectable pre-set, photographers have control over sharpness, contrast, colour tone and saturation. The camera’s factory default configuration is set to deliver immediately-usable JPEG images without need for additional menu settings. Picture Style pre-sets applied to a RAW image can be revised with Canon’s Digital Photo Professional software.

The six presets include:

  • Standard – for crisp, vivid images that don’t require post-processing
  • Portrait – optimises colour tone and saturation and weakens sharpening to achieve attractive skin tones
  • Landscape – for punchier greens and blues with stronger sharpening to give a crisp edge to mountain, tree and building outlines
  • Neutral – ideal for post-processing
  • Faithful – adjusts colour to match the subject colour when shot under a colour temperature of 5200K
  • Monochrome – for black and white shooting with a range of filter effects (yellow, orange, red and green) and toning effects (sepia, blue, purple and green)

The User Defined Picture Style can be used to store up to three customized pre-sets, or any of the pre-sets available for download from Canon’s web site at www.canon.co.jp/Imaging/picturestyle/file/. Additionally, users can create their own custom Picture Style pre-sets using the supplied Picture Style Editor software.

Software

Digital Photo Professional Software

Digital Photo Professional software provides high speed, high quality processing of lossless RAW images. Processing with Digital Photo Professional allows real-time display and the immediate application of image adjustments, giving control over RAW image variables such as white balance, dynamic range, exposure compensation and colour tone. Images can be recorded in camera with sRGB or Adobe RGB colour space. Digital Photo Professional supports sRGB, Adobe RGB, ColorMatch RGB, Apple RGB and Wide Gamut RGB colour spaces.

ICC (International Colour Consortium) profiles can be attached to TIFF or JPEG images when converted from RAW. This allows faithful reproduction of colours in software applications that support ICC profiles, such as Adobe Photoshop. For improved efficiency, a set of image adjustments can be saved as a combination and applied.

Improvements in the latest version of Digital Photo Professional include three times faster image previews, an enhanced Noise Reduction tool and simultaneous batch processing of TIFF and JPEG images.

EOS Utility

The latest version of EOS Utility provides essential support for remote shooting control, camera configuration, remote Live View support and configuration of the new Original Data Security Kit OSK-E3 and Wireless File Transmitter WFT-E3 accessories. EOS Utility can be configured to monitor ‘hot’ folders, automatically renaming and moving incoming images to a structured file system – ideal for Wi-Fi transfers, or for commercial and studio photographers who want to shoot direct to a computer.


Additional images

Front with EF 50 mm F1.4 lens Rear
Top and controls Base
Left and right sides "In the box"
With EF 85 mm F1.2 L lens With EF 24-70 mm F2.8L lens and WFT-E2 WiFi transmitter
Magnesium body, chassis and mirror box (front) Magnesium body, chassis and mirror box (rear)
Weatherproof rubber seals (front) Weatherproof rubber seals(rear)
Viewfinder chamber layout Viewfinder pentaprism
45-point AF sensor AF sensor assembly
63 zone metering sensor 3.0" LCD monitor
Dual DIGIC III processor board Image processing pipeline (overview)
Reduced spacing between microlenses Photodiode area remains approx. the same
36 x 24 mm 'Full frame' 21.1 MP CMOS sensor 36 x 24 mm CMOS sensors on a silicon wafer
Self-Cleaning Sensor Unit layout Shutter
Top LCD panel layout Rear LCD panel layout
Viewfinder information System map

by facestar 2007. 12. 28. 13:59

Nikon D3 Hands-on Preview
Phil Askey, September 2007


Preview based on a pre-production Nikon D3

The professional Nikon D 'single digit' series of digital SLR's started life back in June 1999 with the groundbreaking D1. Groundbreaking because it was the digital SLR which broke Kodak's stranglehold on the digital SLR market and fundamentally brought prices down to a level which most professionals could afford (around the US$5,500 mark). Since then we have seen a steady progression of this line of cameras, while the core values of a high quality full size body with integrated grip have remained the line split into two halves, one targeted at high resolution photography the other high speed sports type photography (lower resolution but faster continuous shooting); the X and H suffixes. It's been almost three years since Nikon introduced a completely new digital SLR with a new sensor (the D2X) and there has been much anticipation that Nikon's next move would be a full-frame chip.

This predictions have come true with the introduction of the 'FX format' (new moniker created by Nikon) D3 which features a 36 x 23.9 mm 12.1 megapixel CMOS sensor as well as a vast array of new features which absolutely raise it another notch above previous single digit Nikon DSLRs. Important headline improvements include high sensitivity support by default, up to ISO 6400 with 25600 available as a boost option, 14-bit A/D conversion, a new standard image processor, a new shutter, new auto focus sensor, focus tracking by color, nine frames per second continuous, dual compact flash support, DX lens support (albeit at lower resolution) and a 3.0" 922,000 pixel LCD monitor (which it has to be said is lovely).

Some will undoubtedly question Nikon for 'only' delivering twelve megapixels on their first full frame digital SLR, all we can presume by looking at past model line history is that this camera is designed for speed (both in sensitivity, auto-focus and continuous shooting).

Model line history

Model
Announced
Effective pixels
Auto focus
Continuous highest (JPEG) LCD monitor
D1 Jun 1999 2.6 mp 5 point 4.5 fps, 21 frames 2.0", 120K pixels
D1X Feb 2001 5.3 mp 5 point 3.0 fps, 9 frames 2.0", 130K pixels
D1H Feb 2001 2.7 mp 5 point 5.0 fps, 40 frames 2.0", 130K pixels
D2H Jul 2003 4.1 mp 11 point 8.0 fps, 40 frames 2.5", 211K pixels
D2X Sep 2004 12.2 mp 11 point 5.0 fps, 22 frames *1 2.5" 235K pixels
D2Hs Feb 2005 4.1 mp 11 point 8.0 fps, 50 frames 2.5" 235K pixels
D2Xs Jun 2006 12.2 mp 11 point 5.0 fps, 22 frames *1 2.5" 230K pixels
D3 Aug 2007 12.1 mp (FF) 51 point 9.0 fps, 64 frames *2 3.0" 922K pixels + Live View

*1 Also 8 fps in cropped mode (6.7 MP)
*2 Up to 11 fps with DX format (5.1 MP)

Nikon D3 Key Features

  • First ever Nikon DSLR with a Full-Frame (36 x 24 mm) sensor (coined FX format)
  • 12.1 megapixel full-frame sensor (8.45µm pixel pitch)
  • ISO 200 - 6400 (with boost up to ISO 25600)
  • Also supports DX lenses, viewfinder automatically masks (5.1 megapixels with DX lens)
  • 5:4 ratio crop mode (10 megapixels, up to 9 fps, viewfinder masked)
  • 14-bit A/D conversion, 12 channel readout
  • Nikon EXPEED image processor (Capture NX processing and NR algorithms, lower power)
  • Super fast operation (power-up 12 ms, shutter lag 41 ms, black-out 74 ms)
  • New Kevlar / carbon fibre composite shutter with 300,000 exposure durability
  • New Multi-CAM3500FX Auto Focus sensor (51-point, 15 cross-type, more vertical coverage)
  • Auto-focus tracking by color (using information from 1005-pixel AE sensor)
  • Auto-focus calibration (fine-tuning) now available (fixed body or up to 20 separate lens settings)
  • Scene Recognition System (uses AE sensor, AF sensor)
  • Picture Control image parameter presets (replace Color Modes I, II and III)
  • Custom image parameters now support brightness as well as contrast
  • Nine frames per second continuous with auto-focus tracking
  • Eleven frames per second continuous without auto-focus tracking
  • Ten / eleven frames per second continuous in DX-crop mode (AF / no-AF)
  • Dual Compact Flash card slots (overflow, back-up, RAW on 1 / JPEG on 2, copy)
  • Compact Flash UDMA support
  • 3.0" 922,000 pixel LCD monitor
  • Live View with either phase detect (mirror up/down) or contrast detect Auto Focus
  • Virtual horizon indicates if camera is level (like an aircraft cockpit display)
  • HDMI HD video output
  • 'Active D-Lighting' (adjusts metering as well as applying D-Lighting curve)
  • Detailed 'Control Panel' type display on LCD monitor, changes color in darkness
  • Buttons sealed against moisture
  • Dual battery charger as standard
  • Available November 2007

Technology under the skin

FX format sensor (Nikon design) Sensor mounted on its module

Main board with EXPEED processor EXPEED processor

51-point Multi-CAM 3500FX AF sensor unit Viewfinder pentaprism

1005-pixel metering sensor Shutter

Nikon D3 specifications

Price (body only) • US: $ 4999
• UK: £ 3399
• EU: € 5180
Body material Magnesium alloy
Sensor • 36 x 23.9 mm CMOS sensor
• FX format
• RGB Color Filter Array
• Built-in fixed low-pass filter
• 12.9 million total pixels
• 12.1 million effective pixels
• 3:2 aspect ratio
Image processor Nikon EXPEED
A/D conversion 14 bit
Image sizes
(FX format)
• 4256 x 2832 [L; 12.1 MP]
• 3184 x 2120 [M; 6.8 MP]
• 2128 x 1416 [S; 3.0 MP]
Image sizes
(DX format)
• 2784 x 1848 [L; 5.1 MP]
• 2080 x 1384 [M; 2.9 MP]
• 1392 x 920 [S; 1.3 MP]]
Image sizes
(5:4 format)
• 3552 x 2832 [L; 10.0 MP]
• 2656 x 2120 [M; 5.6 MP]
• 1776 x 1416 [S; 2.5 MP]
File formats • NEF (12-bit or 14-bit, compressed or lossless compressed RAW)
• NEF + JPEG
• TIFF
• JPEG (EXIF 2.21)
NEF compression • Compressed 12/14-bit NEF (RAW, Lossless compressed): approx. 60-80%
• Compressed 12/14-bit NEF (RAW, Compressed): approx. 45-60%
Lens mount • Nikon F mount with AF coupling and AF contacts
• No field of view crop (full-frame)
• When using DX lenses / DX mode 1.5x FOV crop
Usable lenses

• Type G or D AF NIKKOR: All functions supported
• DX AF NIKKOR: All functions supported except FX-format (36x24)/5:4 (30x24) image size
• AF NIKKOR other than type G or D: All functions supported except 3D Color Matrix Metering II
• AI-P NIKKOR: All functions supported except autofocus and 3D Color Matrix Metering II
• Non-CPU AI NIKKOR: Can be used in exposure modes A and M; electronic rangefinder can be used if maximum aperture is f/5.6 or faster; Color Matrix Metering and aperture value display supported if user provides lens data
* IX NIKKOR lenses cannot be used
* Excluding lenses for F3AF

Auto Focus • 51 focus points (15 cross-type sensors)
• Multi-CAM 3500FX
• AF working range: -1 to +19 EV (ISO 100, normal temperature)
• Contrast Detect in Live View (Tripod) mode
Lens Servo • Single Servo AF [S]
• Continuous Servo AF [C]
• Manual focus [M]
• Focus Tracking automatically activated by subject's status in [S] or [C] AF
Focus Point • Single point from 51 or 11 focus points
• Liveview (Tripod mode): Contrast AF on a desired point anywhere within frame
AF Area Mode

• Single point AF
• Dynamic Area AF [9 points, 21 points, 51 points, 51 points (3D-tracking)]
• Automatic-area AF

Focus Lock

Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button halfway (single-servo AF) or by pressing AE-L/AF-L button

AF assist External Speedlite only
Exposure modes • Program Auto [P] with flexible program
• Shutter-Priority Auto [S]
• Aperture-Priority Auto [A]
• Manual [M]
Metering

TTL full-aperture exposure metering using 1005-pixel RGB sensor
• 3D Color Matrix Metering II (type G and D lenses); color matrix metering II (other CPU lenses); color matrix metering (non-CPU lenses if user provides lens data; metering performed)
• Center-weighted: Weight of 75% given to 8, 15, or 20 mm dia. circle in center of frame or weighting based on average of entire frame (default 12 mm)
• Spot: Meters approx. 4 mm dia. circle (about 1.5% of frame) centered on selected focus point (on center focus point when non-CPU lens is used)

Metering range • 3D Color Matrix Metering: 0 to 20 EV
• Center-Weighted Metering: 0 to 20 EV
• Spot Metering: 2 to 20 EV
• At normal temperature (20°C/68°F), ISO 100 equivalent, f/1.4 lens
Meter coupling CPU and AI
Exposure lock Locked using AE-L/AF-L button
Exposure bracketing

• 2 to 9 frames
• 1/3, 1/2, 2/3 or 1 EV steps

Exposure compen. • +/-5.0 EV
• 1/3, 1/2 or 1 EV steps
Sensitivity

• Default: ISO 200 - 6400 in 1/3, 1/2 or 1.0 EV steps
• Boost: 100 - 12800 in 1/3, 1/2 or 1.0 EV steps, HI2 = ISO 25600

Shutter • Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal plane shutter
• 30 to 1/8000 sec (1/3, 1/2 or 1.0 EV steps)
• Flash X-Sync: 1/250 sec
• Bulb
DOF Preview • Stop-down lens aperture by pressing button
• Activates modelling flash
White balance • Auto (1005-pixel CCD, image sensor)
• Presets (seven) with fine tuning
• Manual presets (four)
• Color temperature in Kelvin (2500 - 10000 K, 31 steps)
• White balance bracketing (2 to 9 frames, 10,20,30 MIRED steps)
Picture Control • Standard
• Neutral
• Vivid
• Monochrome
Image parameters • Sharpening: Auto, 7 levels
• Contrast: Auto, 5 levels, Custom tone curve
• Brightness: 3 levels
• Saturation: Auto, 5 levels
• Hue: 5 levels
Color space • sRGB (Standard and Vivid modes)
• Adobe RGB (Neutral mode)
Viewfinder • Optical-type fixed eye-level pentaprism
• Built-in diopter adjustment (-3 to +1m-1)
• Eyepoint: 18 mm (at -1.0m-1)
• Focusing screen: Type B BriteView Clear Matte VI screen
• Frame coverage 100%
• Viewfinder magnification approx 0.7x with 50 mm f/1.4 lens
Focusing screen • B-type BrightView Clear Matte Screen II
• Superimposed focus brackets
• On-demand grid lines
LCD monitor • 3.0 " TFT LCD
• 922,000 pixels (VGA; 640 x 480 x 3 colors)
• 170° viewing angle
• Brightness adjustment
LCD Liveview

• Handheld mode: TLL phase-difference AF with 51 focus areas (15 cross-type sensors)
• Tripod mode: focal-plane contrast AF on a desired point within a specific area

Shooting modes • Single frame
• Continuous Low [CL]: 1 - 9 fps
• Continuous High [CH]: 9 fps (9 - 11 fps with DX format)
• Liveview [LV]
• Self-Timer (programmable)
• Mirror-up mode
Continuous buffer • JPEG Large/Normal: 64 shots (at 9 fps)
• RAW: no data yet
Self-timer • 2 to 20 sec custom
Flash control

•TTL flash control with 1,005-pixel RGB sensor; i-TTL balanced fill-flash and standard i-TTL fill-flash available with SB-800, 600 or 400
• AA (Auto Aperture-type) flash: Available with SB-800 used with CPU lens
• Non-TTL Auto: Available with Speedlights such as SB-800, 28, 27, and 22S
• Range-priority manual flash; available with SB-800

Flash Sync Mode • Front-curtain Sync (normal)
• Red-Eye Reduction
• Red-Eye Reduction with Slow Sync
• Slow Sync
• Rear-curtain Sync
Flash Accessory Shoe

ISO 518 standard-type hot shoe contact; Safety lock mechanism provided

Flash Sync Terminal ISO 519 standard terminal, lock screw provided
Flash compensation • -3 to +1 EV
• 1/3, 1/2 or 1 EV steps
Creative Lighting System

With Speedlights such as SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, SB-R200, supports Advanced Wireless Lighting, Auto FP High-Speed Sync, Flash Color Information Communication, modeling flash and FV lock

Orientation sensor Tags images with camera orientation
Playback mode • Full frame
• Thumbnail (4 or 9 images)
• One-touch zoom
• Slideshow
• RGB histogram
• Shooting data
• Highlight point
• Auto image rotation
Languages

• Chinese (Simplified and Traditional)
• Dutch
• English
• Finnish
• French
• German
• Italian
• Japanese
• Korean
• Polish
• Portuguese
• Russian
• Spanish
• Swedish

Custom functions 48 custom functions
Connectivity

• USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed) Mini-B connector
• HDMI video out (version 1.3a, Type A connector)
• Remote control 10-pin terminal
• PC Sync flash terminal

10-pin terminal

• GPS: NMEA 0183 (Ver. 2.01 and 3.01) interface standard supported with 9-pin D-sub cable and GPS Cable MC-35 (optional)
• Remote control: via 10-pin terminal

Communications FTP and PTP/IP file transfer with optional Wireless Transmitter WT-3 (IEEE 802.11 b/g)
Storage • Dual Compact Flash Type I or II
• UDMA, Microdrive and FAT32 supported
• 36 characters of text can be input and stored in EXIF header
Power • Lithium-Ion EN-EL4a/EL4
• Included dual battery charger MH-22
• Optional AC adapter EH-6
Battery monitoring The LCD monitor on the camera back displays the following information
about the EN-EL3e battery:
• Remaining charge (%)
• No. of shots taken since last charge
• Battery life (5 stages)
Dimensions 160 x 157 x 88 mm (6.3 x 6.2 x 3.4 in)
Weight (no batt) 1240 g (2.7 lb)
Operating environment

Temperature: 0 - 40 °C / 32 - 104 °F, Humidity: under 85% (no condensation)

Box contents

Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL4a, Quick Charger MH-22, USB Cable UC-E4, Audio Video Cable EG-D2, Camera Strap AN-D3, Body Cap BF-1A, Accessory Shoe Cap BS-2, Eyepiece DK-17, Battery Chamber Cover BL-4, USB Cable Clip, Software Suite CD-ROM

Optional accessories

Wireless Transmitter WT-4, Magnifying Eyepiece DK-17M, AC Adapter EH-6, Capture NX Software, Camera Control Pro 2 Software, Image Authentication Software

Body & Design

The D3 marks a whole new model series for Nikon but as we would expect the changes are subtle and evolutionary rather than a revolutionary switch. Photographers familiar with the D2 series will feel immediately at home with the D3, button layout is almost identical and the control changes made are sensible improvements rather than completely new concepts. The D3's proportions make it almost square and thanks to a magnesium shell it is literally as solid as a brick. Robust surfaces, soft rubber on the grips, oversized buttons, locked controls and environmental seals add up to a purposeful camera which has been designed with the requirements of the professional photographer in any situation.

Side by side

Below we have the D3 beside the recently announced Canon EOS-1Ds Mark III (21 megapixel), although aimed at different markets both of these cameras feature professional bodies with integral vertical grips and full-frame (36 x 24 mm) sensors. That said there is a huge $3000 price differential between them and so the D3 is more likely to be compared to the ten megapixel EOS-1D Mark III which has a 1.3x crop (29 x 19 mm) sensor. The EOS-1D Mark III and EOS-1Ds Mark III have virtually identical bodies.

In your hand

As you may expect the D3 feels comfortable and sturdy in your hand, the grip is just the right size, depth and shape to be both comfortable and easy to hold. Careful shaping of the rear and the use of soft rubber add to the overall feeling of solidity, buttons and other controls are positioned to be used easily. I said in my D2X review that I felt Nikon had the edge over the Canon EOS-1D series for 'real world ergonomics', that remains true with the D3.

LCD Monitor

One of the more significant external changes with the D3 (and the D300) is a new large, high resolution LCD monitor. It has four times the number of dots than the 230,000 unit used on the D2X and other such cameras. For clarity, the words pixels and dots are interchanged almost randomly in specification sheets but strictly speaking we should talk of dots (these being red, green or blue sub-pixels) when referring to the figures quoted by manufacturers. The D3's LCD has 921,600 dots, 1920 columns by 480 rows, the dots are a third thinner than they are high and so each group of three dots (sub-pixels) make up one full color pixel.

This high resolution screen really has to be seen to be appreciated, it's beautifully detailed and extremely smooth in appearance because the tiny gaps between dots are too small to be seen with the eye. This extra detail is obvious in Live view and playback modes where you really can see much 'more' of the image in one glance. Another difference comes when you magnify in playback as you find you don't need to magnify the image as much before you can clearly see sharpness, focus accuracy and even noise.

One other difference between the D3/D300's screen and that used previously is the layout of the dots (sub-pixels), this new screen has the same layout as your computer LCD, a simple RGB layout with all rows the same ('stripe array'). The other layout used on small LCD screens is the 'delta array' which uses an RGB pattern on one row then a BRG pattern on the row below, offset by half a pixel.

Stripe array layout LCD Delta array layout LCD

Below you can see a real-life, same-size example of the difference in resolution between this new 921,600 dot screen (on the D300, but it's the same as the D3) and a more typical 230,400 dot screen (in this case on the Canon EOS 40D). Both cameras were set in play mode with the same image (note that the D300 doesn't use the whole screen in play unless you magnify), a shot was taken of each camera from the same distance (hence the screens were captured at the same magnification).

Crop from the D300's LCD
(1920 x 480 dots; 640 x 480 pixels)
Crop from the EOS 40D's LCD
(960 x 240 dots; 320 x 240 pixels)

Top & Rear Control Panels

Just like the D2 series the D3 has two status / control panel displays, one on the top of the camera and one on the rear. Both panels have a green back light which can be illuminated by flicking the power switch to the lamp position, it's spring loaded and returns to 'ON', the back light stays on for the 'auto meter-off' time (CSM c2). You can also choose to have the backlights come on with any button press (CSM d7). You can customize the information displayed on the rear control panel and viewfinder display via CSM d5. Each panel is shown below along with a diagram of all information displayed.

Top Control Panel

*1 • Shutter-speed
• Exposure compensation value
• Number of shots in bracketing sequence
• Number of intervals
• Focal length (non-CPU lens)
• Flash compensation value
• ISO sensitivity
*4

• Frame count
• Preset white balance recording
• Manual lens number

*2 • Aperture (f-number)
• Aperture (number of stops)
• Bracketing increment
• Number of shots per interval
• Maximum aperture (non-CPU lens)
• PC mode indicator

*5

• Electronic analog exposure display
• Exposure compensation
• Bracketing progress indicator
• PC mode indicator
• Tilt indicator
*3 • Number of exposures remaining
• Number of shots remaining before buffer fills
• Camera control indicator
*6 • Remaining indicator
• Continuous remaining indicator

Rear Control Panel

*1 • ISO sensitivity
• Number of exposures remaining
• Length of voice memo
• White balance fine-tuning
• White balance preset number
• Color temperature
• PC mod indicator
   

Diagram reproduced with permission from the Nikon D3 user manual.


Viewfinder

The D3 sticks with the same circular eyepiece as the D2X but from there onwards everything has changed, obviously we now have a 'huge' full frame view which really does fill your entire field of vision, the focusing screen is bright but is still matte enough to enable accurate manual focusing.

The focusing screen also features automatic masking if you attach a DX format lens, a portion of the view is half blacked-out indicating the active sensor area. Optionally you can also manually select the shooting format (FX: 36 x 24 mm, DX: 24 x 16 mm or 5:4: 30 x 24 mm). The diagram below (used with permission from the D3 user manual) demonstrates the different image sizes (FX / DX and 5:4 formats), their image circles and the masked areas of the viewfinder focusing screen.

The D3 features a new 51 point auto focus sensor, the center fifteen (3x5 grid) being cross point sensors even with F5.6 aperture lenses. There are two AF point selection modes (CSM a8), you can opt to be able to select from all 51 points or 11 points in a similar layout as the D2X. (Note that the D3's larger sensor area means that the AF points don't have as much frame coverage as on the D300 and also that the 11 point layout is slightly different).

51 point AF selection mode 11 point AF selection mode

The image below isn't designed to be representative of a typical view through the viewfinder but instead shows the position of all possible information including all 51 AF points. Nikon has made it clear that they are not using etching to indicate the AF points but that all information is displayed using liquid crystal, hence when an AF point is not active there is no detrimental effect on the focusing screen.

1 Center-weighted metering circle ref. 13 ISO sensitivity
2 AF area frame 14 Frame count / remaining / buffer / exp. value
3 Focus points 15 Indicates over 1000 exposures remaining
4 Focus indicator 16 Flash-ready indicator
5 Metering mode 17 Flash value lock
6 Auto exposure lock 18 Sync indicator
7 Exposure mode 19 Aperture stop indicator
8 Shutter-speed lock 20 Battery indicator
9 Shutter-speed 21 Exposure display / compen. / tilt indicator
10 Aperture lock 22 Exposure compensation indicator
11 Aperture (f-number / no. stops) 23 Bracketing indicator
12 ISO / Auto-ISO indicator    

Diagram reproduced with permission from the Nikon D3 user manual.

Battery, Compartment and Charger

The D3 uses an updated version of the EN-EL4 seen in the the D2X. This new model, the EN-EL4a packs a capacity of 2500 mAh (over the EN-EL4's 1900 mAh) at 11.1 V for a pretty huge 27.8 Wh. Just like the EN-EL4 the battery contains a memory chip which is used to track battery usage, charges and overall performance (see below images). As you can see from the third image below the battery compartment door clips onto the battery body, if you have just one battery that's where it will stay, however carrying multiple batteries is now more convenient because they have an easier to store shape (with the door unclipped).

There's also a new dual-battery quick charger, the MH-22 which provides docking style charging for up to two batteries at a time (although only one is charged at a time). A full charge takes around 2 hours 25 minutes, you can also run a full calibration of the battery which can take up to six hours.

Battery information available on the camera:

  • Top control panel has a five segment battery life indicator
  • Camera Menu: Set Up -> Battery Info provides:
    • Battery meter (as a percentage)
    • Picture meter (estimated frames on current power)
    • Calibration (required / not required)
    • Charging Life (0 to 4 indicating if the battery has come to the end of its useful life)

Compact Flash Compartment

The D3 becomes the first digital SLR to feature dual Compact Flash card slots. Both support Compact Flash Type I or II as well as FAT32 (cards over 2 GB) and UDMA (high throughput). The second slot can be set up to either (a) overflow (once card 1 is full go on to card 2), (b) backup (everything written to card 1 is also written to card 2) or (c) RAW to card 1 and JPEG to card 2.

Connections

The D3's connections are in two places, either at the front top (remote and flash PC sync) or the left side of the body (from the rear). The remote (which also allows for serial GPS) and flash PC sync terminals are now protected by a rubber cover which is itself attached to the strap eyelet. On the side are the largest group of connectors, from top to bottom; Video out (composite), HDMI (digital video out HD/SD), DC-IN and USB 2.0. The biggest story here must be HDMI output, from the camera menu you can select five different output options; Auto, 480p, 576p, 720p or 1080i. For an example and video clip of HDMI output see this page of our D300 article.

Camera Base / Tripod Mount

The bottom of the D3 is almost identical to the D2X except that the D3 no longer has a connector for the WT-1/2 wireless transmitters which are now superceded by the WT-4. The base of the camera has a soft rubber foot made from similar material as the grip. The metal tripod mount is located in line with the center of the lens and the focal plane.

Flash Hot-shoe

The D3 has a standard (ISO 518) accessory shoe which is compatible with third party flash systems for flash sync and more advanced i-TTL with the SB-800, SB-600 or SB-400. Non-TTL Auto available with the 80DX, 28DX, 28, 27, and 22s. Note that the 'flash ready' icon on the viewfinder status LCD will only light when using one of the Nikon SB series Speedlights listed above. (Note that there would normally be a cover over the accessory shoe).

Lens Mount / Sensor

Below on the left you can see the D3's lens mount with the mirror down, on the right with mirror up and shutter open (exposing the sensor). Lenses are inserted twisted clockwise and lock in place with an anticlockwise turn. This is a standard Nikon F lens mount and can use almost the complete range of Nikkor F lenses (although some features are only available with newer type G or type D lenses). The D3 supports the aperture ring found on older AI lenses. Despite being full-frame it also supports 1.5x crop DX format lenses automatically and masks the viewfinder view accordingly (see earlier in this article).

Supplied In the Box

Box contents may vary by region:

  • Nikon D3 digital SLR body & body cap
  • BS-2 accessory shoe cover
  • EN-EL4a Lithium-ion battery
  • MH-22 Quick Charger & power cable
  • UC-E4 USB cable & cable clip
  • EG-D2 A/V cable
  • AN-D3 shoulder strap
  • Software CD-ROM
  • Warranty, user manuals, quick guide, software install guide, reg. card

Top of camera controls (right)

On the top of the camera on the right side you will find the power switch, shutter release button, exposure mode and exposure compensation buttons. At the front and rear edges of this side of the camera, in line with the shutter release button are the two command dials (with a soft rubber coating). On the side of the viewfinder prism is the metering mode selector (with an integral lock button which must be held to change mode). On the rear of the camera we see the now isolated AF-ON button (the A-EL/AF-L button now slightly smaller and moved further down the body closer to the multi-selector.

CSM f7 allows you define the exact function of the command dials including their rotation, which sets aperture / shutter speed and whether they can be used in menus and playback mode. The function of controls described below are for a camera with default settings. Buttons combined with a dial turn are held while the dial is turned, however you can choose to simply have to press the button once and release, this is achieved via CSM f8.

Power dial

OFF Power Off

Powers the camera off immediately, if there are images still buffered to be written the camera will remain on until the write has completed. When off the camera continues to display the remaining frames / frame count and CF status on the top LCD panel.
ON Power On

Switches the camera on, this is as fast as we can time it, as good as instant. There is simply no perceptible delay between turning the the dial and the first shot (you can even hold the shutter release and turn the power dial to test this).
Illuminate backlight

Flick the power switch to this position to illuminate the control panels backlight's (top and rear). The backlight stays on for the 'auto meter-off' time (CSM c3).

Buttons (combined with dial turn)

  Main command dial (rear) Sub command dial (front)
MODE Exposure mode (detail below)

 • Programmed Auto (flexible)
 • Shutter-Priority Auto
 • Aperture-Priority Auto
 • Manual
No function
Exposure compensation

 • +/- 5 EV
 • 0.3, 0.5 or 1 EV steps (CSM b2)
No function

Buttons (single press)

AF-ON AF-ON

The AF-ON button is an alternative to half-pressing the shutter release, it triggers the camera's auto focus system. You can if you wish have the camera set to that AF is not triggered by a shutter release half-press (CSM a5) and only by the AF-ON button (useful for fast action photography where continuous AF tracking is required).

Metering Mode

3D Color matrix metering II / Color Matrix II / Color Matrix

3D Color matrix metering uses a 1005 pixel CCD to calculate the best exposure for the frame. 3D color matrix metering is only available with G type or D type lenses where the range information is used in conjunction with metered light. Color matrix II metering is used with other CPU lenses. Color matrix metering is used when focal length and aperture are entered manually using the 'Non-CPU lens data' menu item.
Center-weighted metering

The camera uses the entire frame for light measurement but assigns a greater weight to an area in the center of the frame (by default a 12 mm circle indicated on the viewfinder focus screen). The size of the circle used to define the "center" of the frame can be set by CSM b5.
Spot metering

The camera measures light only in a circle 4 mm in diameter. This is tied to the currently selected AF area point unless dynamic AF or a non-CPU lens is used when it defaults to the center of the frame.

Exposure Modes

P Programmed Auto (flexible)

In this mode the camera automatically selects aperture and shutter speed based on the current metered exposure value, exposure compensation and selected ISO sensitivity. Flexible program allows you to select one of a range of identical exposures (using different combinations of aperture and shutter speed) by turning the main command dial. Example:

 • 1/125 sec, F9 (turn left one click)
 • 1/160 sec, F8.0 (turn left one click)
 • 1/200 sec, F7.1 (metered)
 • 1/250 sec, F6.3 (turn right one click)
 • 1/320 sec, F5.6 (turn right one click)
S Shutter-Priority Auto

In this mode you select the shutter speed and the camera will calculate the correct aperture depending on metered exposure, exposure compensation and ISO sensitivity. Turn the main command dial to select shutter speed in the range of 30 to 1/8000 sec (in 0.3, 0.5 or 1.0 EV exposure steps depending on CSM b3).
A Aperture-Priority Auto

In this mode you select the aperture and the camera will calculate the correct shutter speed depending on metered exposure, exposure compensation and ISO sensitivity. Turn the sub command dial to select aperture (in 0.3, 0.5 or 1.0 EV exposure steps depending on CSM b3). The exact range of apertures will depend on the lens used.
M

Manual Exposure

In this mode you define the exact exposure by selecting the aperture and the shutter speed manually. As above use the main command dial (rear) for shutter speed, sub command dial (front) for aperture. The meter on the viewfinder status bar and top LCD will immediately reflect the exposure level compared to the calculated ideal exposure, if outside of the range of the indicator bar (+/- 2 EV on the viewfinder LCD and +/- 3 EV on the top control panel) an arrow ('<' or '>') will appear at the end.

Top of camera controls (left)

The top left side of the camera has the mode dial which allows you to select the camera's drive mode, single, two continuous speeds, live view, self-timer or mirror up. This dial is locked from accidental change and can only be turned by holding the lock release pin to the top left of the dial. On the top of this dial are three buttons for bracketing, flash mode and function lock.

Mode Dial

S Single frame shooting

One frame is taken with one depression of the shutter release button. You can of course still 'pump' shots as quickly as you can re-press the shutter release. The D3's shutter release button is the soft-press type which easily facilitates quick re-press.
CL

Continuous low speed shooting

Camera shoots continuously while the shutter release is depressed. In this mode the shooting rate can be set between 1 and 9 frames per second (via CSM d2), the default being 5 frames per second. Images are buffered as they are taken and written out to the Compact Flash card in the background. Current buffer space is indicated on the viewfinder LCD status bar as a number prefixed with a lower case 'r' (eg. r39).

CH

Continuous high speed shooting

Camera shoots continuously while the shutter release is depressed. In this mode the camera shoots at 9 frames per second in FX (full frame format; 12.1 MP) or up to 11 frames per second (via CSM d2) in DX (1.5x cropped format; 5.1 MP). Images are buffered as they are taken and written out to the Compact Flash card in the background. Current buffer space is indicated on the viewfinder LCD status bar as a number prefixed with a lower case 'r' (eg. r39).

LV

Live view

Puts the camera in live view shooting mode. In this mode you activate through-the-lens live view on the LCD monitor by first pressing the shutter release button (it's a bit counter-intuitive) the mirror will raise (blanking the viewfinder) and the LCD will activate.To focus either use manual focus (press the magnify buttons to provide a larger magnified view) or press the AF-ON button to use contrast detect AF (slow but maintains live view) or phase detect AF (quicker but requires the mirror to drop first). The camera does not return to live view after a shutter release, you have to press the shutter release button once more.

Self-timer

Camera takes a shot after a predefined delay. This can be set to 2, 5, 10, or 20 seconds via CSM c3.
M-UP

Mirror Up

Press the shutter release once to raise the mirror, again to take the shot. As I commented in my D2X review it would have been nice to have this combined with a self-timer so you don't need to touch the camera (or use a remote) to trigger the actual shutter release. (CSM d8; exposure delay mode; offers something similar but the delay is not long enough).

Buttons (combined with a command dial)

The D3 has four different bracketing modes; exposure and flash bracketing, just exposure bracketing, just flash bracketing and white balance bracketing. Bracketing mode can be selected through CSM e4, other bracketing settings are set by CSM e5 and CSM e6.

  Main command dial (rear) Sub command dial (front)
BKT Auto Bracketing number shots

 • +3F (+2x, +x, 0)
 • -3F (-2x, -x, 0)
 • +2F (+x, 0)
 • -2F (-x, 0)
 • 0F (Off)
 • 3F (3 frames +x to -x)
 • 5F (5 frames +2x to +2x)
 • 7F (7 frames +3x to +3x)
 • 9F (9 frames +4x to +4x)

(Where x = bracketing increment)
Auto Bracketing EV increment

 • 0.3 EV
 • 0.7 EV
 • 1.0 EV
Auto Bracketing WB increment

 • 1
 • 2
 • 3
Flash sync mode

 • Front-curtain sync (normal)
 • Slow sync
 • Rear-curtain sync
 • Red-eye reduction
 • Red-eye reduction with slow sync
No function
Shutter speed lock

 • On
 • Off

(Only available in shutter-priority or manual exposure modes)
Aperture lock

 • On
 • Off

(Only available in aperture-priority or manual exposure modes)

Rear of camera controls

The rear of the D3 has been subtly redesigned compared to the D2X, however importantly Nikon hasn't messed too much with the control layout. Button layout is identical apart from: the shifted AE-L/AF-L button, a new separate 'SET' button in the center of the multi-selector, ENTER renamed to OK and switched vertical grip AF-ON and command dials. Buttons are large and easy to locate, learned quickly and logical.

Buttons (single press)

Playback

Enters or leaves playback mode, display mode used depends on the last used (left / right press of the multi selector) or thumbnail display mode. As with all shooting priority cameras the D3 immediately removes the playback display if you half-press the shutter release button although interestingly you can trigger AF (press AF-ON) without clearing the screen).
Delete *p

In playback or record review, pressing this button displays a 'Delete?' confirmation dialog, press again to confirm deletion. Nikon's now de-facto 'double press delete' feature is very easy to use and understand and much faster than other delete implementations (why can't all cameras be this simple?). If you have a voice memo attached to the image the delete? confirmation dialog allows you to select between just deleting the sound or both the image and sound.
Format (Delete + Mode)

Hold the Delete and Mode (top right of camera) buttons simultaneously for approximately two seconds for a shortcut to format the Compact Flash card, the camera first blinks 'For' on the top display and you must release the buttons and press once more to confirm the card format.
AE-L
AF-L
AE / AF Lock

Pressing this button locks the current exposure and focus, in its default mode both AE and AF remain locked as long as you hold the button. CSM f6 allows you to change the function of this button with a range of AE / AF hold / lock options as well as other camera functions (such as metering, bracketing etc.)
MENU Menu

Display or cancel the camera menu, as with playback mode the menu is automatically cancelled if you half-press the shutter release button.

Playback zoom / thumbnail index *p Live view zoom

In playback mode with a single image displayed press and turn the command dial to the right to zoom into (magnify) the image or to the left to zoom out or switch to thumbnail index display (first four images then nine images). The same zoom function is available in Live View mode.

Protect / Info / Menu Help *p

In playback mode press to toggle the 'read only' flag on the displayed / selected image. This button can be used in both playback and record review modes. In shooting mode press this button to toggle the shooting information display on the LCD monitor. In menu mode (with a menu option selected) you can press and hold this button to display a page of help about the currently highlighted function, this is especially useful for the custom functions.

OK OK *p

The OK button is used to confirm menu selections and dialog options.
Multi selector

With no image displayed on the screen the multi selector is used to choose AF area, note that this function can be locked by turning the lock lever which surrounds the multi selector (this doesn't affect function in playback or menu mode). The multi selector is also used to change playback display modes (left / right), browse images in playback (up / down) and navigate menus / select dialog options. Various options are available for customizing this control: CSM f1, CSM f2 and CSM f3.

*p - In record review or playback mode

Auto Focus Area Mode selector

Note that the exact function of the AF area mode also depends on the focus mode (AF-S or AF-C), a full summary of all combinations of focus mode and AF area mode can be found at the bottom of this page.

Auto-area AF

The camera uses all focus areas and automatically selects the correct focus points. From the user manual: "If type G or D lens is used, camera can distinguish human subjects
from background for improved subject detection."
Dynamic-area AF

Allows you to manually select one of the fifty-one focus points, however the camera will use information from multiple focus areas to determine focus. Useful for focusing on specific subjects which may move out of the focus area briefly. CSM a3 allows you to choose between 9 points, 21 points, 51 points or 51 points with 3D tracking.
Single-area AF

Allows you to manually select one of the fifty-one focus areas, the camera will only use this area for auto focus.

Front of camera controls

On the left side of the camera front are two buttons, both of these buttons can be customized to perform a range of functions via CSM f4 and f5. By default the top button is is depth of field preview, press and hold this button to stop the lens down to the selected aperture, the button button performs flash value lock. On the right side of the camera front is the focus mode dial and above this the flash mode / compensation button.

Focus Mode selector

S Single servo AF (AF-S)

Camera focus when shutter release button is half pressed and locks when the in-focus indicator (a solid dot) appears on the viewfinder status LCD. If the subject is moving when the shutter release button is half pressed the camera will focus track until a lock can be obtained. In this mode the default is for focus priority, this means that a shot can only be taken with a good focus lock, you can also choose release priority via CSM a2.
C Continuous servo AF (AF-C)

The camera will focus continuously while the shutter release button is half pressed, if the subject moves the camera will adjust focus to compensate. In this mode the default is for release priority, this means that a shot will be taken whether or not the camera has a good focus lock, you can also choose focus priority via CSM a1.
M Manual Focus

Focusing is achieved manually by turning the lens manual focus ring. Focus indicator on the viewfinder status LCD will still indicate whether or not the selected manual focus is the same as the calculated auto focus. This mode is always release priority.

Displays

The D3's new high resolution VGA screen (shared with the D300) really is a revelation, having a very fine pixel pitch means you don't see any gaps and that makes for both very detailed but also surprisingly smooth gradations in flat areas of the image. Record review and playback are certainly improved as a result of this new screen and one bonus we hadn't considered before we'd used it is that you tend not to zoom into images quite as far in playback in order to check sharpness / focus accuracy.

Shooting information

Press the info button in shooting mode (except live view) to show a full screen 'shooting information' display, we first saw a screen like this implemented in the D40 and there are certainly circumstances where having this level of information on one single screen can be very useful. The D3's shooting information screen automatically (or optionally manually) switches from light background to dark background in low light situations. My only gripe with this feature (same as the D300 implementation) was that the information display disappears as soon as you half-press the shutter release button and does not return, you have to press info again, it would have been nice to have a 'persistent shooting information' custom function.

Light screen background Dark screen background (low light)

Virtual horizon

One clever new feature on the D3 is the Virtual horizon, it provides an aircraft-cockpit type live virtual horizon on the LCD monitor indicating the current orientation of the camera, perfectly horizontal or vertical and the camera axis line turns green (shown on the right below). My gripe with this feature is that its implementation makes it more toy-like than really useful, by default it is viewed via an option from the Setup menu (although can be assigned to a button) and disappears as soon as you half-press the shutter release. Far better I think if it were an opton integrated into the shooting information display (above).

Record Review

You can choose for the D3 to display a review of the image taken immediately after shutter release. The type of display used will be the same as the last mode used in playback (histogram, thumbnail index, details etc.). Note that record review has all of the functionality of playback mode, this means its easy to delete, magnify, protect etc. The image will remain on the screen for the 'Monitor off delay' CSM c4 or until you half-press the shutter release.

Playback

Press the Playback button to enter playback mode, press the multi selector up or down to change display mode, up to six different pages of display detail are available. You can change the amount of information available in the basic and detailed photo display modes including optional blinking highlights and focus point display as well as the three pages of shooting information in detail mode. Note that you can switch the up/down and left/right functions of the multi selector via CSM f3 and that you can choose to also use the command dials to browse / change page via CSM f7.

Basic photo display: file number, folder, filename, date & time, quality, size

Basic photo display with optional Highlights and Focus point enabled

Detailed photo display: image thumbnail, histogram, exposure information and other data as per default display

Detailed photo display optional RGB histogram page
Detailed photo display data 1: metering mode, shutter speed, aperture, exposure mode, ISO, exposure compensation, focal length, lens used, AF mode, VR mode, flash mode and flash compensation Detailed photo display data 2: white balance & fine tuning, color space, picture control and image parameter adjustments
 
Detailed photo display data 3: noise reduction, active d-lighting, retouching, comment  

Playback Zoom

The D3's playback zoom is implemented in the same manner as the D2X (and D200), that you use the zoom / thumbnail button in combination with the rear command dial to select zoom amount (indicated by the yellow loupe box) and can use the multi-selector to move around the magnified image. Just like the D300 there are eight zoom levels, on the high resolution screen the last two go beyond 1:1 and provide an enlarged pixelated view.

Playback thumbnail views

The D3 has two levels of thumbnail view, hold the zoom / thumbnail button and turn it to the left to switch to the initial 2x2 (4 image) view, turn once more for the 3x3 (9 image) view. Use the multi selector to move around the index. Note that if you have the 'Rotate Tall' option enabled images taken in the portrait orientation are displayed vertically (we had this option turned off in the captures below).

One click right for a 2 x 2 thumbnail view Two clicks right for a 3 x 3 thumbnail view

Other Playback displays

After pressing the delete button simply press once more to confirm the deletion An example of a protected image

Live view

Nikon's live view implementation on the D3 (and the D300) is one of the most usable and comprehensive to date, the high resolution screen and addition of contrast detect auto focus, in addition to the now typical mirror down / mirror up passive auto focus system, mean that are more situations where live view becomes useful.

Live view (auto focus) mode

As noted the D3 supports two AF methods which Nikon call Tripod and Hand-held modes, both require you to use the AF-ON button to achieve auto focus. In Tripod mode auto-focus is achieved using the main image sensor in a "contrast detect" manner (the same as a compact camera), this tends to be slower than normal passive AF but does maintain the live view. In Tripod mode you can move the AF point anywhere within the frame using the multi-selector. In Hand-held mode the live view blanks out when you press AF-ON, the mirror drops and the camera focuses using the normal "passive" auto-focus sensor. Live view only returns when you release the AF-ON button, I personally found this a bit annoying, it should return as soon as the camera achieves AF lock.

Live view in Tripod mode Live view in Hand-held mode

Live view display modes

Press the info button to remove any overlaid information, you can also optionally enable grid lines which are in the same position as the grid lines shown on the viewfinder focusing screen.

Default live view display Live view without information
 
Live view with grid lines and information  

Live view magnification

Just as in playback mode you can magnify live view by holding the zoom / thumbnails button and turning the rear command dial to the right. While magnified you can use the multi-selector to move around the live image. The D3 appears to be able to go all the way to 1:1 magnification (one pixel on the sensor for one pixel on the LCD) which makes it easy to achieve absolutely perfect focus.

Live view auto focus

The following video clips shows live view in use to auto-focus, magnify live view, take an exposure and finally magnify the image in record review. The first clip shows contrast detect auto-focus (slower but keeps live view) and the second passive detect (faster but live view disappears and you must release the AF-ON button once focus has locked).

Contrast detect (tripod mode)

Passive detect (hand-held mode)

HDMI output / High Definition display

Announced just a few days before the Sony DSLR-A700 the Nikon D3 and D300 were officially the first digital cameras with HDMI digital high definition video output. From the setup menu you can select between Auto, 480p, 576p, 720p or 1080i output, in this section we are only going to examine the 720p and 1080i options. HDMI output works in any mode which would otherwise use the LCD monitor; shooting information, menus, live view and playback. It has to be said that using live view over HDMI to a HD LCD or Plasma screen really is an amazing experience and could be extremely useful in studio photography situations. Below we have provided captures of HDMI output in both 720p (1280 x 720) and 1080i (1920 x 1080) resolutions just to give you a sense of the amount of detail visible. My only disappointment would be that there didn't seem to be a way to display the image without any shooting information (except when magnifying), this means that the default display (top image below) is only using 74% of screen width (theoretically, given aspect ratio differences this could be 84% without the status lines at the bottom).

Normal playback via HDMI (1080i; 335 KB)
Zoomed playback via HDMI (1080i; 247 KB)

Menus

The D3's menu system of the same design as the D300, an evolution of a newer cleaner design first seen on the D200. Because of the larger and higher resolution LCD on the D3 (and D300) Nikon has chosen to use a slightly smaller font size which allows each menu page to show eight options (the same as the D2X). Navigation remains the same, the multi-way controller and Enter button. You can also configure the command dials to provide menu navigation.

Shooting / CSM menu banks

When working in the Shooting or CSM menus you are in actual fact changing the settings of a 'menu bank'. There are four banks for each of the Shooting and Custom function menus; A to D, each bank can be given a more meaningful label and the currently selected bank letter is indicated on the top control panel for quick reference. This is very useful for quickly switching between a type of shot or situation.

Help pages

The D3 has the same help feature we first saw on the D2X, a setting with available help is indicated by a circular question mark icon (?) at the bottom left of the screen. Press and hold the protect button to display a context sensitive help page.

Playback menu

Option Values / Actions Notes
Delete  • Selected
 • All

- Thumbnail selection

Playback folder  • NC_D3
 • All
 • Current
 
Hide image  • Select / set
 • Deselect all?
- Thumbnail selection
Display mode  • Basic photo info
Highlights
Focus point
 • Detailed photo info
RGB Histogram
Data
Allows you to toggle different items of information shown in either basic or detailed photo display modes.
Copy image(s)  • Select image(s)
100NC_D3
Deselect all
Select all images
Select protected images
 • Select destintation folder
Select folder by number
Select folder from list
 • Copy image(s)?
Yes
No
 
Image review  • Off
 • On
 
After delete  • Show next
 • Show previous
 • Continue as before
 
Rotate tall  • On
 • Off
When enabled portrait shots appear vertically orientated.
Slide show  • Start
 • Frame interval
2 sec
3 sec
5 sec
10 sec
 • Audio playback
On
Frame interval
Length of voice memo
Off
 
Print set (DPOF)  • Select / set
 • Deselect all?
- Thumbnail selection

Shooting menu

A green superscript one (¹) indicates the default setting.

Option Values / Actions Notes / Sub options
Shooting menu bank  • A ¹
 • B
 • C
 • D
 • Rename
Text entry

Four banks of settings can be memorized and quickly switched, each bank can be labeled (see above).

Reset shooting menu  • Yes
 • No
 
Active folder  • New folder number
 • Select folder
- Create new folder.
File naming  • File naming
Text entry
Change name prefix (default DSC).
Slot 2  • Overflow ¹
 • Backup
 • RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2
 
Image quality  • NEF (RAW) + JPEG Fine
 • NEF (RAW) + JPEG Normal
 • NEF (RAW) + JPEG Basic
 • NEF (RAW)
 • TIFF (RGB)
 • JPEG Fine
 • JPEG Normal ¹
 • JPEG Basic
Select image quality.
Image size  • Large ¹
 • Medium
 • Small
- 4256 x 2832 / 12.1 M
- 3184 x 2120 / 6.8 M
- 2128 x 1416 / 3.0 M
Image area  • Auto DX crop
On ¹
Off
 • Choose image area
FX format (36x24) ¹
DX format (24x16)
5:4 (30x24)
 
JPEG compression  • Size priority ¹
 • Optimal quality
NEF (RAW) recording  • Type
Lossless compressed ¹
Compressed
Uncompressed
 • NEF (RAW) bit depth
12-bit ¹
14-bit
Set the type of compression used in the NEF file as well as the bit-depth recorded. Note that 14-bit NEF files are about 1.3 times larger than 12-bit NEF.
White balance  • Auto ¹
 • Incandescent
 • Fluorescent
 • Direct Sunlight
 • Flash
 • Cloudy
 • Shade
 • Choose color temp.
 • Preset manual
- A-B, G-M grid to fine tune WB
- "
- "
- "
- "
- "
- "
- 2500 K - 10000 K
- Select / program preset WB
Set Picture Control  • Standard
Quick adjust (-2 to +2)
Sharpening (A, 0 to 9)
Contrast (A, -3 to +3)
Brightness (-1 to +1)
Saturation (A, -3 to +3)
Hue (-3 to +3)
 • Neutral
Quick adjust (-2 to +2)
Sharpening (A, 0 to 9)
Contrast (A, -3 to +3)
Brightness (-1 to +1)
Saturation (A, -3 to +3)
Hue (-3 to +3)
 • Vivid
Quick adjust (-2 to +2)
Sharpening (A, 0 to 9)
Contrast (A, -3 to +3)
Brightness (-1 to +1)
Saturation (A, -3 to +3)
Hue (-3 to +3)
 • Monochrome
Sharpening (A, 0 to 9)
Contrast (A, -3 to +3)
Brightness (-1 to +1)
Filter (Off, Y, O, R, G)
Toning (10 options)
 • [custom]
- Default (3, 0, 0, 0, 0)






- Default (2, 0, 0, 0, 0)






- Default (4, 0, 0, 0, 0)






- Default (3, 0, 0, 0, 0)
Manage Picture Control  • Save/edit
 • Rename
 • Delete
 • Load/save

- Create custom Picture Control sets


- Load / save from card

Color Space  • sRGB ¹
 • Adobe RGB
 
Active D-Lighting  • High
 • Normal
 • Low
 • Off ¹
 
Long exp. NR  • On
 • Off ¹
Enables dark frame subtraction NR for exposures of 1/2 sec or longer.
High ISO NR  • High
 • Normal
 • Low
 • Off ¹
 
ISO sensitivity settings  • ISO
LO 1
LO 0.7
LO 0.3
200 ¹
250
320
400
500
640
800
1000
1250
1600
2000
2500
3200
4000
5000
6400
HI 0.3
HI 0.7
HI 1
HI 2
 • ISO sensitivity auto control
On / Off ¹
Maximum sensitivity
400
800
1600
3200
6400 ¹
HI 1
HI 2
Minimum shutter speed
1/250 - 1 sec

Available sensitivities depend on ISO step custom setting (CSM b2).

Full range: LO 1 = ISO 100 to HI 2 = ISO 25600.

Live view  • Live view mode
Hand-held
Tripod
 • Release mode
Single frame
Continuous low-speed
Continuous high-speed

- Phase detect AF
- Contrast detect AF
Multiple exposure  • Done
 • Number of shots
2 - 10
 • Auto gain
On
Off
Create a new image from between two and ten exposures.
Interval timer shooting  • Start
Now
Start time
 • Interval
[hh:mm:ss]
 • Select Intvl*Shots
[000] x [0] = 0001
 • Start
Off
On
Time lapse / interval shooting.


Menus (contd.)

The cameras custom settings are split into six alphabetical color coded categories, this makes it easier to remember a specific option and quicker to enter the custom settings menu at the correct position. You can still scroll through all custom settings options as one big menu if you wish. Note that on this menu an asterisk (*) next to a custom setting means that it has been changed to something other than the camera default. A green superscript one (¹) indicates the default setting.

Custom Settings Menu (a: Autofocus)

Option Values / Actions Notes
a1 AF-C priority selection  • Release ¹
 • Release + focus
 • Focus

Defines if camera must have focus lock before shutter release.

a2 AF-S priority selection  • Release
 • Focus ¹
Defines if focus lock is required before shutter release.
a3 Dynamic AF area  • 9 points ¹
 • 21 points
 • 51 points
 • 51 points (3D-tracking)
 
a4 Focus tracking with lock-on  • Long
 • Normal ¹
 • Short
 • Off

Controls how focusing is affected by subject distance changing and how quickly the system should react.

a5 AF activation  • Shutter / AF-ON ¹
 • AF-ON Only
 
a6 Focus point illumination  • Manual focus mode
On ¹
Off
 • Continuous mode
On ¹
Off
 
a7 Focus point wrap-around  • Wrap
 • No wrap ¹
 
a8 AF point selection  • 51 points ¹
 • 11 points
 
a9 AF-ON button  • AF-ON ¹
 • AE/AF-L lock
 • AE lock only
 • AE lock (reset on rel.)
 • AE lock (hold)
 • AF lock only
Customize the function of the AF-ON button.
a10 Vertical AF-ON button  • Same as AF-ON
 • AF-ON ¹
 • AE/AF-L lock
 • AE lock only
 • AE lock (reset on rel.)
 • AE lock (hold)
 • AF lock only
Customize the function of the AF-ON button on the vertical grip.

Custom Settings Menu (b: Metering / exposure)

Option Values / Actions Notes
b1 ISO sensitivity step value  • 1/3 step ¹
 • 1/2 step
 • 1 step
Set the steps used for selection of ISO sensitivity.
b2 EV steps for exposure ctl.  • 1/3 step ¹
 • 1/2 step
 • 1 step
 
b3 Exp comp/fine tune  • 1/3 step ¹
 • 1/2 step
 • 1 step
 
b4 Easy exposure compens.  • On (Auto reset)
 • On
 • Off ¹
Enables 'Easy Exposure Compensation' which can be accessed by turning a dial.
b5 Center weight area  • 8 mm
 • 12 mm ¹
 • 15 mm
 • 20 mm
 • Average
 
b6 Fine tune exposure  • Yes
Matrix metering
Center-weighted
Spot metering
 • No ¹
Allows you to fine tune metered exposure values in the range of -1.0 EV to +1.0 EV in 1/6 EV steps.

Custom Settings Menu (c: Timers / AE Lock)

Option Values / Actions Notes
c1 Shutter-release butt. AE-L  • On
 • Off ¹

Define lock AE during shutter release half-press.

c2 Auto meter-off delay  • 4 s
 • 6 s ¹
 • 8 s
 • 16 s
 • 30 s
 • 1 min
 • 5 min
 • 10 min
 • 30 min
 • No Limit
 
c3 Self-timer delay  • 2 s
 • 5 s
 • 10 s ¹
 • 20 s
 
c4 Monitor off delay  • 10 s
 • 20 s ¹
 • 1 m
 • 5 m
 • 10 m
 

Custom Settings Menu (d: Shooting / display)

Option Values / Actions Notes
d1 Beep

 • High
 • Low
 • Off ¹


d2 Shooting speed

 • Continuous high-speed
11 fps
10 fps
9 fps ¹
 • Continuous low-speed
9 fps
8 fps
7 fps
6 fps
5 fps ¹
4 fps
3 fps
2 fps
1 fps

Define shooting speed for the two continuous drive modes.

d3 Max continuous release

 • 1 - 100

Maximum shots in a burst.

d4 File Number Sequence  • On ¹
 • Off
 • Reset
 
d5 Control panel/viewfinder  • Rear control panel
ISO sensitivity ¹
Exposures remaining
 • Viewfinder display
Frame count ¹
Exposures remaining
 
d6 Shooting info display  • Auto ¹
 • Manual
Dark on light
Light on dark
Defines if shooting info display should automatically change color in dark
d7 LCD illumination  • On
 • Off ¹
When on any button will light the control panel.
d8 Exposure delay mode  • On
 • Off ¹
Shutter release is delayed 1.0 sec to avoid vibration.

Custom Settings Menu (e: Bracketing / flash)

Option Values / Actions Notes
e1 Flash sync speed

 • 1/320 (Auto FP)
 • 1/250 (Auto FP)
 • 1/250 ¹
 • 1/200
 • 1/160
 • 1/125
 • 1/100
 • 1/80
 • 1/60

e2 Flash shutter speed  • 1/60 s ¹
 • 1/30 s
 • 1/15 s
 • 1/8 s
 • 1/4 s
 • 1/2 s
 • 1 s
 • 2 s
 • 4 s
 • 8 s
 • 15 s
 • 30 s
Slowest flash shutter speed.
e3 Modeling flash  • On ¹
 • Off
DOF preview button.
e4 Auto bracketing set  • AE & Flash ¹
 • AE only
 • Flash only
 • WB bracketing
 
e5 Auto bracketing (Mode M)  • Flash / Speed ¹
 • Flash / Speed / Apt.
 • Flash / Aperture
 • Flash Only
 
e6 Bracketing order  • Meter > Under > Over ¹
 • Under > Meter > Over
 

Custom Settings Menu (f: Controls)

Option Values / Actions Notes
f1 Multi selector center button

 • Shooting mode
Select cent. focus pt ¹
Not Used
 • Playback mode
Thumbnail On/Off ¹
Histogram On/Off
Zoom On/Off

Multi selector center button function.

f2 Multi selector  • Reset meter-off delay
 • Do nothing ¹
 
f3 Photo info / playback  • Info <>, PB ^v
 • Info ^v, PB <> ¹
Multi selector role in single image playback.
f4 Assign FUNC button

 • FUNC button press
Preview
FV Lock
AE/AF lock
AE lock only
AE lock (reset on rel.)
AE lock (hold)
AF lock only
Flash off
Bracketing burst
Matrix metering
Center-weighted mtr.
Spot metering
Virtual horizon
None ¹
 • FUNC button + dials
Choose image area ¹
1 step spd / aperture
Choose non-CPU lens
Focus point-selection
None

Define the function of the FUNC button (front of the camera below the DOF preview button), both a single press and a hold with dial turn.
f5 Assign preview button

 • Preview button press
Preview ¹
FV Lock
AE/AF lock
AE lock only
AE lock (reset on rel.)
AE lock (hold)
AF lock only
Flash off
Bracketing burst
Matrix metering
Center-weighted mtr.
Spot metering
Virtual horizon
None
 • Preview button + dials
Choose image area
1 step spd / aperture
Choose non-CPU lens
None ¹

Define the function of the preview button (front of the camera above the FUNC button), both a single press and a hold with dial turn.
f6 Assign AE-L/AF-L button  • AE-L/AF-L button press
Preview
FV Lock
AE/AF lock ¹
AE lock only
AE lock (reset on rel.)
AE lock (hold)
AF lock only
AF-ON
Flash off
Bracketing burst
Matrix metering
Center-weighted mtr.
Spot metering
Virtual horizon
None
 • AE-L/AF-L button + dials
Choose image area
Choose non-CPU lens
None ¹
 
f7 Customize command dials  • Reverse rotation
Yes
No ¹
 • Change main / sub
On
Off ¹
 • Aperture setting
Sub-command dial ¹
Aperture ring
 • Menus and Playback
On
Off ¹
 
f8 Release button to use dial  • Yes
 • No ¹
 
f9 No memory card?  • Release locked ¹
 • Enable release
 
f10 Reverse indicators  • + ---- 0 ---- - ¹
 • - ---- 0 ---- +
 

Menus (contd.)

Setup menu

A green superscript one (¹) indicates the default setting.

Option Values / Actions Notes
Format memory card  • Slot 1
Yes
No
 • Slot 2
Yes
No

LCD brightness  • -3 to +3  
Lock mirror up for cleaning  • Start  
Video Mode  • NTSC ¹
 • PAL
 
HDMI  • Auto ¹
 • 480p
 • 576p
 • 720p
 • 1080i
 
World Time  • Time zone
Select
 • Date and time
Date set
Time set
 • Date format
yy/mm/dd
mm/dd/yy
dd/mm/yy
 • Daylight saving time
Off
On
 
Language  • German
 • English
 • Spanish
 • Finnish
 • French
 • Italian
 • Dutch
 • Polish
 • Portuguese
 • Russian
 • Swedish
 • Chinese Traditional
 • Chinese Simplified
 • Japanese
 • Korean
 
Image comment  • Done
 • Input comment
Text entry
 • Attach comment

When enabled the comment is written into the header of each image.

Auto image rotation  • On ¹
 • Off
 
Voice memo  • Off ¹
 • On (Auto and manual)
 • Manual only
 
Voice memo overwrite  • Disable ¹
 • Enable
 
Voice memo button  • Press and hold ¹
 • Press to start/stop
 
Audio output  • Via speaker
 • HDMI/audio-video output
 • Off ¹
 
USB  • Mass Storage ¹
 • MTP / PTP
 
Dust off ref photo  • Start Used to capture a 'dust reference image' for the 'Dust Off' feature of Nikon Capture. (RAW only).
Battery Info  • Battery meter
 • Picture meter
 • Calibration
 • Charging life
Information display only.
Wireless transmitter    
Image authentication  • On
 • Off ¹
 
Save/load settings  • Save settings
 • Load settings
 
GPS  • Auto meter off
 • Position
 
Virtual horizon  • (Display)  
Non-CPU lens data  • Done
 • Lens number (1 - 9)
 • Focal length (6 - 4000)
 • Max aperture (F1.2 - F22)
 
AF fine tune  • AF fine tune (On/Off)
Off
On
 • Saved value (+/- 20)
 • Default (+/- 20)
 • List saved values
 
Firmware Version  • Version No.
A x.00
B x.00
Information display only.

Retouch menu

Option Values / Actions Notes
D-Lighting  • Select image
Low
Normal
High

Red-eye correction  • Select image  
Trim  • Select image
Zoom / Scroll
Aspect
 
Monochrome  • Black-and-white  
Select image
 • Sepia
Select image
 • Cyanotype
Select image
 
Filter effects  • Skylight 
Select image
 • Warm filter
Select image
 
Color balance  • Select image
Color wheel
 
Image overlay  • Image 1
 • Image 2
 • Preview
 
Side-by-side comparison  • Select images  

My menu

Option Values / Actions Notes
Add items  • Select image
Playback menu
Shooting menu
Custom setting menu
Setup menu
Retouch menu

Remove items  • Select item to remove  
Rank items  • Select item to re-order
 
by facestar 2007. 12. 28. 13:53

Nikon D300 Hands-on Preview
Phil Askey, September 2007


Preview based on a pre-production Nikon D300

Just under two years since the D200 Nikon reveals the D300, the range of changes is so significant that it wouldn't be inappropriate to call it a 'compact D3' (less the full-frame sensor of course). From the top there's a new CMOS sensor with twelve megapixels, a new auto-focus sensor with 51-points (15 of which are cross-type sensitive), there's focus tracking by color, scene recognition, Picture Control presets, six frames per second continuous shooting (or eight frames per second with a battery pack), Compact Flash UDMA support, Live View (with contrast detect AF) and the mighty impressive 3.0" 922,000 pixel LCD monitor (oh and HDMI video output). It's an impressive list, the D200 was a fair step up from the D100, the D300 can be seen as just as big a step, certainly more than enough to make the competition sweat.

Model line history

Model
Announced
Effective pixels
Auto focus
Continuous highest (JPEG) LCD monitor
D100 Feb 2002 6.0 mp 5 point 3.0 fps, 6 frames 1.8", 120K pixels
D200 Nov 2005 10.2 mp 11 point 5.0 fps, 37 frames 2.5" 230K pixels
D300 Aug 2007 12.3 mp 51 point 6.0/8.0 fps, 100 frames 3.0" 922K pixels + Live View

Nikon D300 Key Features

  • 12.3 megapixel DX format CMOS sensor
  • Self-cleaning sensor unit (low-pass filter vibration)
  • ISO 200 - 3200 (6400 with boost)
  • 14-bit A/D conversion
  • Nikon EXPEED image processor (Capture NX processing and NR algorithms, lower power)
  • Super fast operation (power-up 13 ms, shutter lag 45 ms, black-out 100 ms)
  • Shutter life 150,000 exposures
  • New Multi-CAM3500DX Auto Focus sensor (51-point, 15 cross-type, more vertical coverage)
  • Auto-focus tracking by color (using information from 1005-pixel AE sensor)
  • Auto-focus calibration (fine-tuning) now available (fixed body or up to 20 separate lens settings)
  • Scene Recognition System (uses AE sensor, AF sensor)
  • Picture Control image parameter presets (replace Color Modes I, II and III)
  • Custom image parameters now support brightness as well as contrast
  • Six frames per second continuous shooting (eight frames per second with battery pack)
  • Compact Flash UDMA support
  • 3.0" 922,000 pixel LCD monitor
  • Live View with either phase detect (mirror up/down) or contrast detect Auto Focus
  • HDMI HD video output
  • 'Active D-Lighting' (adjusts metering as well as applying D-Lighting curve)
  • Detailed 'Control Panel' type display on LCD monitor, changes color in darkness
  • New MB-D10 vertical grip fully integrates into body, multi battery type compatible
  • Buttons sealed against moisture

12.3 megapixel DX format CMOS sensor Viewfinder pentaprism

Main board with EXPEED processor EXPEED processor

51-point Multi-CAM 3500DX AF sensor module 51 AF point locations in frame (approx.)

1005-pixel metering sensor Shutter

Nikon D300 vs. D200 feature and specification differences

 

Nikon D300

Nikon D200
Sensor • 12.3 million effective pixel CMOS
• DX format
10.2 million effective pixel CCD
• DX format
A/D converter 14-bit 12-bit
Image processor Nikon EXPEED Unspecified
Image sizes • 4288 x 2848
• 3216 x 2136
• 2144 x 1424
• 3872 x 2592
• 2896 x 1944
• 1936 x 1296
RAW files NEF / Compressed NEF 14-bit NEF 12-bit
TIFF files Yes No
Dust reduction Self-cleaning sensor unit No
Auto focus • 51-point Multi-CAM 3500DX
• 15 cross-type sensors
• Contrast detect in Live View mode
• 11-point Multi-CAM 1000
Focus tracking by color Yes No
AF area mode

• Single point AF
• Dynamic Area AF [9 points, 21 points, 51 points, 51 points (3D-tracking)]
• Automatic-area AF

• Single Area AF
• Dynamic AF with Focus Tracking and Lock-on
• Group Dynamic AF
• Closest Subject Priority Dynamic AF
Sensitivity

• Default: ISO 200 - 3200
• Boost: ISO 100 - 6400
• 1/3, 1/2 or 1.0 EV steps

• Default: ISO 100 - 1600
• Boost: Up to ISO 3200
• 1/3, 1/2 or 1.0 EV steps

Continuous shooting • With built-in battery: up to 6 fps
• With AC adapter or MB-D10 pack and batteries other than EN-EL3e: up to 8 fps
5 fps
Image Parameters • Picture Control (4 presets)
• Sharpening
• Contrast
• Brightness
• Saturation
• Hue
• Presets (6 presets)
• Sharpening
• Tone
• Color mode
• Saturation
• Hue
Active D-Lighting Yes (also adjusts exposure) No
Viewfinder 100% frame coverage 95% frame coverage
LCD monitor • 3.0 " TFT LCD
• 922,000 pixels
• 2.5 " TFT LCD
• 230,000 pixels
LCD Live View • Handheld mode (phase detect AF)
• Tripod mode (contrast detect AF)
No
Compact Flash Type I / II (UDMA support) Type I / II
Vertical grip MB-D10 MB-D200
Video output HDMI (HD) Composite (SD)
Menu languages 14 13
Dimensions 147 x 114 x 74 mm (5.8 x 4.5 x 2.9 in) 147 x 113 x 74 mm (5.8 x 4.4 x 2.9 in)
Weight (no batt) 825 g (1.82 lb) 830 g (1.8 lb)

Nikon D300 specifications

Price (body only) • US: $ 1799
• UK: £ 1299
• EU: € 1980
Body material Magnesium alloy
Sensor * • 23.6 x 15.8 mm CMOS sensor
• DX format
• RGB Color Filter Array
• Built-in fixed low-pass filter (with self-cleaning unit)
• 13.1 million total pixels
• 12.3 million effective pixels
• 3:2 aspect ratio
Image processor * Nikon EXPEED
A/D conversion * 14 bit
Image sizes * • 4288 x 2848 [L; 12.2 MP]
• 3216 x 2136 [M; 6.9 MP]
• 2144 x 1424 [S; 3.1 MP]
File formats • NEF (12-bit or 14-bit *, compressed or lossless compressed RAW)
• NEF + JPEG
• TIFF *
• JPEG (EXIF 2.21)
NEF compression • Compressed 12/14-bit NEF (RAW, Lossless compressed): approx. 60-80% *
• Compressed 12/14-bit NEF (RAW, Compressed): approx. 45-60%
Lens mount • Nikon F mount with AF coupling and AF contacts
• 1.5x field of view crop
Usable lenses

• DX AF NIKKOR: All functions possible
• D-/G-type AF NIKKOR (excluding IX NIKKOR lenses): All functions possible (excluding PC Micro- NIKKOR)
• AF NIKKOR other than D-/G-type (excluding lenses for F3AF): All functions except 3D-Color Matrix Metering II possible
• AI-P NIKKOR: All functions except Autofocus, 3D-Color Matrix Metering II possible
• Non-CPU AI NIKKOR: Can be used in exposure modes A and M; electronic range finder can be used if maximum aperture is f/5.6 or faster; Color Matrix Metering and aperture value display supported if user provides lens data

Dust reduction * • Self-cleaning sensor unit ('Clean image sensor') *
• Image dust-off data acquisition (Capture NX required)
Auto Focus • 51 focus points (15 cross-type sensors) *
• Multi-CAM 3500DX *
• AF working range: -1 to +19 EV (ISO 100, normal temperature)
• Contrast Detect in Live View (Tripod) mode
Lens Servo • Single Servo AF [S]
• Continuous Servo AF [C]
• Manual focus [M]
• Focus Tracking automatically activated by subject's status in [S] or [C] AF
Focus Point * • Single point from 51 or 11 focus points
• Liveview (Tripod mode): Contrast AF on a desired point anywhere within frame
AF Area Mode *

• Single point AF
• Dynamic Area AF [9 points, 21 points, 51 points, 51 points (3D-tracking)]
• Automatic-area AF

Focus Lock

Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button halfway (single-servo AF) or by pressing AE-L/AF-L button

AF assist Yes, lamp
Exposure modes • Program Auto [P] with flexible program
• Shutter-Priority Auto [S]
• Aperture-Priority Auto [A]
• Manual [M]
Metering

TTL full-aperture exposure metering using 1005-pixel RGB sensor
• 3D Color Matrix Metering II (type G and D lenses); color matrix metering II (other CPU lenses); color matrix metering (non-CPU lenses if user provides lens data; metering performed)
• Center-weighted: Weight of 75% given to 6, 8, 10, or 13 mm dia. circle in center of frame or weighting based on average of entire frame (8 mm circle when non-CPU lens is used)
• Spot: Meters approx. 3 mm dia. circle (about 2.0% of frame) centered on selected focus point (on center focus point when non-CPU lens is used)

Metering range • 3D Color Matrix Metering: 0 to 20 EV
• Center-Weighted Metering: 0 to 20 EV
• Spot Metering: 2 to 20 EV
• At normal temperature (20°C/68°F), ISO 100 equivalent, f/1.4 lens
Meter coupling CPU and AI
Exposure lock Locked using AE-L/AF-L button
Exposure bracketing

• 2 to 9 frames
• 1/3, 1/2, 2/3 or 1 EV steps *

Exposure compen. • +/-5.0 EV
• 1/3, 1/2 or 1 EV steps
Sensitivity *

• Default: ISO 200 - 3200 in 1/3, 1/2 or 1.0 EV steps
• Boost: 100 - 6400 in 1/3, 1/2 or 1.0 EV steps

Shutter • Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal plane shutter
• 30 to 1/8000 sec (1/3, 1/2 or 1.0 EV steps)
• Flash X-Sync: 1/250 sec (up to 1/320 sec with reduced GN *)
• Bulb
DOF Preview • Stop-down lens aperture by pressing button
• Activates modelling flash
White balance • Auto (1005-pixel CCD, image sensor)
• Presets (seven) with fine tuning *
• Manual presets (four)
• Color temperature in Kelvin (2500 - 10000 K, 31 steps)
• White balance bracketing (2 to 9 frames, 10,20,30 MIRED steps)
Picture Control * • Standard
• Neutral
• Vivid
• Monochrome
Image parameters * • Sharpening: Auto, 7 levels
• Contrast: Auto, 5 levels, Custom tone curve
• Brightness: 3 levels
• Saturation: Auto, 5 levels
• Hue: 5 levels
Color space • sRGB (Standard and Vivid modes)
• Adobe RGB (Neutral mode)
Viewfinder • Optical-type fixed eye-level pentaprism
• Built-in diopter adjustment (-2 to +1m-1)
• Eyepoint: 19.5 mm (at -1.0m-1)
• Frame coverage 100% *
• Viewfinder magnification approx 0.94x with 50 mm f/1.4 lens
Focusing screen • B-type BrightView Clear Matte Screen II
• Superimposed focus brackets
• On-demand grid lines
LCD monitor * • 3.0 " TFT LCD
• 922,000 pixels (VGA; 640 x 480 x 3 colors)
• 170° viewing angle
• Brightness adjustment
LCD Liveview *

• Handheld mode: TLL phase-difference AF with 51 focus areas (15 cross-type sensors)
• Tripod mode: focal-plane contrast AF on a desired point within a specific area

Shooting modes • Single frame
• Continuous Low [CL]
• Continuous High [CH]
• Liveview [LV]
• Self-Timer (programmable)
• Mirror-up mode
Continuous shooting * • With built-in battery: up to 6 fps
• With AC adapter or MB-D10 pack and batteries other than EN-EL3e: up to 8 fps
• 12-bit RAW at full speed, 14-bit RAW only 2.5 fps
Continuous buffer • JPEG Large/Normal: 100 shots (at 6 fps)
• RAW: no data yet
Self-timer • 2 to 20 sec custom
Flash control

• TTL: TTL flash control by 1,005-pixel RGB sensor.
• Built-in Speedlight, SB-800, SB-600 or SB-400: i-TTL balanced fill-flash and standard i-TTL flash
• AA (Auto Aperture-type) flash: Available with SB-800 used with CPU lens
• Non-TTL Auto: Available with Speedlights such as SB-800, 28, 27, and 22S
• Range-priority manual flash; available with SB-800

Flash Sync Mode • Front-curtain Sync (normal)
• Red-Eye Reduction
• Red-Eye Reduction with Slow Sync
• Slow Sync
• Rear-curtain Sync
Built-in Speedlight • Manual pop-up with button release
• Guide number (ISO 200, m) approx 17 (manual 18)
• Guide number (ISO 100, m) approx 12 (manual 13)
Flash Accessory Shoe

ISO 518 standard-type hot shoe contact; Safety lock mechanism provided

Flash Sync Terminal ISO 519 standard terminal, lock screw provided
Flash compensation • -3 to +1 EV
• 1/3, 1/2 or 1 EV steps *
Creative Lighting System

With Speedlights such as SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, SB-R200, supports Advanced Wireless Lighting, Auto FP High-Speed Sync, Flash Color Information Communication, modeling flash and FV lock

Orientation sensor Tags images with camera orientation
Playback mode • Full frame
• Thumbnail (4 or 9 images)
• One-touch zoom
• Slideshow
• RGB histogram
• Shooting data
• Highlight point
• Auto image rotation
Languages *

• Chinese (Simplified and Traditional)
• Dutch
• English
• Finnish
• French
• German
• Italian
• Japanese
• Korean
• Polish
• Portuguese
• Russian
• Spanish
• Swedish

Custom functions 48 custom functions
Connectivity

• USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed) Mini-B connector
• HDMI video out (version 1.3a, Type A connector) *
• Remote control 10-pin terminal
• PC Sync flash terminal

10-pin terminal

• GPS: NMEA 0183 (Ver. 2.01 and 3.01) interface standard supported with 9-pin D-sub cable and GPS Cable MC-35 (optional)
• Remote control: via 10-pin terminal

Communications FTP and PTP/IP file transfer with optional Wireless Transmitter WT-3 (IEEE 802.11 b/g)
Storage • Compact Flash Type I or II
• UDMA *, Microdrive and FAT32 supported
• 36 characters of text can be input and stored in EXIF header
Power • Lithium-Ion EN-EL3e (7.4 V, 1500 mAh)
• Included battery charger MH-18a
• Optional AC adapter EH-5a
• Optional MB-D10 battery pack / vertical grip *
Vertical grip * • Optional MB-D10 battery pack / vertical grip
• One Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL4a, EN-EL4 or EN-EL3e or eight R6/AA-size alkaline (LR6), Ni-MH (HR6), lithium (FR6) batteries, or nickel-manganese ZR6 batteries
Battery monitoring The LCD monitor on the camera back displays the following information
about the EN-EL3e battery:
• Remaining charge (%)
• No. of shots taken since last charge
• Battery life (5 stages)
Dimensions 147 x 114 x 74 mm (5.8 x 4.5 x 2.9 in)
Weight (no batt) 825 g (1.8 lb)
Weight (with batt) 903 g (2.0 lb)
Box contents

Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL3e, Quick Charger MH-18a, USB Cable UC-E4, Video Cable EG-D100, Strap AN-D300, LCD monitor cover BM-8, Body cap, Eyepiece Cap DK-5, Rubber Eyecup DK-23, Software Suite CD-ROM

Optional accessories

Multi-Power Battery Pack MB-D10, Wireless Transmitter WT-4, Magnifying Eyepiece DK-21M, AC Adapter EH-5a, Capture NX Software, Camera Control Pro 2


Body & Design

The D300 design is very similar to the D200, that's no bad thing, it's virtually the same size (very slightly taller), at the front there are new covers over the remote and PC sync terminals, at the rear a larger AF-ON button and a subtle re-arrange of the buttons down the left of the now larger LCD monitor. Build quality is just as good as the D200 (if not slightly better) and certainly in line with its 'bigger brother' the D3. The body is constructed from magnesium alloy, soft rubber is used on the grips both front and back as well as environmental seals on compartment doors. Just like the rest of the family the D300 features oversized buttons on the rear of the camera which are easier to use when wearing gloves.

There are numerous rubber gasket seals around body seams, controls and compartment doors. Nikon don't claim the camera to be waterproof but it's certainly more 'weather proof' than the average digital SLR. Remember that the camera is only as weather proof as its weakest link, this includes the lens mount and only a few of the more recent Nikkor lenses have rubber seals around the mount ring.

Side by side

Below you can see the D300 beside the recently announced ten megapixel Canon EOS 40D. Despite a $500 price difference (in Canon's favor) these two models are clear rivals and will be compared and contrasted by buyers and reviewers alike. The D300 weighs in at 903 g including its battery, the EOS 40D about 80 g lighter (the same weight as the D300's rechargeable battery).

In your hand

You really have to pick up the D300 to appreciate how nicely it fits into your hand, the ergonomics are great and the soft rubber used on the grip ensures holding the camera steady is an easy task. The control layout is also very sensible and easy to learn, even if you've never used a Nikon DSLR before clear labeling and logical positioning mean you'll be shooting and discovering the D300's features very quickly (and if you are coming from the D200 you'll be right at home because very little has changed).

LCD Monitor

One of the big changes to the D300 is the new high resolution screen. It has four times the number of dots than the 230,000 unit used on the D2X and other such cameras. For clarity, the words pixels and dots are interchanged almost randomly in specification sheets but strictly speaking we should talk of dots (these being red, green or blue sub-pixels) when referring to the figures quoted by manufacturers. The D300's LCD has 921,600 dots, 1920 columns by 480 rows, the dots are a third thinner than they are high and so each group of three dots (sub-pixels) make up one full color pixel.

This high resolution screen really has to be seen to be appreciated, it's beautifully detailed and extremely smooth in appearance because the tiny gaps between dots are too small to be seen with the eye. This extra detail is obvious in Liveview and playback modes where you really can see much 'more' of the image in one glance. Another difference comes when you magnify in playback as you find you don't need to magnify the image as much before you can clearly see sharpness, focus accuracy and even noise.

One other difference between the D300/D3's screen and that used previously is the layout of the dots (sub-pixels), this new screen has the same layout as your computer LCD, a simple RGB layout with all rows the same ('stripe array'). The other layout used on small LCD screens is the 'delta array' which uses an RGB pattern on one row then a BRG pattern on the row below, offset by half a pixel.

Stripe array layout LCD Delta array layout LCD

Below you can see a real-life, same-size example of the difference in resolution between this new 921,600 dot screen and a more typical 230,400 dot screen (in this case on the Canon EOS 40D). Both cameras were set in play mode with the same image (note that the D300 doesn't use the whole screen in play unless you magnify), a shot was taken of each camera from the same distance (hence the screens were captured at the same magnification).

Crop from the D300's LCD
(1920 x 480 dots; 640 x 480 pixels)
Crop from the EOS 40D's LCD
(960 x 240 dots; 320 x 240 pixels)

Top Control Panel

The D300 has one control panel on the top, this large display dominates the entire right top side of the camera and provides a full range of information covering photographic and digital settings. The panel has a green back light which can be illuminated by flicking the power switch to the lamp position, it's spring loaded and returns to 'ON', the back light stays on for the 'auto meter-off' time (CSM c2). You can also choose to have the backlights come on with any button press (CSM d8). Note that even when the camera is 'Off' this panel displays the number of frames remaining on the card or -E- if no card is inserted (an indication that the camera is never really powered off but instead in a sleep mode).

A breakdown of information displayed on the LCD panel can be found on the diagrams below.

*1 • Shutter-speed
• Exposure compensation value
• Flash compensation value
• ISO sensitivity
• White balance fine-tuning
• White balance preset number
• Number of shots in bracketing sequence
• Number of intervals
• Focal length (non-CPU lens)
*2 • Aperture (f-number)
• Aperture (number of stops)
• Bracketing increment
• Number of shots per interval
• Maximum aperture (non-CPU lens)
• PC connection indicator
*3 • Number of frames remaining
• Number of shots remaining before buffer fills
• PC mode indicator
• Preset white balance recording indicator
*4 • Electronic analog exposure display
• Exposure compensation
• Bracketing progress indicator
• PC mode indicator

Diagram reproduced with permission from the Nikon D300 user manual.

Viewfinder

The D300's viewfinder view seems slightly larger than the D200 and the specs do note a frame coverage of 100% compared to the D200's 95%. To the right top corner of the removable eyepiece rubber is a diopter adjustment wheel. Unlike the D3 the D300 does not feature an internal viewfinder curtain.

The D300 features a new 51 point auto focus sensor, the center fifteen (3x5 grid) being cross point sensors even with F5.6 aperture lenses. There are two AF point selection modes (CSM a8), you can opt to be able to select from all 51 points or 11 points in the same layout as the D200.

51 point AF selection mode 11 point AF selection mode

The image below isn't designed to be representative of a typical view through the viewfinder but instead shows the position of all possible information including all 51 AF points, battery status overlay and optional grid lines. Nikon has made it clear that they are not using etching to indicate the AF points but that all information is displayed using liquid crystal, hence when an AF point is not active there is no detrimental effect on the focusing screen.

1 Focus indicator 10 Electronic analog exposure display / compen.
2 Metering mode 11 Flash compensation indicator
3 Auto exposure lock 12 Exposure compensation indicator
4 Flash value (FV) Lock 13 ISO / Auto ISO indicator
5 Flash sync indicator 14 ISO sensitivity
6 Shutter speed 15 Exposures remaining / buffer / exp. value
7 Aperture stop indicator 16 Thousands indicator
8 Aperture (f-number / number of stops) 17 Flash-ready indicator
9 Exposure mode    

Diagram reproduced with permission from the Nikon D300 user manual.

Battery and Charger

The D300 uses the same EN-EL3e battery we first saw on the D200. It has a quoted capacity of 1500 mAh at 7.4V (11.1 Wh) and charges on the supplied MH-18a quick charger. Note that the D300 is also compatible with the larger EN-EL4a battery when the MB-D10 battery grip is attached (see below).

Battery information available on the camera:

  • Top control panel has a five segment battery life indicator
  • Camera Menu: Set Up -> Battery Info provides:
    • Battery meter (as a percentage)
    • Picture meter (estimated frames on current power)
    • Charging Life (a scale from 0 to 4 indicating if the battery has come to the end of its useful life)

Battery Compartment

The battery compartment is located in the base of the hand grip. The compartment door is opened by pulling on a small lever, inside the battery holds itself part of the way in without dropping and without the use of a catch.

Battery pack / Vertical grip (optional)

The D300 has a new battery pack / vertical grip, the MB-D10. This new grip no longer requires the removal of the internal battery or battery door instead connecting to a pair of terminals on the base of the camera (normally protected by rubber covers, removed for this shot). This allows the internal battery to be used in conjunction with the batteries in the MB-D10. This MB-D10 is more ergonomic than previous grips and integrates much better with the body, it also supports a wider range of batteries; the EN-EL3e, the large EN-EL4a used in the D3 as well as AA batteries.

Compact Flash Compartment

The D300's Compact Flash compartment is set in the side of the camera as part of the hand grip. To open the door you turn a small dial on the rear of the camera below the AF area mode selector. The door opens automatically on a spring loaded hinge and when closed fits flush into the body contour. The door itself has a rubber gasket around its edge to form a water resistant seal. The D300 can take Compact Flash Type I or II and supports FAT32 (for cards over 2 GB) as well as the new high speed UDMA cards.

Connections

The D300's connections are in two places, either at the front top (remote and flash PC sync) or the left side of the body (from the rear). The remote (which also allows for serial GPS) and flash PC sync terminals are now protected by a rubber cover which is itself attached to the strap eyelet. On the side are the largest group of connectors, from top to bottom; Video out (composite), HDMI (digital video out HD/SD), DC-IN and USB 2.0. The biggest story here must be HDMI output, from the camera menu you can select five different output options; Auto, 480p, 576p, 720p or 1080i. For an example and video clip of HDMI output see this page of this article.

Camera Base / Tripod Mount

The bottom of the D300 is a simple enough affair with the metal tripod mount located in line with the center of the lens and the imaging focal plane. I'm also a big fan of the large rubber foot which covers two thirds of the base.

You can also see the connectors for the optional MB-D10 grip (see previous page). These would normally have rubber covers over them.

Pop-Up Flash

The D300's pop-up flash is released manually by pressing a small button on the left side just below the flash. The long arm raises the flash unit a respectable distance above the top of the lens (useful for lens hoods and reducing red-eye). Just below the release button is another button which changes flash mode and flash exposure compensation control button. Hold the button and turn the main command dial (rear) to change flash mode, sub-command dial to change flash exposure compensation (-3.0 to +1.0 EV).

Flash Hot-shoe

The D300 has a standard (ISO 518) accessory shoe which is compatible with third party flash systems for flash sync and more advanced i-TTL with the SB-800, SB-600 or SB-400. Non-TTL Auto available with the 80DX, 28DX, 28, 27, and 22s.

Lens Mount / Sensor

Below on the left you can see the D300's lens mount with the mirror down, on the right with mirror up and shutter open (exposing the sensor). Lenses are inserted twisted clockwise and lock in place with an anticlockwise turn. This is a standard Nikon F lens mount and can use almost the complete range of Nikkor F lenses (although some features are only available with newer type G or type D lenses). As noted in our introduction the D300 also supports the aperture ring found on old AI lenses.

Self-cleaning sensor unit

We knew Nikon couldn't wait too long before implementing some kind of automatic sensor cleaning system, and so the D300 becomes the first Nikon with such a feature. It works in the same manner as other implementations, piezoelectric elements vibrate a cover filter which should in theory remove any light dust particles attached to it.

Sensor unit with LPF and cleaning unit in place Sensor cleaning unit diagram

Supplied In the Box

Box contents may vary by region:

  • Nikon D300 digital SLR body & body cap
  • BM-8 protective LCD cover
  • Shoulder strap
  • Eyepiece Cap DK-5
  • Rubber Eyecup DK-23
  • EN-EL3e Lithium-Ion battery
  • MH-18a Quick Charger & AC power cable
  • USB cable
  • A/V cable
  • Software CD-ROM
  • Manuals

Top of camera controls (right)

On the top of the camera on the right side you will find the power switch, shutter release button, exposure mode and exposure compensation buttons. At the front and rear edges of this side of the camera, in line with the shutter release button are the two command dials (with a soft rubber coating). On the rear of the camera surrounding the AE-L/AF-L button is the metering mode selector, to the right of this the now slightly more emphasized AF-ON button. Note that CSM f7 allows you define the exact function of the command dials including their rotation, which sets aperture / shutter speed and whether they can be used in menus and playback mode. The function of controls described below are for a camera with default settings.

Buttons combined with a dial turn are held while the dial is turned, however you can choose to simply have to press the button once and release, this is achieved via CSM f8 (like a Canon).

Power dial

OFF Power Off

Powers the camera off immediately, if there are images still buffered to be written the camera will remain on until the write has completed. When off the camera continues to display the remaining frames / frame count and CF status on the top LCD panel.
ON Power On

Switches the camera on, this is as fast as we can time it, as good as instant. There is simply no perceptible delay between turning the the dial and the first shot (you can even hold the shutter release and turn the power dial to test this).
Illuminate backlight

Flick the power switch to this position to illuminate the control panels backlight's (top and rear). The backlight stays on for the 'auto meter-off' time (CSM c3).

Buttons (combined with dial turn)

  Main command dial (rear) Sub command dial (front)
MODE Exposure mode (detail below)

 • Programmed Auto (flexible)
 • Shutter-Priority Auto
 • Aperture-Priority Auto
 • Manual
No function
Exposure compensation

 • +/- 5 EV
 • 0.3, 0.5 or 1 EV steps (CSM b2)
No function

Buttons (single press)

AF-ON AF-ON

The AF-ON button is an alternative to half-pressing the shutter release, it triggers the camera's auto focus system. You can if you wish have the camera set to that AF is not triggered by a shutter release half-press (CSM a5) and only by the AF-ON button (useful for fast action photography where continuous AF tracking is required).
AE-L
AF-L

AE / AF Lock

Pressing this button locks the current exposure and focus, in its default mode both AE and AF remain locked as long as you hold the button. CSM f6 allows you to change the function of this button with a range of AE / AF hold / lock options as well as other camera functions (such as metering, bracketing etc.)

Metering Mode

3D Color matrix metering II / Color Matrix II / Color Matrix

3D Color matrix metering uses a 1005 pixel CCD to calculate the best exposure for the frame. 3D color matrix metering is only available with G type or D type lenses where the range information is used in conjunction with metered light. Color matrix II metering is used with other CPU lenses. Color matrix metering is used when focal length and aperture are entered manually using the 'Non-CPU lens data' menu item.
Center-weighted metering

The camera uses the entire frame for light measurement but assigns a greater weight to an area in the center of the frame (by default an 8 mm circle indicated on the viewfinder focus screen). The size of the circle used to define the "center" of the frame can be set by CSM b5.
Spot metering

The camera measures light only in a circle 3 mm in diameter. This is tied to the currently selected AF area point unless dynamic AF or a non-CPU lens is used when it defaults to the center of the frame.

Exposure Modes

P Programmed Auto (flexible)

In this mode the camera automatically selects aperture and shutter speed based on the current metered exposure value, exposure compensation and selected ISO sensitivity. Flexible program allows you to select one of a range of identical exposures (using different combinations of aperture and shutter speed) by turning the main command dial. Example:

 • 1/125 sec, F9 (turn left one click)
 • 1/160 sec, F8.0 (turn left one click)
 • 1/200 sec, F7.1 (metered)
 • 1/250 sec, F6.3 (turn right one click)
 • 1/320 sec, F5.6 (turn right one click)
S Shutter-Priority Auto

In this mode you select the shutter speed and the camera will calculate the correct aperture depending on metered exposure, exposure compensation and ISO sensitivity. Turn the main command dial to select shutter speed in the range of 30 to 1/8000 sec (in 0.3, 0.5 or 1.0 EV exposure steps depending on CSM b3).
A Aperture-Priority Auto

In this mode you select the aperture and the camera will calculate the correct shutter speed depending on metered exposure, exposure compensation and ISO sensitivity. Turn the sub command dial to select aperture (in 0.3, 0.5 or 1.0 EV exposure steps depending on CSM b3). The exact range of apertures will depend on the lens used.
M

Manual Exposure

In this mode you define the exact exposure by selecting the aperture and the shutter speed manually. As above use the main command dial (rear) for shutter speed, sub command dial (front) for aperture. The meter on the viewfinder status bar and top LCD will immediately reflect the exposure level compared to the calculated ideal exposure, if outside of the range of the indicator bar (+/- 2 EV on the viewfinder LCD and +/- 3 EV on the top control panel) an arrow ('<' or '>') will appear at the end.

Top of camera controls (left)

The top left side of the camera has the mode dial which allows you to select the camera's drive mode, single, two continuous speeds, live view, self-timer or mirror up. This dial is locked from accidental change and can only be turned by holding the lock release pin to the top left of the dial. On the top of this dial are three buttons for quality, white balance and ISO sensitivity.

Mode Dial

S Single frame shooting

One frame is taken with one depression of the shutter release button. You can of course still 'pump' shots as quickly as you can re-press the shutter release. The D300's shutter release button is the soft-press type which easily facilitates quick re-press.
CL

Continuous low speed shooting

Camera shoots continuously while the shutter release is depressed. In this mode the actual shooting rate can be set between 1 and 4 frames per second (through CSM d4), the default is 3 frames per second. Images are buffered as they are taken and written out to the Compact Flash card in the background. Current buffer space is indicated on the viewfinder LCD status bar as a number prefixed with a lower case 'r' (eg. r25).

CH

Continuous high speed shooting

Camera shoots continuously while the shutter release is depressed. In this mode the camera shoots at its maximum speed of 6 frames per second. Images are buffered as they are taken and written out to the Compact Flash card in the background. Current buffer space is indicated on the viewfinder LCD status bar as a number prefixed with a lower case 'r' (eg. r25).

LV

Liveview

Puts the camera in live view shooting mode. In this mode you activate through-the-lens live view on the LCD monitor by first pressing the shutter release button (it's a bit counterintuitive) the mirror will raise (blanking the viewfinder) and the LCD will activate.To focus either use manual focus (press the magnify buttons to provide a larger magnified view) or press the AF-ON button to use contrast detect AF (slow but maintains live view) or phase detect AF (quicker but requires the mirror to drop first). The camera does not return to live view after a shutter release, you have to press the shutter release button once more.

Self-timer

Camera takes a shot after a predefined delay. This can be set to 2, 5, 10, or 20 seconds via CSM c3.
M-UP

Mirror Up

Press the shutter release once to raise the mirror, again to take the shot. As I commented in my D2X and D200 reviews it would have been nice to have this combined with a self-timer so you don't need to touch the camera (or use a remote) to trigger the actual shutter release. (CSM d9; exposure delay mode; offers something similar but the delay is not long enough).

Buttons (combined with a command dial)

  Main command dial (rear) Sub command dial (front)
QUAL Image quality

 • RAW
 • TIFF
 • Fine JPEG
 • Normal JPEG
 • Basic JPEG
 • RAW + Fine JPEG
 • RAW + Normal JPEG
 • RAW + Basic JPEG

Image size (all except RAW quality)

 • Large (4288 x 2848)
 • Medium (3216 x 2136)
 • Small (2144 x 1424)

WB White balance mode

 • Auto
 • Incandescent
 • Fluorescent
 • Direct sunlight
 • Flash
 • Cloudy
 • Shade
 • Color temperature (Kelvin)
 • White balance preset
White balance adjustment

 - Fine tune -3 to +3
 - Fine tune -3 to +3
 - Fine tune -3 to +3
 - Fine tune -3 to +3
 - Fine tune -3 to +3
 - Fine tune -3 to +3
 - Fine tune -3 to +3
 - Temperature 2500 K to 10000 K
 - Preset 0 to 4
ISO Select sensitivity (ISO equiv.)

 • L 1.0 (100 equiv.)
 • L 0.7 (125 equiv.)
 • L 0.3 (160 equiv.)
 • 200
 • 250
 • 320
 • 400
 • 500
 • 640
 • 800
 • 1000
 • 1250
 • 1600
 • 2000
 • 2500
 • 3200
 • H 0.3 (4000 equiv.)
 • H 0.7 (5000 equiv.)
 • H 1.0 (6400 equiv.)

(You can choose 0.3, 0.5 or 1.0 EV steps for ISO selection via CSM b2)
No function


Rear of camera controls

The rear of the D300 looks almost the same as the D200 expect for the larger LCD monitor and subtly re-organized and more logical button layout; gone is the bracket button now replaced with the play button, the menu button now up a the top of the column of buttons followed by protect, zoom-out, zoom-in and the OK button (called Enter on the D200).

Buttons (single press)

Playback

Enters or leaves playback mode, display mode used depends on the last used (left / right press of the multi selector) or thumbnail display mode. As with all shooting priority cameras the D300 immediately removes the playback display if you half-press the shutter release button although interestingly you can trigger AF (press AF-ON) without clearing the screen).
Delete *p

In playback or record review, pressing this button displays a 'Delete?' confirmation dialog, press again to confirm deletion. Nikon's now de-facto 'double press delete' feature is very easy to use and understand and much faster than other delete implementations (why can't all cameras be this simple?).
Format (Delete + Mode)

Hold the Delete and Mode (top right of camera) buttons simultaneously for approximately two seconds for a shortcut to format the Compact Flash card, the camera first blinks 'For' on the top display and you must release the buttons and press once more to confirm the card format.
MENU Menu

Display or cancel the camera menu, as with playback mode the menu is automatically cancelled if you half-press the shutter release button.

Protect / Info / Menu Help *p

In playback mode press to toggle the 'read only' flag on the displayed / selected image. This button can be used in both playback and record review modes. In shooting mode press this button to toggle the shooting information display on the LCD monitor. In menu mode (with a menu option selected) you can press and hold this button to display a page of help about the currently highlighted function, this is especially useful for the custom functions.

Thumbnail / zoom out *p

In playback mode with a single image displayed pressing this button switches to a four image thumbnail index, press again to switch to a nine image thumbnail index. In playback magnify mode steps back a single zoom level.
Zoom in *p / Live view magnify

In playback mode with a single image displayed enters magnify mode and steps in a zoom level, there are eight zoom steps. In live view mode magnifies the live view image (move around the live image, very useful for checking focus accuracy, there are six live view magnification levels, use the multi selector to move around.
OK OK / Retouching menu *p

The OK button is used to confirm menu selections and dialog options. In Playback mode displays a pop-up version of the retouching menu.
Multi selector

With no image displayed on the screen the multi selector is used to choose AF area, note that this function can be locked by turning the lock lever which surrounds the multi selector (this doesn't affect function in playback or menu mode). The multi selector is also used to change playback display modes (left / right), browse images in playback (up / down) and navigate menus / select dialog options. Various options are available for customizing this control: CSM f1, CSM f2 and CSM f3.

*p - In record review or playback mode

Auto Focus Area Mode selector

Note that the exact function of the AF area mode also depends on the focus mode (AF-S or AF-C), a full summary of all combinations of focus mode and AF area mode can be found at the bottom of this page.

Auto-area AF

The camera uses all focus areas and automatically selects the correct focus points. From the D300 user manual: "If type G or D lens is used, camera can distinguish human subjects
from background for improved subject detection."
Dynamic-area AF

Allows you to manually select one of the fifty-one focus points, however the camera will use information from multiple focus areas to determine focus. Useful for focusing on specific subjects which may move out of the focus area briefly. CSM a3 allows you to choose between 9 points, 21 points, 51 points or 51 points with 3D tracking.
Single-area AF

Allows you to manually select one of the fifty-one focus areas, the camera will only use this area for auto focus.

Front of camera controls

On the left side of the camera front are two buttons, both of these buttons can be customized to perform a range of functions via CSM f4 and f5. By default the top button is is depth of field preview, press and hold this button to stop the lens down to the selected aperture, the button button performs flash value lock. On the right side of the camera front is the focus mode dial and above this the flash mode / compensation button.

Buttons (combined with a command dial)

  Main command dial (rear) Sub command dial (front)
Flash sync mode

 • Front-curtain sync (normal)
 • Slow sync
 • Rear-curtain sync
 • Red-eye reduction
 • Red-eye reduction with slow sync
Flash exposure compensation

 • -3.0 EV to +1.0 EV
 • 0.3, 0.5 or 1 EV steps (CSM b2)

Focus Mode selector

S Single servo AF (AF-S)

Camera focus when shutter release button is half pressed and locks when the in-focus indicator (a solid dot) appears on the viewfinder status LCD. If the subject is moving when the shutter release button is half pressed the camera will focus track until a lock can be obtained. In this mode the default is for focus priority, this means that a shot can only be taken with a good focus lock, you can also choose release priority via CSM a2.
C Continuous servo AF (AF-C)

The camera will focus continuously while the shutter release button is half pressed, if the subject moves the camera will adjust focus to compensate. In this mode the default is for release priority, this means that a shot will be taken whether or not the camera has a good focus lock, you can also choose focus priority via CSM a1.
M Manual Focus

Focusing is achieved manually by turning the lens manual focus ring. Focus indicator on the viewfinder status LCD will still indicate whether or not the selected manual focus is the same as the calculated auto focus. This mode is always release priority.

Displays

We've already described the technical side of D300's new VGA resolution monitor, its super-fine pixel pitch means extremely detailed images in playback and live view, it delivers fine gradations and a smooth display with no visible gaps between pixels. This may sound like a marketing tag line but viewing images on the D300's high resolution screen is far more photo-realistic and easier on the eye, a notable advantage is that in playback you don't need to zoom into images as much to be sure of sharpness / focus accuracy as the extra resolution reveals this at lower magnification.

Shooting information

Press the info button in shooting mode (except live view) to show a full screen 'shooting information' display, we first saw a screen like this implemented in the D40 and there are certainly circumstances where having this level of information on one single screen can be very useful. The D300's shooting information screen automatically (or optionally manually) switches from light background to dark background in low light situations. My only gripe with this feature was that the information display disappears as soon as you half-press the shutter release button and does not return, you have to press info again, it would have been nice to have a 'persistent shooting information' custom function.

Light screen background Dark screen background (low light)

Record Review

You can choose for the D300 to display a review of the image taken immediately after shutter release. The type of display used will be the same as the last mode used in playback (histogram, thumbnail index, details etc.). Note that record review has all of the functionality of playback mode, this means its easy to delete, magnify, protect etc. The image will remain on the screen for the 'Monitor off delay' CSM c4 or until you half-press the shutter release.

Playback

Press the Playback button to enter playback mode, press the multi selector up or down to change display mode, up to six different pages of display detail are available. You can change the amount of information available in the basic and detailed photo display modes including optional blinking highlights and focus point display as well as the three pages of shooting information in detail mode. Note that you can switch the up/down and left/right functions of the multi selector via CSM f3 and that you can choose to also use the command dials to browse / change page via CSM f7.

Basic photo display: file number, folder, filename, date & time, quality, size

Basic photo display with optional Highlights and Focus point enabled

Detailed photo display: image thumbnail, histogram, exposure information and other data as per default display

Detailed photo display optional RGB histogram page
Detailed photo display data 1: metering mode, shutter speed, aperture, exposure mode, ISO, exposure compensation, focal length, lens used, AF mode, VR mode, flash mode and flash compensation Detailed photo display data 2: white balance & fine tuning, color space, picture control and image parameter adjustments
 
Detailed photo display data 3: noise reduction, active d-lighting, retouching, comment  

Playback Zoom

Unlike the D200 the D300 now has dedicated zoom-in and zoom-out buttons, with an image displayed simply press zoom-in to begin magnifying. While magnified use the multi selector to move around the image, the navigation box and loupe at the bottom right of the image (as can be seen below) disappears after a couple of seconds. There are eight magnification levels, on the D300's high resolution screen the last two go beyond 1:1 and provide an enlarged pixelated view.

Playback thumbnail views

The D300 has two levels of thumbnail view, now easier thanks to the dedicated zoom-out button, just press to switch to the initial 2x2 (4 image) view and press again for the 3x3 (9 image view). Use the multi selector to move around the index. Note that if you have the 'Rotate Tall' option enabled images taken in the portrait orientation are displayed vertically (we had this option turned off in the captures below).

One click right for a 2 x 2 thumbnail view Two clicks right for a 3 x 3 thumbnail view

Other Playback displays

After pressing the delete button just press once more to confirm the deletion An example of a protected image

Live view

Nikon's live view implementation on the D300 is one of the most usable and comprehensive to date, the high resolution screen and addition of contrast detect auto focus, in addition to the now typical mirror down / mirror up passive auto focus system, mean that are more situations where live view becomes useful.

Live view (auto focus) mode

As noted the D300 supports two AF methods which Nikon call Tripod and Hand-held modes, both require you to use the AF-ON button to achieve auto focus. In Tripod mode auto-focus is achieved using the main image sensor in a "contrast detect" manner (the same as a compact camera), this tends to be slower than normal passive AF but does maintain the live view. In Tripod mode you can move the AF point anywhere within the frame using the multi-selector. In Hand-held mode the live view blanks out when you press AF-ON, the mirror drops and the camera focuses using the normal "passive" auto-focus sensor. Live view only returns when you release the AF-ON button, I personally found this a bit annoying, it should return as soon as the camera achieves AF lock.

Live view in Tripod mode Live view in Hand-held mode

Live view display modes

Press the info button to remove any overlaid information, you can also optionally enable grid lines which are in the same position as the grid lines shown on the viewfinder focusing screen.

Default live view display Live view without information
Live view with grid lines and information Live view with grid lines but without information

Live view magnification

Just as in playback mode you can magnify live view by pressing the zoom-in button (or back out again with zoom-out). While magnified you can use the multi-selector to move around the live image. The D300 appears to be able to go all the way to 1:1 magnification (one pixel on the sensor for one pixel on the LCD) which makes it easy to achieve absolutely perfect focus.

Live view focus, magnify and exposure video clip

The following video clip shows live view in use to manually focus roughly, magnify to focus more accurately, zoom out, take an exposure and finally magnify the image in record review. (We wanted to provide a video clip of contrast detect AF but on our pre-production unit color reproduction suffered during AF so we chose to focus manually). Just click on the play button below to start the video.

HDMI output / High Definition display

Announced just a few days before the Sony DSLR-A700 the Nikon D3 and D300 were officially the first digital cameras with HDMI digital high definition video output. From the setup menu you can select between Auto, 480p, 576p, 720p or 1080i output, in this section we are only going to examine the 720p and 1080i options. HDMI output works in any mode which would otherwise use the LCD monitor; shooting information, menus, live view and playback. It has to be said that using live view over HDMI to a HD LCD or Plasma screen really is an amazing experience and could be extremely useful in studio photography situations. Below we have provided captures of HDMI output in both 720p (1280 x 720) and 1080i (1920 x 1080) resolutions just to give you a sense of the amount of detail visible. My only disappointment would be that there didn't seem to be a way to display the image without any shooting information (except when magnifying), this means that the default display (top image below) is only using 74% of screen width (theoretically, given aspect ratio differences this could be 84% without the status lines at the bottom).

Normal playback via HDMI (720p; 137 KB or 1080i; 241 KB)
Zoomed playback via HDMI (720p; 108 KB or 1080i; 207 KB)

High definition video clips

Below are two short high definition video clips captured via HDMI from the D300 (720p; 1280 x 720). The first taken in live view, manually focusing and using live view magnification to fine tune the focus point, the second a quick run-through in playback mode. Note that these videos, while compressed, are still large.

Live view over HDMI video clip (720p; Apple Quicktime; 9,979 KB)
Playback over HDMI video clip (720p; Apple Quicktime; 2,500 KB)

Menus

The D300's menus are similar to the D200 but as they are designed for the larger (and higher resolution) LCD they feature a slightly smaller font size which allows each menu page to show eight options over the D200's seven. Navigation remains the same, the multi-way controller and Enter button. You can also configure the command dials to provide menu navigation.

Shooting / CSM menu banks

When working in the Shooting or CSM menus you are in actual fact changing the settings of a 'menu bank'. There are four banks for each of the Shooting and Custom function menus; A to D, each bank can be given a more meaningful label and the currently selected bank letter is indicated on the top control panel for quick reference. This is very useful for quickly switching between a type of shot or situation.

Help pages

The D300 has the same help feature we first saw on the D2X, a setting with available help is indicated by a circular question mark icon (?) at the bottom left of the screen. Press and hold the protect button to display a context sensitive help page.

Playback Menu

Option Values / Actions Notes
Delete  • Selected
 • All

- Thumbnail selection

Playback folder  • ND300
 • All
 • Current
 
Hide image  • Select / set
 • Deselect all?
- Thumbnail selection
Display mode  • Basic photo info
Highlights
Focus point
 • Detailed photo info
RGB Histogram
Data
Allows you to toggle different items of information shown in either basic or detailed photo display modes.
Image review  • Off
 • On
 
After delete  • Show next
 • Show previous
 • Continue as before
 
Rotate tall  • Off
 • On
When enabled portrait shots appear vertically orientated.
Slide show  • Start
 • Frame interval
2 sec
3 sec
5 sec
10 sec
 
Print set (DPOF)  • Select / set
 • Cancel Order
- Thumbnail selection

Shooting Menu

A green superscript one (¹) indicates the default setting.

Option Values / Actions Notes / Sub options
Shooting menu bank  • A ¹
 • B
 • C
 • D
 • Rename
Text entry

Four banks of settings can be memorized and quickly switched, each bank can be labeled (see above).

Reset shooting menu  • Yes
 • No
 
Active folder  • New folder number
 • Select folder
- Create new folder.
File naming  • File naming
Text entry
Change name prefix (default DSC).
Image quality  • NEF (RAW) + JPEG Fine
 • NEF (RAW) + JPEG Normal
 • NEF (RAW) + JPEG Basic
 • NEF (RAW)
 • TIFF (RGB)
 • JPEG Fine
 • JPEG Normal ¹
 • JPEG Basic
Select image quality.
Image size  • Large ¹
 • Medium
 • Small
- 4288 x 2848 / 12.2 M
- 3216 x 2136 / 6.9 M
- 2144 x 1424 / 3.1 M
JPEG compression  • Size priority ¹
 • Optimal quality
NEF (RAW) recording  • Type
Lossless compressed ¹
Compressed
Uncompressed
 • NEF (RAW) bit depth
12-bit ¹
14-bit
Set the type of compression used in the NEF file as well as the bit-depth recorded. Note that 14-bit NEF files are about 1.3 times larger than 12-bit NEF and that continuous shooting rate drops to 2.5 fps.
White balance  • Auto ¹
 • Incandescent
 • Fluorescent
 • Direct Sunlight
 • Flash
 • Cloudy
 • Shade
 • Choose color temp.
 • Preset manual
- A-B, G-M grid to fine tune WB
- "
- "
- "
- "
- "
- "
- 2500 K - 10000 K
- Select / program preset WB
Set Picture Control  • Standard
Quick adjust (-2 to +2)
Sharpening (A, 0 to 9)
Contrast (A, -3 to +3)
Brightness (-1 to +1)
Saturation (A, -3 to +3)
Hue (-3 to +3)
 • Neutral
Quick adjust (-2 to +2)
Sharpening (A, 0 to 9)
Contrast (A, -3 to +3)
Brightness (-1 to +1)
Saturation (A, -3 to +3)
Hue (-3 to +3)
 • Vivid
Quick adjust (-2 to +2)
Sharpening (A, 0 to 9)
Contrast (A, -3 to +3)
Brightness (-1 to +1)
Saturation (A, -3 to +3)
Hue (-3 to +3)
 • Monochrome
Sharpening (A, 0 to 9)
Contrast (A, -3 to +3)
Brightness (-1 to +1)
Filter (Off, Y, O, R, G)
Toning (10 options)
 • [custom]
- Default (3, 0, 0, 0, 0)






- Default (2, 0, 0, 0, 0)






- Default (4, 0, 0, 0, 0)






- Default (3, 0, 0, 0, 0)
Manage Picture Control  • Save/edit
 • Rename
 • Delete
 • Load/save

- Create custom Picture Control sets


- Load / save from card

Color Space  • sRGB ¹
 • Adobe RGB
 
Active D-Lighting  • Enhanced
 • Normal
 • Moderate
 • Off ¹
 
Long exp. NR  • On
 • Off ¹
Enables dark frame subtraction NR for exposures of 1/2 sec or longer.
High ISO NR  • High
 • Normal
 • Low
 • Off ¹
 
ISO sensitivity settings  • ISO
LO 1
LO 0.7
LO 0.3
200 ¹
250
320
400
500
640
800
1000
1250
1600
2000
2500
3200
HI 0.3
HI 0.7
HI 1.0
 • ISO sensitivity auto control
On / Off ¹
Maximum sensitivity
400
800
1600
3200
HI 1 ¹
Minimum shutter speed
1/250 - 1 sec
Available sensitivities depend on ISO step custom setting (CSM b2).
Live view  • Live view mode
Hand-held
Tripod
 • Release mode
Single frame
Continuous low-speed
Continuous high-speed

- Phase detect AF
- Contrast detect AF
Multiple exposure  • Done
 • Number of shots
2 - 10
 • Auto gain
On
Off
Create a new image from between two and ten exposures.
Interval timer shooting  • Start
Now
Start time
 • Interval
[hh:mm:ss]
 • Select Intvl*Shots
[000] x [0] = 0001
 • Start
Off
On
Time lapse / interval shooting.
Non-CPU Lens Data  • Focal length
N/A
6 - 45 mm
50 - 180 mm
200 - 4000 mm
 • Maximum aperture
N/A
F1.2 - F22
 

Menus (contd.)

The cameras custom settings are split into six alphabetical color coded categories, this makes it easier to remember a specific option and quicker to enter the custom settings menu at the correct position. You can still scroll through all custom settings options as one big menu if you wish. Note that on this menu an asterisk (*) next to a custom setting means that it has been changed to something other than the camera default. A green superscript one (¹) indicates the default setting.

Custom Settings Menu (a: Autofocus)

Option Values / Actions Notes
a1 AF-C priority selection  • Release ¹
 • Release + focus
 • Focus

Defines if camera must have focus lock before shutter release.

a2 AF-S priority selection  • Focus ¹
 • Release
Defines if focus lock is required before shutter release.
a3 Dynamic AF area  • 9 points ¹
 • 21 points
 • 51 points
 • 51 points (3D-tracking)
 
a4 Focus tracking with lock-on  • Long
 • Normal ¹
 • Short
 • Off

Controls how focusing is affected by subject distance changing and how quickly the system should react.

a5 AF activation  • Shutter / AF-ON ¹
 • AF-ON Only
 
a6 AF point illumination  • Auto ¹
 • Off
 • On
 
a7 Focus point wrap-around  • Wrap
 • No wrap ¹
 
a8 AF point selection  • 51 points ¹
 • 11 points
 
a9 Built-in AF-assist illuminator  • On ¹
 • Off
Controls the built-in AF assist illuminator.
a10 AF-ON for MB-D10  • AF-ON ¹
 • AE/AF-L lock
 • AE lock (reset on rel.)
 • AE lock (hold)
 • AF lock only
 • Same as FUNC button
Customize the function of the AF-ON button on the MB-D10 vertical-grip / battery pack.

Custom Settings Menu (b: Metering / exposure)

Option Values / Actions Notes
b1 ISO sensitivity step value  • 1/3 step ¹
 • 1/2 step
 • 1 step
Set the steps used for selection of ISO sensitivity.
b2 EV steps for exposure ctl.  • 1/3 step ¹
 • 1/2 step
 • 1 step
 
b3 Exp comp/fine tune  • 1/3 step ¹
 • 1/2 step
 • 1 step
 
b4 Easy exposure compens.  • On (Auto reset)
 • On
 • Off ¹
Enables 'Easy Exposure Compensation' which can be accessed by turning a dial.
b5 Center weight area  • 6 mm
 • 8 mm ¹
 • 10 mm
 • 13 mm
 • Average
 
b6 Fine tune exposure  • Yes
Matrix metering
Center-weighted
Spot metering
 • No ¹
Allows you to fine tune metered exposure values in the range of -1.0 EV to +1.0 EV in 1/6 EV steps.

Custom Settings Menu (c: Timers / AE Lock)

Option Values / Actions Notes
c1 Shutter-release butt. AE-L  • On
 • Off ¹

Define lock AE during shutter release half-press.

c2 Auto meter-off delay  • 4 s
 • 6 s ¹
 • 8 s
 • 16 s
 • 30 s
 • 1 min
 • 5 min
 • 10 min
 • 30 min
 • No Limit
 
c3 Self-timer delay  • 2 s
 • 5 s
 • 10 s ¹
 • 20 s
 
c4 Monitor off delay  • 10 s
 • 20 s ¹
 • 1 m
 • 5 m
 • 10 m
 

Custom Settings Menu (d: Shooting / display)

Option Values / Actions Notes
d1 Beep

 • High ¹
 • Low
 • Off


d2 Viewfinder grid display

 • Off ¹
 • On

Enables a 'thirds' grid overlay on the focusing screen.

d3 Viewfinder warning display

 • On ¹
 • Off


d4 CL mode shooting speed

 • 7 fps
 • 6 fps
 • 5 fps
 • 4 fps
 • 3 fps ¹
 • 2 fps
 • 1 fps


d5 Max. continuous release  • 1 - 100 Maximum shots in a burst.
d6 File Number Sequence  • On ¹
 • Off
 • Reset
 
d7 Shooting info display  • Auto
 • Manual
Defines if shooting info display should automatically change color in dark
d8 LCD illumination  • Off ¹
 • On
When on any button will light the control panel.
d9 Exposure delay mode  • Off ¹
 • On
Shutter release is delayed 1.0 sec to avoid vibration.
d10 MB-D10 battery type  • LR6 (AA, Alkaline) ¹
 • HR6 (AA, Ni-MH)
 • FR6 (AA, Lithium)
 • ZR6 (AA, Ni-Mn)
Tell the camera what type of batteries are being used in the optional vertical grip.
d11 Battery order  • Use MB-D10 batt first
 • Use camera batt first
 

Custom Settings Menu (e: Bracketing / flash)

Option Values / Actions Notes
e1 Flash sync speed

 • 1/320 (Auto FP)
 • 1/250 (Auto FP)
 • 1/250 ¹
 • 1/200
 • 1/160
 • 1/125
 • 1/100
 • 1/80
 • 1/60

e2 Flash shutter speed  • 1/60 s ¹
 • 1/30 s
 • 1/15 s
 • 1/8 s
 • 1/4 s
 • 1/2 s
 • 1 s
 • 2 s
 • 4 s
 • 8 s
 • 15 s
 • 30 s
Slowest flash shutter speed.
e3 Flash cntrl for built-in flash  • TTL ¹
 • Manual
 • Repeating Flash
 • Commander Mode
Set the mode for the built-in flash.
e4 Modeling flash  • On ¹
 • Off
DOF preview button.
e5 Auto bracketing set  • AE & Flash ¹
 • AE only
 • Flash only
 • WB bracketing
 
e6 Auto bracketing (Mode M)  • Flash / Speed ¹
 • Flash / Speed / Apt.
 • Flash / Aperture
 • Flash Only
 
e7 Bracketing order  • Meter > Under > Over ¹
 • Under > Meter > Over
 
e8 Auto BKT Selection  • Manual Value Select ¹
 • Preset Value Select
 

Custom Settings Menu (f: Controls)

Option Values / Actions Notes
f1 Multi selector center button

 • Shooting mode
Select cent. focus pt ¹
Highlight act. focus pt
Not Used
 • Playback mode
Thumbnail On/Off ¹
Histogram On/Off
Zoom On/Off
Choose folder

Multi selector center button function.

f2 Multi selector  • Reset meter-off delay
 • Do nothing ¹
 
f3 Photo info / playback  • Info <>, PB ^v
 • Info ^v, PB <> ¹
Multi selector role in single image playback.
f4 Assign FUNC button

 • FUNC button press
Preview
FV Lock ¹
AE/AF lock
AE lock only
AE lock (reset on rel.)
AE lock (hold)
AF lock only
Flash off
Bracketing burst
Matrix metering
Center-weighted mtr.
Spot metering
None
 • FUNC button + dials
1 step spd / aperture
Choose non-CPU lens
Auto bracketing
Dynamic AF area
None ¹

Define the function of the FUNC button (front of the camera below the DOF preview button), both a single press and a hold with dial turn.
f5 Assign preview button

 • Preview button press
Preview ¹
FV Lock
AE/AF lock
AE lock only
AE lock (reset on rel.)
AE lock (hold)
AF lock only
Flash off
Bracketing burst
Matrix metering
Center-weighted mtr.
Spot metering
None
 • Preview button + dials
1 step spd / aperture
Choose non-CPU lens
Auto bracketing
Dynamic AF area
None ¹

Define the function of the preview button (front of the camera above the FUNC button), both a single press and a hold with dial turn.
f6 Assign AE-L/AF-L button  • Preview button press
Preview ¹
FV Lock
AE/AF lock
AE lock only
AE lock (reset on rel.)
AE lock (hold)
AF lock only
Flash off
Bracketing burst
Matrix metering
Center-weighted mtr.
Spot metering
None
 • Preview button + dials
Choose non-CPU lens
Auto bracketing
Dynamic AF area
None ¹
 
f7 Customize command dials  • Reverse rotation
Yes
No ¹
 • Change main / sub
On
Off ¹
 • Aperture setting
Sub-command dial ¹
Aperture ring
 • Menus and Playback
On
Off ¹
 
f8 Release button to use dial  • Yes
 • No ¹
 
f9 No memory card?  • Release locked ¹
 • Enable release
 
f10 Reverse indicators  • + ---- 0 ---- - ¹
 • - ---- 0 ---- +
 

Menus (contd.)

Setup Menu

Option Values / Actions Notes
Format memory card  • Yes
 • No

LCD brightness  • -3 to +3  
Clean image sensor  • Clean now
 • Clean at startup / shut.
Clean at startup
Clean at shutdown
Clean at start & shut
Cleaning off
 
Lock mirror up for cleaning  • Start  
Video Mode  • NTSC
 • PAL
 
HDMI  • Auto
 • 480p
 • 576p
 • 720p
 • 1080i
 
World Time  • Time zone
Select
 • Date and time
Date set
Time set
 • Date format
yy/mm/dd
mm/dd/yy
dd/mm/yy
 • Daylight saving time
Off
On
 
Language  • German
 • English
 • Spanish
 • Finnish
 • French
 • Italian
 • Dutch
 • Polish
 • Portuguese
 • Russian
 • Swedish
 • Chinese Traditional
 • Chinese Simplified
 • Japanese
 • Korean
 
Image comment  • Done
 • Input comment
Text entry
 • Attach comment

When enabled the comment is written into the header of each image.

Auto image rotation  • On
 • Off
 
USB  • Mass Storage
 • MTP / PTP
 
Dust off ref photo  • Start
 • Clean sensor then start
Used to capture a 'dust reference image' for the 'Dust Off' feature of Nikon Capture. (RAW only).
Battery Info  • Battery meter
 • Picture meter
 • Charging life
Information display only.
Wireless transmitter    
Image authentication  • On
 • Off
 
Save/load settings  • Save settings
 • Load settings
 
GPS  • Auto meter off
 • Position
 
Non-CPU lens data  • Done
 • Lens number (1 - 9)
 • Focal length (6 - 4000)
 • Max aperture (F1.2 - F22)
 
AF fine tune  • AF fine tune (On/Off)
Off
On
 • Saved value (+/- 20)
 • Default (+/- 20)
 • List saved values
 
Firmware Version  • Version No.
A x.00
B x.00
Information display only.
by facestar 2007. 12. 28. 13:35

Canon EOS 40D Review, Phil Askey, October 2007

Review based on a production Canon EOS 40D

The EOS 40D becomes the sixth Canon 'prosumer' digital SLR, a line which started back in 2000 with the EOS D30, and how far we've come. It's been eighteen months since the EOS 30D and although on the surface the 40D looks like a fairly subtle upgrade there's a lot that makes this an even better camera. Of course we expect a step up in megapixels, and so the 40D comes with a ten million pixel CMOS sensor with the same sort of dust reduction as the EOS 400D, an ultrasonic platform which shakes the low pass filter. Other improvements bring the EOS 40D closer into line with the EOS-1D series, these include a move to the same page-by-page menu system, both RAW and sRAW (2.5 MP), 14-bit A/D converter and 14-bit RAW, cross-type AF points for F5.6 or faster lenses, a larger and brighter viewfinder, interchangeable focusing screens, a larger LCD monitor (3.0") and faster continuous shooting (6.5 fps).

Model line history

Model
Announced
Effective pixels
Auto focus
Continuous (JPEG) LCD monitor
EOS D30 Apr 2000 3.1 mp 3 point 3.0 fps, 3 frames 1.8"
EOS D60 Feb 2002 6.3 mp 3 point 3.3 fps, 8 frames 1.8"
EOS 10D Feb 2003 6.3 mp 7 point 3.3 fps, 9 frames 1.8"
EOS 20D Aug 2004 8.2 mp 9 point 5.0 fps, 23 frames 1.8"
EOS 30D Feb 2006 8.2 mp 9 point 5.0 / 3.0 fps, 30 frames 2.5"
EOS 40D Aug 2007 10.1 mp 9 point 6.5 / 3.0 fps, 75 frames 3.0" (Live view)

Canon EOS 40D vs. EOS 30D feature and specification differences

 
Canon EOS 40D
Canon EOS 40D
Canon EOS 30D
Canon EOS 30D
Weatherproof Battery door and storage compartment No
Sensor • 10.1 million effective pixels
• 5.7 µm pixel pitch
• 8.2 million effective pixels
• 6.4 µm pixel pitch
A/D converter 14-bit 12-bit
Image sizes • 3888 x 2592
• 2816 x 1880
• 1936 x 1288
• 3504 x 2336
• 2544 x 1696
• 1728 x 1152
RAW files • CR2 format, 14-bit
• RAW full resolution
• sRAW (2.5 MP)
CR2 format, 12-bit
RAW full resolution
Image processor DIGIC III DIGIC II
Dust reduction High speed vibration of filter None
Auto focus • 9-point TTL CMOS sensor
• Points cross-type for F5.6 or faster lens
• Center point additionally sensitive with lenses of F2.8 or faster
9-point TTL CMOS sensor
Metering range 0.0 to 20 EV 1.0 to 20 EV
Spot metering Approx. 3.8% at center Approx. 3.5% at center
Auto ISO ISO 400 to 800 / 100 to 800 depending on exposure mode ISO 100 to 400
Kelvin WB 2500 - 10000 K in 100 K steps 2800 - 10000 K in 100 K steps
Viewfinder • 95% frame coverage
• Magnification: 0.95x
• Eyepoint: 22 mm
• 95% frame coverage
• Magnification: 0.90x
• Eyepoint: 20 mm
Focusing screen • Interchangeable precision matte
• Two other screens available
• Fixed precision matte
Viewfinder info Now includes ISO sensitivity, B&W icon  
LCD monitor • 3.0 " TFT LCD
• 230,000 pixels
• 2.5 " TFT LCD
• 230,000 pixels
LCD Live View Yes, including mirror-drop AF No
Main LCD settings display When changing settings such as AF mode or White Balance No
Tilt correction Yes No
Opening CF door Warning message shown Power down, loses images
Mirror lock-up Single or multiple exposures Single exposures
Mirror mechanism Motor up / down, quieter, faster Spring up / motor down
Playback modes Exposure line at top in single image view No exposure in single image view
User modes Three custom user modes on mode dial No user modes
High-speed continuous • 6.5 fps
• Up to 75 JPEG Large/Fine images
• 5.0 fps
• Up to 30 JPEG Large/Fine images
Portrait grip WFT-E3/E3A, BP-E2N, BP-E2

BP-E2

Wireless connectivity • WFT-E3/E3A
• Integrates as vertical hand grip
• WFT-E1/E1A
• No grip
Menu UI Same as EOS-1D series Same as previous xxD series
Menu languages 18 15
Custom functions 24 19
AF-ON button Rear 'under thumb' None
Rear buttons • Direct print
• Menu
• Play
• Erase
• Jump
• Info
• Picture Style
• Direct print
• Menu
• Info
• Jump
• Play
• Erase
Top right buttons • Lamp
• Metering / WB
• AF / Drive
• ISO / Flash comp.
• Lamp
• AF / WB
• Drive / ISO
• Metering / Flash comp.
Dimensions 146 x 108 x 74 mm(5.7 x 4.2 x 2.9 in) 144 x 106 x 74 mm (5.6 x 4.2 x 2.9 in)
Weight • No battery: 740 g (1.6 lb)
• With battery: 822 g (1.8 lb)
• No battery: 706 g (1.6 lb)
• With battery: 785 g (1.7 lb

Canon EOS 40D specifications

List price
(body only)
• US: $ 1,299
• EU: € 1,299
Body material Magnesium alloy
Sensor * • 22.2 x 14.8 mm CMOS sensor
• RGB Color Filter Array
• Built-in fixed low-pass filter (with self-cleaning unit)
• 10.5 million total pixels
• 10.1 million effective pixels
• 5.7 µm pixel pitch
• 3:2 aspect ratio
Image processor * DIGIC III
A/D conversion * 14 bit
Image sizes * • 3888 x 2592 (L; 10.1 MP)
• 2816 x 1880 (M; 5.3 MP)
• 1936 x 1288 (S; 2.5 MP)
File formats

• RAW (.CR2; 14-bit *)
• JPEG (EXIF 2.21) - Fine / Normal
• RAW + JPEG (separate files)
sRAW (2.5 MP) *

File sizes (approx.) * • JPEG L/Fine: 3.5 MB
• JPEG M/Fine: 2.1 MB
• JPEG S/Fine: 1.2 MB
• RAW: 12.4 MB
• sRAW: 7.1 MB
Lenses • Canon EF / EF-S lens mount
• 1.6x field of view crop
Dust reduction * • "EOS Integrated Cleaning System"
• Self-cleaning sensor unit (filter in front of sensor vibrates at high frequency at start-up and shutdown - can be disabled)
• Dust Delete Data - Data from a test shot is used to 'map' dust spots and can be later removed using Canon DPP Software
Auto focus • 9-point TTL CMOS sensor
• All points cross-type for lenses of F5.6 or faster *
• Center point additionally sensitive with lenses of F2.8 or faster *
• AF working range: -0.5 - 18 EV (at 23°C, ISO 100)
Focus modes • One shot AF
• AI Servo AF
• AI Focus AF
• Manual focus
AF point selection • Auto
• Manual
AF assist • Stroboscopic flash
• 4.0 m range (at center)
Metering • TTL 35 zone SPC
• Metering range: EV 0.0 - 20 EV *
Metering modes

• Evaluative 35 zone
• Partial (9% at center)
• Spot metering (approx. 3.8% at center *)
• Center-weighted average

AE lock • Auto: One Shot AF with evaluative metering
• Manual: AE lock button
Exposure compensation • +/-2.0 EV
• 0.3 or 0.5 EV increments
Exposure bracketing • +/- 2.0 EV
• 0.3 or 0.5 EV increments
Sensitivity

• Auto ISO (see below) *
• ISO 100 - 1600
• 0.3 or 1.0 EV increments
• ISO 3200 (Enhanced H)

Auto ISO * • P, Av, A-Dep: ISO 400 - 800 (will drop to ISO 100 to avoid over-exposure)
• Tv: ISO 400 (will use 100 - 800 if required)
• M: ISO 400
• Scene modes (apart from Sport and Portrait): ISO 100 - 800
• Sport scene mode: ISO 400 - 800
• Portrait scene mode: ISO 100
• With flash (all modes): ISO 400
Shutter • Focal-plane shutter
• 100,000 exposure durability
• 30 - 1/8000 sec
• 0.3 or 0.5 EV increments
• Flash X-Sync: 1/250 sec
• Bulb
Aperture values • F1.0 - F91
• 0.3 or 0.5 EV increments
• Actual aperture range depends on lens used
Noise reduction • Long exposure (1 sec or longer)
• Optional for High ISO (default Off)
White balance • Auto
• Daylight
• Shade
• Cloudy
• Tungsten
• Fluorescent
• Flash
• Custom
• Kelvin (2500 * - 10000 K in 100 K steps)
WB bracketing • +/-3 levels
• 3 images
• Blue / Amber or Magenta / Green bias
WB shift • Blue (-9) To Amber (+9)
• Magenta (-9) to Green (+9)
Picture style • Standard
• Portrait
• Landscape
• Neutral
• Faithful
• Monochrome
• User def. 1
• User def. 2
• User def. 3
Custom image parameters • Sharpness: 0 to 7
• Contrast: -4 to +4
• Saturation: -4 to +4
• Color tone: -4 to +4
• B&W filter: N, Ye, Or, R, G
• B&W tone: N, S, B, P, G
Color space • sRGB
• Adobe RGB
Viewfinder • Eye-level pentaprism
• 95% frame coverage
• Magnification: 0.95x * (-1 diopter with 50 mm lens at infinity)
• Eyepoint: 22 mm *
• Interchangeable focusing screen Ef-A standard (2 other types optional) *
• Dioptric adjustment: -3.0 to +1.0 diopter
Focusing screens
(optional)
• Ef-A (Standard Precision Matte - included)
• Ef-D (Precision Matte with grid)
• Ef-S (Super Precision Matte for easier manual focus)
Mirror • Quick-return half mirror (transmission:reflection ratio 40:60)
• Mirror lock-up (once or multiple exposures)
Viewfinder info • AF points
• Focus confirmation light
• ISO sensitivity *
• Shutter speed
• Aperture
• Manual exposure
• AE Lock
• Exposure compensation amount
• AEB level
• Spot metering area
• Flash ready
• Red-eye reduction lamp on
• High-speed sync
• FE Lock
• Flash compensation amount
• ISO speed (while changing)
• WB correction (while changing)
• B&W mode icon *
• Warnings
• Maximum burst for continuous shooting
• Buffer space
LCD monitor * • 3.0 " TFT LCD
• 230,000 pixels
• 7 brightness levels
LCD Live view *

• Live TTL display of scene from CMOS image sensor
• 100% frame coverage
• Real-time evaluative metering using CMOS image sensor
• Best view or exposure simulation
• Grid optional (thirds)
• Magnify optional (5x or 10x at AF point)
• Optional Auto-focus with mirror-down / mirror-up sequence
• Two modes; normal and quieter
• Remote live view using EOS Utility 2.0 (via USB or WiFi/Ethernet using WFT)
• Manual focus only

Record review • Off
• On (histogram via INFO button)
• Display mode same as last used Play mode
• 2 / 4 / 8 sec / Hold
Playback modes *

1. Single image with exposure, file number, storage slot
2. As 1 but also image count and quality
3. Detailed exposure information, thumbnail and luminance histogram
4. Less detailed exposure info., thumbnail, luminance and RGB histograms

Playback features • Optional blinking highlight alert *
• Optional AF point display *
• Magnified view (up to 10x)
• 2x2 * or 3x3 thumbnail index
• Jump (by 1, 10, 100 images / by screen or date)
• Delete / Protect
Flash • Auto pop-up E-TTL II auto flash
• FOV coverage up to 17 mm (27 mm equiv.)
• Guide number approx 13 m / 43 ft (ISO 100)
• Cycle time approx. 3 sec
• Flash compensation +/-2.0 EV in 0.3 or 0.5 EV increments
• X-Sync: 1/250 sec
External flash • E-TTL II auto flash with EX-series Speedlites
• In-camera flash configuration (currently only 580 EX II) *
• Wireless multi-flash support
• PC Sync
Shooting modes

• Auto
• Program AE (P)
• Shutter priority AE (Tv)
• Aperture priority AE (Av)
• Manual (M)
• Auto depth-of-field
• Portrait
• Landscape
• Close-up
• Sports
• Night portrait
• Flash off
• Camera user settings 1 *
• Camera user settings 2 *
• Camera user settings 3 *

Drive modes

• Single
• High-speed continuous: 6.5 fps *
• Low-speed continuous: 3 fps
• Self-timer: 2 or 10 sec (3 sec with mirror lock-up)

Burst buffer * • Large/Fine JPEG: 75 frames
• RAW: 17 frames
• RAW+JPEG: 14 frames
Orientation sensor Yes
Auto rotation * • On (recorded and LCD display)
• On (recorded only)
• Off
Custom functions * 24 custom functions in 4 groups
Menu languages *

• English
• German
• French
• Dutch
• Danish
• Portuguese
• Finnish
• Italian
• Norwegian
• Swedish
• Spanish
• Greek
• Russian
• Polish
• Simplified Chinese
• Traditional Chinese
• Korean
• Japanese

Firmware User upgradable
Portrait grip • Optional WFT-E3/E3A *
• Optional BP-E2N battery grip *
• Optional BP-E2 battery grip
Connectivity

• USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
• Video out
• N3 type wired remote control
• PC Sync flash terminal
• Communication terminal on base for WFT-E3/E3A *

Storage • Compact Flash Type I or II (inc. FAT32)
• Canon Original Data Security Kit supported ("Original Image Data")
• No CF card supplied
Power • Lithium-Ion BP-511A rechargeable battery (supplied & charger)
• Supports BP-511 / BP-511A / BP-512 / BP-514
• CR2016 Lithium battery (date/time backup)
• Optional AC adapter
Wireless connectivity *
(optional WFT-E3/E3A)
• Mounts on base of camera and also acts as vertical grip
• Has its own BP-511A battery
• Wireless 802.11b / 802.11g
• Wireless security: WEP, TKIP/AES, WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK
• Wireless methods: Infrastructure or Ad Hoc
• Wired ethernet (100 Base-TX)
• Transfer: FTP, PTP (remote control by computer), HTTP (view / remote fire)
• USB host capable: External hard drives, flash drives
• USB comms: GPS devices (records coordinates and altitude in image header)
Dimensions * 146 x 108 x 74 mm (5.7 x 4.2 x 2.9 in)
Weight * • No battery: 740 g (1.6 lb)
• With battery: 822 g (1.8 lb)

* New or changed compared to the EOS 30D

What's new / changed (key points)

10 megapixel CMOS sensor
It's been three years since we saw an increase in resolution in this model line, Canon went to eight megapixels with the EOS 20D in August 2004 but stuck with the same sensor for the EOS 30D. No surprises then to see a two megapixel upgrade and as usual Canon are (likely correctly) claiming that despite smaller photosites noise performance is in line with the EOS 30D due to improvements in sensor design.
EOS Integrated Cleaning System
With the introduction of the EOS 40D and EOS-1Ds Mark III Canon can now claim that their entire DSLR product line has dust reduction built-in. We have anti-static coatings and a piezoelectric element which shakes the front facing part of the low pass filter at startup and shutdown (you can disable this or operate it manually). It's worth noting that the exact design of the moving parts appears to have changed slightly since the EOS 400D.
DIGIC III image processor, 14-bit ADC
As with the EOS-1D Mark III and EOS-1Ds Mark III the EOS 40D gets the DIGIC III processor (although in this case only one of them). This enables various new features including Live View, faster image processing and we presume improved image quality.
Faster continuous shooting, larger buffer
Up from five frames per second the EOS 40D manages six and a half frames per second and can buffer more than twice the images resulting in a 75 image burst in 11.5 seconds versus the EOS 30D's 30 image burst in 6 seconds (based on Canon official specs, however we achieved 40 images in our review).
Larger, bright viewfinder
Frame coverage remains the same at 95% however magnification goes up from 0.90x to 0.95x, in use this is clear to see, indeed it would be fair to say that the EOS 40D's viewfinder view appears as large as that of the EOS-1D Mark III. It's a noticeable improvement.
Interchangeable focusing screens
Also new are interchangeable focusing screens. These come in three flavors; the Ef-A Standard Precision Matte (as included), the Ef-S Super Prevision Matte (slightly darker but easier for manual focus) and the Ef-D Precision Matte with grid (as shown above).
ISO display in viewfinder, B/W icon
Something we've seen requested (and we have asked) for quite some time was a permanent display of ISO in the viewfinder, this has now been implemented there's also a new B/W icon more as a warning that you are shooting in black and white mode.

Faster and quieter mirror mechanism
One of the more noticeable improvements when you first use the EOS 40D (apart from the larger viewfinder) is the much quicker and quieter mirror mechanism. Instead of relying on a spring to lift the mirror it is now motorized in both directions (and hence damped). This makes for much shorter blackout times and a quieter overall shutter release sound.

Nine-point AF sensor with cross sensitivity
The EOS 40D has the same nine focus points we first saw introduced on the EOS 20D however now all points are cross-type (meaning they are sensitive to both horizontal and vertical detail) with lenses of F5.6 or faster. Additionally the center point is now twice as sensitive as any other point with lenses of F2.8 or faster and has cross-type sensors set at forty-five degrees.
AF-ON button
A welcome addition and a carry-over from the EOS-1D cameras is the dedicated AF-ON button on the rear of the camera to the left of the AE lock button (just 'under your thumb'). This button becomes particularly useful in a continuous focus situation where you want focus to follow the subject while being able to trigger the shutter release independently.
WFT-E3/E3A wireless transmitter / grip
The most interesting new addition from an accessory point of view is the WFT-E3/E3A wireless transmitter which now also doubles up as a vertical grip. Attached to the EOS 40D it provides all the normal vertical grip controls as well as WiFi, Wired Ethernet and USB storage connectivity. It has its own BP-511 battery which it is said will last as long (in constant use) as that in the camera. The WFT-E3 supports various protocols including FTP, PTP (remote control) and even has a built-in web server for HTTP browsing of images and remote shutter release.
Weatherproof compartment doors
We're looking for an exact clarification on this point, it appears that while Canon has now weatherproofed the battery and storage compartment doors (water and dust can't enter these compartments when the doors are closed) other areas such as buttons and dials aren't fully weatherproofed as they are on the EOS-1D series. Hence while the EOS 40D's weatherproofing is an improvement over the EOS 30D it doesn't appear to be up to EOS-1D standards.
Larger 3.0" LCD monitor
No real surprise, everyone has to have a three inch monitor these days (although looking at the cramped button layout I'd be surprised to see them go much larger next time). The same resolution as the 2.5" it replaces but does appear brighter and of course larger is always better for reviewing images.
Live View
The EOS 40D provides a Live View mode which gives you a true 'Through The Lens' view, once enabled you activate Live View by pressing the SET button. Optional Auto Focus can be activated using the AF-ON button, this drops the mirror momentarily to achieve focus and then lifts it again to restore the Live View. Other Live View features include magnification (5x or 10x), information display, exposure simulation and Silent Shooting (a quieter but delayed mirror movement is used).
Shooting Information Display
Taking a leaf out of the EOS 400D book you can now optionally display a live 'control panel' type screen on the LCD monitor.
EOS-1D style menu system
Gone is the single long scrolling menu of previous EOS x0D cameras, now the EOS 40D gets the more logical and easier to navigate page grouped menu system of the EOS-1D, use the multi-controller (joystick) to move between pages and dials to navigate.
On-screen settings adjustments
Again, optionally you can repeat settings adjustments on the main LCD screen, this can be especially useful if the camera is mounted high on a tripod or with the top LCD panel facing away.

Auto ISO (400 - 800)
On the EOS 30D Auto ISO was available only in the Auto and scene exposure modes. Now it's available in all exposure modes and interestingly for the 'creative' modes (P, Av, Tv) starts at 400 and goes up to 800. It's a pity though that Canon still haven't implemented the very flexible automatic ISO seen in Nikon and Pentax digital SLRs which effectively becomes an 'ISO priority'.
Camera user settings
The EOS 40D has three new positions on the mode dial marked C1, C2 and C3. These allow you to recall saved camera settings instantly including shooting mode, menu settings and custom functions.
Trimming including tilt correction
In addition to being able to trim (crop) an image in playback mode you can now also tilt the crop rectangle by plus or minus ten degrees in 0.5 degree increments, perfect for correcting slightly tilted images before direct print.
RAW and sRAW
We first saw the idea of 'small RAW' in the EOS-1D Mark III. In sRAW mode you capture a RAW image which has about a quarter of the pixels of a normal RAW file, so in the case of the EOS 40D around 2.5 megapixels. Stored as 14-bit unprocessed data you can still apply all of the normal post-processing RAW adjustments such as exposure compensation and white balance correction but the resulting image is simply smaller.
Optional High ISO Noise Reduction
By default this 'extra' level of noise reduction is disabled however you can enable it to deliver even cleaner images at the expense of continuous shooting buffer.
Does not power down if card door opened
Only seven years of moaning in probably a dozen digital SLR reviews and finally Canon listened! Instead of instantly powering down when the CF card door is opened the EOS 40D displays a warning message and a countdown of how many more images are being written before it is safe to remove the card. At long last!
External USB media support
This feature is only available with the WFT-E3/E3A wireless transmitter / grip attached to the camera but does allow you to connect USB storage devices (such as external hard drives or flash drives) and use them as storage devices. The EOS 40D / WFT-E3 can power flash based USB drives but hard disk based drives will need their own power supply.


Design

From the front at least there are very few changes from the EOS 30D, a little chiseling of the viewfinder chamber and a new finger tuck on the hand grip but overall no real surprises. The rear however has undergone more of a re-design, mostly thanks to the now three inch LCD monitor. Several buttons which ran down the left side of the EOS 30D's monitor have now shifted to below the EOS 40D's monitor also there's now a dedicated AF-ON button 'under your thumb'. We should be thankful that Canon hasn't removed the most useless button of all; Direct Print.

The same materials, build and construction as the EOS 30D, a two piece magnesium shell which makes up much of the front and rear of the camera which is well put together with no rattles or creaks, as with previous EOS x0D cameras the 40D feels just as solid and reliable.

Side by side

Despite a $500 price difference it's clear that many people will compare these two cameras as the current state-of-the-art serious-amateur (stroke semi-professional) digital SLRs from Canon and Nikon. The D300 is the larger and heavier of the two, by 80g, although in use it's unlikely you'd really notice this. One more difference is a two megapixel advantage to the D300.

In your hand

In your hand the EOS 40D feels almost exactly the same as the EOS 30D, except for the subtle new finger hook moulded into the front of the hand grip which I'm sure will be noticed by some but didn't really have a significant effect for me (it is however more in-keeping with the EOS-1D design). One thing you can't take away from the EOS 40D is that it does feel solid, reliable and 'well sorted' from an ergonomics point of view.

Design changes compared to the EOS 30D

Place your mouse cursor over either image below to compare the design of the EOS 40D to the EOS 30D.

LCD Monitor

The EOS 30D saw a step up to a 2.5" LCD monitor, the EOS 40D gets a 3.0" LCD although maintains the same 230,400 dot count (320 x 240 x RGB) which although good has now been overtaken by the amazing 921,600 dot 3.0" LCD's seen on the new Nikon D3, D300 and Sony DSLR-A700. As you can see from this shot the lack of an anti-reflective coating means that the screen does tend to pick up reflections.

LCD control panel

On top of the camera is a large LCD control panel which provides a wide range of information about camera settings and exposure. The main numeric section of the panel doubles up to provide other types of information such as the 'Busy' warning, AF point selection etc. The EOS 40D panel now features a dedicated readout of ISO sensitivity. The panel has an orange backlight which is illuminated by pressing the backlight button to the top left of the panel, the backlight stays on for approximately six seconds.

A breakdown of information displayed on the LCD panel can be found on the diagrams below.



Viewfinder

The EOS 40D gets a new viewfinder which has a higher magnification than that of the EOS 20D/30D (up to 0.95x compared to 0.90x), although in spec terms this is a subtle increase the viewfinder view is noticeably larger and brighter and still doesn't suffer any distortion or corner softness. As with previous models the eyepiece rubber is removable allowing for the eyepiece cover or different eyepieces / angled finders to be fitted.

Focusing screens

Another significant change is that the EOS 40D now gets interchangable focusing screens:

  • Ef-A Standard Precision Matte
      - the supplied focusing screen, bright and with a normal matte
     
  • Ef-D Precision Matte with grid
      - a more matte finish easier manual focusing also includes a grid pattern
     
  • Ef-S Super Precision Matte
      - even more matte but obviously slightly darker, optimized for F2.8 and faster lenses

Focusing screen as supplied with installation arm The range of EOS 40D focusing screens

Viewfinder view

At first glance the view provided through the viewfinder hasn't changed that much, we still have the spot metering circle (about 3.5% of the frame) and nine AF points. The most significant and appreciated change is the addition of a permanent ISO display on the status bar. In automatic AF point selection mode the AF points chosen by the camera are highlighted briefly when you initiate AF (half-press shutter release / AF button), otherwise the selected AF point is highlighted. In automatic AF point selection mode the AF point will only highlight once an AF lock has been achieved. With a single AF point selected it will blink once as you half-press the shutter release and once more upon AF lock (or not at all if no AF lock was possible). In AI Servo AF mode (with the shutter release half-pressed) the selected AF point blinks just once and then tracks AF.

1 AE lock / AEB in-progress 8 Exposure level indicator / compensation
2 Flash ready / FE lock warning 9 Monochrome shooting
3 High-speed sync (FP flash) 10 ISO speed indicator
4 FE lock / FEB in-progress 11 ISO speed
5 Flash exposure compensation 12 White balance correction / WB bracket
6 Shutter speed / status indication 13 Maximum frames in a burst
7 Aperture / status indication 14 Focus confirmation

Battery Compartment

The battery compartment on the EOS 40D is in the base of the hand grip, behind a simple clip- locked door. The door itself is removable (to make way for the optional battery grip). The EOS 40D is supplied with the BP-511A Lithium-Ion battery pack which provides 1390 mAh at 7.4 V (10.3 Wh). There's a tiny door on the inside edge of the hand grip where the cable from the optional AC adapter's dummy battery exits.

Battery Charger

As with previous EOS x0D SLRs the 40D is supplied with the CB-5L battery charger, it's relatively small and lightweight and easy to pack for travel. Charge time is around 90 minutes and the LED on the top of the charger indicates charge progress.

WFT-E3/E3A Wireless Battery Grip (optional)

The EOS 40D supports no less than three different battery grips, the BG-E2 (same as the EOS 20D & 30D), the new BG-E2N which is almost the same but has rubber seals around the battery compartment door and finally the new WFT-E3/E3A wireless battery grip. The one thing the WFT-E3/E3A doesn't do is provide any extra power to the camera, as you can see it's a different design to the BG-E2 series as it doesn't have the dummy battery stalk, instead the camera battery stays in the camera and the grip simply attaches to the bottom of the camera (and communicates through a new connector).

With the WFT-E3/E3A you can shoot wirlessly (802.11b/g) direct to FTP servers as well as have two-way communication over PTP and HTTP. In HTTP mode you can effectively remote control the camera, see a live view, change settings and take shots. The USB port can be used to store directly to external USB hard disks (although only small flash devices can be powered by the grip) or provide GPS data from USB GPS devices.

CompactFlash Compartment

The CompactFlash compartment on the EOS 40D is at the rear corner of the hand grip and is opened by sliding the door towards you and flipping outwards. The door itself has a metal hinge and opens with plenty of room to remove the CF card once ejected. The CF activity light is to the bottom right of the quick control dial. The EOS 40D supports both Type I and Type II CompactFlash cards and cards greater than 2 GB in capacity (FAT32) although doesn't support the newer super-high-speed UDMA standard.

The same old design flaw Fixed!

For the last six or so years I've been complaining about a design flaw which meant that buffered images were lost of you opened the CF door during a write process, somethingwhich had been addressed in the PowerShot G series several years ago. Finally we the same in a Canon DSLR, if you open the door during a write process the camera simply displays an animated warning on the LCD monitor along with a countdown and warning beep (if beeps are enabled).

Connections

Just like the EOS 30D all of the 40D's connectors are on the left side of the camera behind rubber covers, however the arrangement of the covers and the layout has changed. There are now effectively two columns of connectors each with its own cover. On the left we have PC sync and the remote terminal (N3), on the right video-out and USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).


Base / Tripod Mount

On the bottom of the camera you'll find a metal tripod socket which is aligned exactly with the center line of the lens. Also worth noting is the new grip connector at the bottom right edge.

As I've requested in previous reviews it would have been nice to have had a rubber 'foot' on the base of the camera, although I will speculate that this could cause the camera to be incompatible with the optional battery grip.

Internal flash

The EOS 40D features an E-TTL II pop-up flash (same as the EOS 30D and previously 20D), it has a guide number of 13 (approx. 3.3 m @ 17 mm / 2.3 m @ 85 mm; ISO 100) and a wide angle coverage of 17 mm. Support for E-TTL II means that lens distance information is now used to calculate the required flash power. Flash sync speed is 1/250 sec.

AF Assist

As per previous x0D DSLRs the EOS 40D uses the internal flash for AF assist. Instead of having a separate lamp to provide assistance to the AF system in low light you have to raise the flash unit which will strobe to provide illumination for AF.

External flash

The EOS 40D's hot-shoe can be used with Canon and third party flash units (sync only). As with the internal flash the hot shoe supports E-TTL II metering which uses distance information from the lens to calculate flash power. This works with all Canon lenses (although distance information is only provided by lenses with ring type USM motors). You'll note also the new weather seal surround which works in conjunction with the newer 580EX II Speedlite.

Lens Mount

The EOS 40D has a standard metal EF / EF-S lens mount which means that it supports all Canon EF and EF-S lenses plus some older as manual focus and compatible third party lenses. Because the sensor is smaller than a 35 mm frame all lenses are subject to a field of view crop (sometimes called focal length multiplier) of 1.6x, thus a 17 mm lens provides the same field of view as a 27.2 mm lens on 35 mm film.

Shutter Release Sound

In some of our digital SLR reviews we now provide a sound recording of a continuous burst of shots. Below you can see waveforms of a recording made of the EOS 40D shooting continuously JPEG Large/Fine for 30 seconds. The storage card used was a 2 GB SanDisk Extreme IV Compact Flash.

JPEG continuous, 30 seconds

Canon EOS 40D JPEG continuous 30 seconds; MP3 470 KB

Supplied In the Box

The EOS 40D is offered as body-only or as a kit with either the EF-S 18 - 55 mm IS or EF-S 17 - 85 lenses. Included in the body-only box is:

  • Canon EOS 40D Digital SLR body
  • Eyecup Eb
  • BP-511A Lithium-Ion battery pack
  • CB-5L (or CG-580) Battery charger
  • Neck strap
  • USB Cable
  • Video Cable
  • CD-ROMs
    • Canon EOS Solution Disk
    • EOS Utility
    • ZoomBrowser EX
    • Remote Capture
    • Digital Photo Professional
  • Manuals / Reg. card

Top of camera controls (left) - Exposure Mode Dial

Situated on the top of the camera on the left hand side is the exposure mode dial. This controls exposure operation be it fully automatic, a preprogrammed scene composition, flexible program, a range of manual and semi-automatic options as well as three 'camera user' positions. In the user manual Canon breaks these exposure modes into two groups; Basic Zone and Creative Zone.

Basic zone exposure modes

Full Auto and the six scene exposure modes are collectively referred to as the 'Basic Zone', in this 'Zone' certain settings are either fixed, limited or unavailable, as shown in this table. Variable settings are detailed in the second table. In the basic zone the camera will indicate that blur may occur because of slow shutter speeds, it does so by blinking the shutter speed on the LCD and viewfinder status bar.

Fixed settings

Fixed or limited settings

Unavailable settings
Metering mode (Evaluative) AF mode Custom functions
Color space (sRGB) Drive mode AE lock
Flash compensation (0 EV) Flash mode Bracketing
Exposure compensation (0 EV) Picture Style RAW image format
ISO sensitivity (Auto)    
White balance (Auto)    
Focus point selection (Auto)    

In the basic zone the camera will indicate that blur may occur because of slow shutter speeds, it does so by blinking the shutter speed on the LCD panel and viewfinder status bar.

Limited variable settings in Basic zone

Icon Basic zone mode AF
mode
Drive
mode
Flash
mode
Picture Style
Fully Automatic Exposure

Camera has complete control over exposure, point-and-shoot operation.
AI Focus • Single
• Self-Timer
• Auto
• Red-eye
Standard
Portrait
Apertures are kept as large as possible (small F number) to produce a shallow Depth of Field (blurred background).
One Shot • Continuous
• Self-Timer
• Auto
• Red-eye
Portrait
Landscape
Apertures as small as possible (large F numbers) for the largest depth of field.
One Shot • Single
• Self-Timer
• Off Landscape
Close-up (Macro)

Aperture is kept to a medium setting to ensure the subject DOF is deep enough but the background is blurred.
One Shot • Single
• Self-Timer
• Auto
• Red-eye
Standard
Sports

Shutter speed is kept as high as possible to ensure capture of fast moving objects.
AI Servo • Continuous
• Self-Timer
• Off Standard
Night Scene

Allows for slow shutter speeds combined with flash to illuminate foreground and background.
One Shot • Single
• Self-Timer
• Auto
• Red-eye
Standard
Flash off

Disables internal and external flash for taking automatic slow exposures.
AI Focus • Single
• Self-Timer
• Off Standard

Creative zone exposure modes

The five exposure modes will be more familiar (and preferred) by most prosumer / professionals. All menu functions and camera settings are available in these modes and can be used in any combination. In manual exposure modes (Tv, Av, M) you control the shutter speed with the mail dial (top) and aperture with the quick control dial (rear), you can reverse the operational direction of these dials with C.Fn IV-4.

Icon
Description

Program Auto Exposure (Flexible)

Very similar to AUTO exposure but you have access to all the normal manual controls, can set the ISO, exposure compensation, use AE lock, bracketing etc. Program AE is flexible which means that you can select one of a variety of equal exposures (in 1/3 or 1/2 EV steps depending on C.Fn I-1) by turning the main dial. Example:
       
 • 1/30 F2.8 (metered)
 • 1/20 F3.2 (turn left one click)
 • 1/15 F4.0 (turn left two clicks) etc.

Shutter Priority Auto Exposure

In this mode you select the shutter speed and the camera will calculate the correct aperture for the exposure (depending on metered value; metering mode, ISO). Shutter speed is displayed on the viewfinder status bar and on the top LCD, turn the main dial to select different shutter speeds. A half-press of the shutter release causes the camera's exposure system to calculate the aperture, if it's outside of the camera's exposure range the aperture will blink. You can select shutter speeds from 30 to 1/8000 sec in 1/3 or 1/2 EV steps depending on C.Fn I-1.

Aperture Priority Auto Exposure

In this mode you select the aperture and the camera will calculate the correct shutter speed for the exposure (depending on metered value; metering mode, ISO). Aperture is displayed on the viewfinder status bar and on the top LCD, turn the main dial to select different apertures. A half-press of the shutter release causes the camera's exposure system to calculate the shutter speed, if it's outside of the camera's exposure range the shutter speed will blink. The range of apertures available will depend on the lens used but 1/3 or 1/2 EV steps can be selected via C.Fn I-1.

Full Manual Exposure

In this mode you select the aperture and the shutter speed from any combination of the above (plus BULB for shutter speed, apertures limited by the lens used). Top dial selects shutter speed, rear dial selects aperture. Half-press the shutter release and the meter on the viewfinder status bar and top LCD will reflect the exposure level compared to the calculated ideal exposure, if it's outside of +/- 2EV the indicator bar will blink either + or -.

Automatic Depth-Of-Field AE

In this mode the camera automatically controls the depth of field (via aperture) to ensure that all the subjects covered by the focusing points, from those close to the camera to those far away from the camera remain sharply defined.

Top of camera controls (right)

Top of the camera on the right side is the status panel LCD, directly above this are four buttons; LCD backlight and three control buttons (see below). In front of these is the main dial and shutter release button. Along the rear 'under your thumb' you can see the AF-ON, AE-Lock and focus point selection buttons. Settings buttons are press once, turn a dial to change setting value and then half-press the shutter release to return to shooting mode (or press another button).

With the EOS 40D Canon has altered the function of the three top control buttons which if you're used to an EOS 30D can take a little while to get used to, especially for ISO sensitivity which has both changed button and dial.

  Canon EOS 30D Canon EOS 40D
Button
Main dial (top) Quick control dial (rear) Main dial (top) Quick control dial (rear)
1
AF mode White balance Metering mode White balance
2
Drive mode ISO sensitivity AF mode Drive mode
3
Metering mode Flash compensation ISO sensitivity Flash compensation

Top panel buttons

The table below shows the relationship between each of the top panel settings buttons and the parameters changed by either turning the main dial (top) or quick control dial (rear).

Button Main dial
Quick control dial

Metering mode

 • Evaluative (35 zone)
 • Partial (9% of screen)
 • Spot (3.5% of screen)
 • Center Weighted Average

White balance

 • Auto
 • Daylight
 • Shade
 • Cloudy
 • Tungsten
 • Fluorescent
 • Flash
 • Custom
 • Kelvin temperature (2800 - 10000 K)

Auto focus mode

 • One Shot (focus lock on half-press)
 • AI Focus (locks but monitors movement)
 • AI Servo (continuous predictive focus)

AI Focus mode initially locks just like One Shot mode but monitors the focused subject, if the subject moves it will automatically switch to an AI Servo operation.

Drive mode

 • Single shot
 • Continuous L (3 fps)
 • Continuous H (6.5 fps)
 • Self-Timer 10 sec
 • Self-Timer 2 sec

You can optionally combine self-timer with mirror lockup (to reduce mirror induced vibration) via C.Fn III-7.

ISO sensitivity *

 • Auto
 • 100
 • 200
 • 400
 • 800
 • 1600
 • H (3200) (enabled via C.Fn I-3)
Flash compensation

 • +/-2 EV
 • 1/3 or 1/2 EV steps (C.Fn I-1)

* Shown in 1-stop steps, 1/3-stop ISO steps can be selected via C.Fn I-2.

Under your thumb buttons (Shooting mode)

Button
Operation
Auto focus start

The AF-ON button allows you to trigger auto focus independently of the shutter release 'half-press'. The EOS 40D is the first EOS x0D series to get the AF-ON button and indeed it's a fairly recent new feature to even Canon's professional EOS-1D series. Note that you can re-program the exact function of the AF-ON button via C.Fn IV-1 or you can switch the AF-ON button and AE/AF lock button via C.Fn IV-2 (all custom functions detailed in the menus section of this review).
AE / FE Lock

Press to trigger automatic exposure and lock the exposure for the next shot. Hold the button to lock the exposure for more than one shot.
AF point selection button

Press to choose a single AF point, turn the main dial or the quick control dial to scroll around the available AF points. Alternatively you can also use the new multi-controller to select a point directly (press the selector for the center point). The exact function of this button can be programmed via C.Fn III-3.

Under your thumb buttons (Play mode)

Button
Operation
Thumbnail index / reduce
If in single view play mode, pressing this button will switch to a 2x2 thumbnail index, press again for a 3x3 index. If already magnified pressing this button reduces magnification level.
Enlarge

Press to magnify the current image, there are fifteen steps up to a maximum magnification of 10x. Once magnified you can use the multi-controller to move around the image.

Rear of camera controls

As previously mentioned the new three inch LCD monitor has forced the control buttons from their old position down the left edge of the screen to a row of five below and the menu button above. The 'new addition' (apart from AF-ON which we've already covered) is the new dedicated Picture Style button which is used to display the Picture Style selection / adjustment screen. Lastly let's not forget to mention the least useful button, direct print, which is still not customizable.

Shooting mode

Button
Operation
Enter / Leave the Menu
The camera menu is described on the following pages of this review. [clip]
Information

Displays current camera settings / information (two styles are available). [clip]
Picture Style

Displays the Picture Style selection / adjustment screen. [clip]
Multi-selector

By default the multi-selector has no function on its own, however you can customize it to provide direct selection of AF point via C.Fn III-3.
Quick Control Dial

With the power switch in the third position (one step past ON) the Quick Control Dial can be used to change exposure compensation (steps depend on C.Fn I-1).
SET button

If Live View is enabled pressing SET enters or leaves live view mode otherwise this button by default has no function in shooting mode, however it can be configured to one of four different functions via C.Fn IV-3.

Play mode

Button
Operation
Enter / Leave the Menu
The camera menu is described on the following pages of this review. [clip]

Information

Press to change the type and level of information shown along with the image:

 • Large image + status line (shutter speed, aperture, comp, filename, card)
 • Large image + status line + image size & quality + image number
 • Small image + status line + lum histogram + detailed shooting info
 • Small image + status line + lum histogram + RGB histogram + detailed shooting info

Jump mode

Image browsing on the EOS 40D is slightly different to the EOS 30D, the quick control dial (rear) browses images one at a time, the main dial (top) jumps using the chosen jump mode. Pressing the JUMP button allows you to change jump mode:

 • Jump 1 image
 • Jump 10 images
 • Jump 100 images
 • Screen
 • Date

Play

Displays the last image taken (or the last image on the card). The EOS 40D is a shooting priority camera, which means that no matter what is displayed on the rear LCD this will be canceled if any of the camera's photographic functions (example half-pressing the shutter release or AF-ON) are accessed.
Erase

Press to erase the current image, displays an OK / Cancel dialog.
Quick Control Dial

Turn the Quick Control Dial to browse through images (the main dial can be used to jump images).

Lens mount controls

On the side of the lens mount are the final set of camera controls. First is the flash open button, a press of this (in the correct mode) will pop-up the onboard flash. Next down is the lens release button and below this the depth of field preview button which stops the lens down to the indicated / selected aperture to give a preview of DOF in the viewfinder.

Displays

Shooting mode information

Pressing the INFO button with no reviewed image displays an overview of the current camera configuration, note that the EOS 40D provides two different info displays; Normal display and Shooting function display.

Normal display Shooting function display

Record review & play displays

By default the EOS 40D provides a two second review display immediately after the shot is taken, this can be disabled or extended to 4 or 8 seconds or as long as you hold the shutter release button. During record review you can press the erase button to cancel / erase the currrent image. Record review and play share the same display modes, just press the INFO button to select between the four available modes (see below).

Display modes

There are four display modes available in record review / play, you can also optionally enable 'Highlight alert' (blinking highlights) and / or 'AF point display' (the last two in the table below).

1: Large image + status line (shutter speed, aperture, comp, filename, card) 2: Large image + status line + image size & quality + image number
3: Small image + status line + lum histogram + detailed shooting info 4: Small image + status line + lum histogram + RGB histogram + detailed shooting info
Optional 'Highlight alert' enabled Optional 'AF point display' enabled

Play magnification

The EOS 40D has dedicated magnify buttons and provides fifteen steps of magnification, the final step appears to go beyond the detail of the cached image and can look pixelated.

Play thumbnail index

Unlike the EOS 30D the 40D provides two levels of thumbnail index, the initial view being a four image 2x2 index, press the thumbnail button once more to switch to a nine image 3x3 index. You can use the multi-controller or quick comman dial to move around images or the main dial to jump images (ideal if you have the 'screen' jump mode selected).

Other Play displays

After pressing the erase button you are shown a Cancel / Erase option An example of the menu shown when the camera is connected to a Direct Print compatible printer

Live View

Canon first approached Live View with the EOS-1D Mark III, the EOS 40D's implementation provides live view of the scene with magnification up to 10x, optional overlays (such as histogram and gridlines) as well as optional 'mirror up' auto-focus, although no contrast-detect auto-focus as seen in the Nikon D300. I was a little annoyed that you have to manually release the AF-ON button to return to live view after auto--focus, surely a better implementation would be to simply return to live view once auto-focus had been locked (as implemented by Olympus and Panasonic).

Live View exposure simulation

You can optionally (via C.Fn IV-7) enable Live View exposure simulation mode where the Live View display will attempt to simulate the brightness of the final exposure. In this mode changes to exposure compensation or exposure (in manual mode) are simulated, but of course this may lead to the image being too dark or too bright to frame correctly.

Live view display modes

Pressing the INFO button while in Live View toggles between the four available display modes, each with differing levels of overlaid information. The final view shown below is the default view with optional 'thirds' gridlines enabled.

1: Live view with magnification area indicated + status line showing shutter speed, aperture, flash compensation, exposure compensation, frames remaining and ISO sensitivity. 2: Live view with magnification area + status line + brief overlay (simulation mode, battery status, Picture Style, AE lock, flash-ready)
3: Live view with magnification area + status line+ overlay + live histogram 4: Live view with magnification area (and nothing else)
 
Optional gridlines overlay  

Live view magnification

Just as in playback mode you can magnify live view by pressing the enlarge button (or back out again with reduce). While magnified you can use the multi-controller to move around the live image. The 40D does appear to be able to go all the way to 1:1 magnification (one pixel on the sensor for one pixel on the LCD) which makes it easy to achieve perfect focus (it's worth noting that while magnified the camera applies higher sharpening than in the final image to assist focusing).

Live view Depth-of-Field preview, reaching the limit

One very useful feature in Live View is of course depth-of-field (DOF) preview, when the DOF preview button is pressed the camera stops the lens down to the selected (or metered) aperture which provides you with an accurate representation of the depth-of-field of the final image. As you can see from the images below this worked wel in our test scene up at F11 but at F22 the reduction in light produced by this very small aperture was beyond the video capability of the Canon sensor. (I personally was a little surprised by this, it does appear that Canon don't boost the Live View signal and so in low light situations you can end up with an image too dark to see).

Normal Live View DOF preview button held at F11
 
DOF preview button held at F22  

Live view "silent shooting"

One interesting addition to the EOS 40D's Live View options is "silent shooting" where the noise made at the time of exposure is reduced by delaying (and/or slowing, it's not quite clear) the mirror / shutter return. When Disabled the camera is already quieter than in normal mode (the user manual says continuous shooting isn't available but we were able to use it), in Mode 1 the exposure sequence is slightly quieter and in Mode 2 it's quieter still as the shutter does not 're-cock' itself until the shutter release button is released (hence continuous shooting is not available).

To provide a better idea of just how "silent" these modes are we have provided audio clips of each of the Live View silent shooting modes below. In each recording the sequence of events is the same:

Enter live view -> take a shot -> wait (live view returns) -> continuous shooting -> Leave live view

Live view exposure, silent shooting: Disabled

Live view sequence, silent shooting disabled; MP3 177 KB

Live view exposure, silent shooting: Mode 1

Live view sequence, silent shooting Mode 1; MP3 173 KB

Live view exposure, silent shooting: Mode 2*

Live view sequence, silent shooting Mode 2; MP3 173 KB

* In "Mode 2" continuous shooting isn't available and the delay between the exposure
and re-cock of the shutter depends on the photographer.

Camera Menus

With the introduction of the EOS 40D Canon has moved away from the 'one long scrolling page' layout seen on previous EOS x0D series, isntead we now have a tabbed multi-page layout which is consistent with their EOS-1D professional cameras. You navigate pages using the multi-selector or main dial and use the quick control dial or multi-selector to move up and down options, press SET to change. Colors (red for shooting, blue for play etc.) are used to distinguish the different categories of options. In Auto and scene modes the options available in the menus are limited.

Full menu (P, Tv, Av, M, A-DEP, C1-3) Limited menu (Auto, scene modes)

Shooting section (red)

Option
Values / Actions
Notes
Quality [clip]  • Large / Fine
 • Large / Normal
 • Medium / Fine
 • Medium / Normal
 • Small / Fine
 • Small / Normal
 • RAW + Large / Fine
 • RAW + Large / Normal
 • RAW + Medium / Fine
 • RAW + Medium / Normal
 • RAW + Small / Fine
 • RAW + Small / Normal
 • sRAW + Large / Fine
 • sRAW + Large / Normal
 • sRAW + Medium / Fine
 • sRAW + Medium / Normal
 • sRAW + Small / Fine
 • sRAW + Small / Normal
 • RAW
 • sRAW

- 3888 x 2592 JPEG Fine
- 3888 x 2592 JPEG Normal
- 2816 x 1880 JPEG Fine
- 2816 x 1880 JPEG Normal
- 1936 x 1288 JPEG Fine
- 1936 x 1288 JPEG Normal
- 3888 RAW + 3888 JPEG Fine
- 3888 RAW + 3888 JPEG Normal
- 3888 RAW + 2816 JPEG Fine
- 3888 RAW + 2816 JPEG Normal
- 3888 RAW + 1936 JPEG Fine
- 3888 RAW + 1936 JPEG Normal
- 1936 RAW + 3888 JPEG Fine
- 1936 RAW + 3888 JPEG Normal
- 1936 RAW + 2816 JPEG Fine
- 1936 RAW + 2816 JPEG Normal
- 1936 RAW + 1936 JPEG Fine
- 1936 RAW + 1936 JPEG Normal
- 3888 x 2592 RAW
- 1936 x 1288 RAW

Red-eye on/off  • Off
 • On
Enables the use of the AF / red-eye lamp just before a flash shot.
Beep  • On
 • Off
Enables auto focus confirmation beep. Also used for self timer.
Shoot w/o card  • On
 • Off
Allow shot to be taken without CF card inserted.
Review time  • Off
 • 2 sec
 • 4 sec
 • 8 sec
 • Hold
 
AEB  • +/-2 EV
 • 1/3 or 1/2 EV steps (C.Fn I-1)
Configures auto exposure bracketing.
White balance [clip]  • Auto
 • Daylight
 • Shade
 • Cloudy
 • Tungsten light
 • White fluorescent light
 • Flash
 • Custom
 • Color temp. (Kelvin)
 
Custom WB  • Set custom WB Select image for custom WB.
WB Shift / BKT [clip]  • Shift: B9-A9, M9-G9
 • Bracket: BA+/-3, MG+/-3
Configures WB shift and WB bracketing.
Color space  • sRGB
 • Adobe RGB
 
Picture Style  • Standard
 • Portrait
 • Landscape
 • Neutral
 • Faithful
 • Monochrome
 • User Def. 1
 • User Def. 2
 • USer Def. 3

Picture Style

Now standard across Canon's DSLR range the Picture Styles are a range of pre-programmed image parameter sets intended to deliver the best results in different situations. Each Picture Style has its own preset mapping for tone and color response as well as providing the ability to tune sharpness, contrast, saturation and color tone for each. For instance the default sharpening for the Standard Picture Style is level 3, if you prefer less strong you can just adjust it downwards. Sharpness has 8 levels, contrast, saturation and color tone all have have 9 levels.

Playback Section (Blue)

Option
Notes
Protect images
[clip]
Protect mode, allows you to browse images either in a single image or thumbnail view and mark each image as protected (or un-protect). This simply sets the read-only flag on the CF card file system.
Rotate
[clip]
Rotate mode, again, this can be performed in either single image or thumbnail index view. This option allows you to rotate an image on-screen by 90 or 270 degrees. Doesn't actually rotate the JPEG file, but marks its orientation.
Erase images
[clip]
 • Select and erase images
 • All images on card
Print order Allows you to create a DPOF print order file, for use with compatible printers or photo finishers.

 • Select images
 • All images
 • Set up
Print type
Standard
Index
Both
Date
On
Off
File no.
On
Off
Transfer order Allows you to create a transfer order file, for use with automatic image transfer software.

 • Select images
 • All images
Mark all on card
Clear all on card
Highlight alert  • Disable
 • Enable
AF point disp.  • Disable
 • Enable
Histogram  • Brightness
 • RGB
Auto Play Start an automated slideshow of images on the CF card, delay between each image is preset at four seconds.

Setup Section (Yellow)

Option
Values / Actions
Notes
Auto power off  • 1 min
 • 2 min
 • 4 min
 • 8 min
 • 15 min
 • 30 min
 • Off
Sets camera power off time, this is the amount of "idle time" before the camera powers itself off. In the power off state the camera can be woken by half or fully depressing the shutter release (or turning the power switch to Off and back to On).
File numbering  • Continuous
 • Auto reset
 • Manual reset
Controls the numbering method used for filenames.
Auto rotate  • On (play mode and EXIF)
 • On (EXIF)
 • Off
Chooses whether orientation information is recorded and if the camera should rotate in play mode.
INFO button
[clip]
 • Normal display
 • Camera setting
 • Shooting function
Selects the function of the INFO button in shooting mode
Format  • Cancel
 • OK
Format the CF card
LCD Brightness  • 1 to 7  
Date/Time  • Set Date & Time
 • Set Date format
 
Language

 • English
 • German
 • French
 • Dutch
 • Danish
 • Portuguese
 • Finnish
 • Italian
 • Norwegian
 • Swedish
 • Spanish
 • Greek
 • Russian
 • Polish
 • Simplified Chinese
 • Traditional Chinese
 • Korean
 • Japanese

Select menu language.
Video system  • NTSC
 • PAL
Select video system for video out connector.
Sensor cleaning
[clip]
 • Auto cleaning
Enable
Disable
 • Clean now
Cancel
OK
 • Clean manually
Cancel
OK

Defines the settings for the built-in cleaning system, by default the system is enabled and cleans at startup and shutdown (although can be interrupted).

The 'clean manually' option locks the mirror and shutter up.

Live View function settings
[clip]
 • Live View shooting
Enable
Disable
 • Grid display
Off
On
 • Silent shooting
Mode 1
Mode 2
Disable
 • Metering timer
4 sec
16 sec
30 sec
1 min
10 min
30 min
Defines parameters for Live View.
Flash control
[clip]
 • Flash firing
Enable
Disable
 • Built-in flash function setting
Flash mode: E-TTL II
Shutter sync
1st curtain
2nd curtain
Flash exp. comp
-2 to +2 EV
E-TTL II
Evaluative
Average
 • External flash function setting
 • External flash C.Fn setting
 • Clear external flash C.Fn setting
 
Camera user setting  • Register
Mode dial: C1
Mode dial: C2
Mode dial: C3
 • Clear settings
Mode dial: C1
Mode dial: C2
Mode dial: C3
- Records current camera settings to a mode dial 'C' user setting for easy recall.
Clear all camera settings  • Cancel
 • OK
 
Firmware Select to load new firmware from CF card Also shows current version, on our n camera; 1.0.3

Custom Functions

Custom functions on the EOS 40D are split into four categories, each has its own menu and is identified using a roman numeral (I, II, III and IV).


C.Fn I: Exposure

Option
Values
I-1: Exposure level increments 0: 1/3 stop
1: 1/2 stop
I-2: ISO speed setting increments 0: 1/3 stop
1: 1 stop
I-3: ISO expansion 0: Off
1: On (enables ISO 3200; H)
I-4: Bracketing auto cancel 0: On
1: Off
I-5: Exposure Bracketing sequence 0: 0, -, +
1: -, 0, +
I-6: Exposure Safety shift 0: Disable
1: Enable (Tv/Av)
I-7: Exposure flash sync speed in Av mode 0: Auto
1: 1/250 sec (fixed)

C.Fn II: Image

Option
Values
II-1: Image Long exp. noise reduction 0: Off
1: Auto
2: On
II-2: High ISO speed noise reduction 0: Off
1: On
II-3: Image Highlight tone priority 0: Disable
1: Enable

C.Fn III: Auto focus / Drive

Option
Values
III-1: Lens drive when AF impossible 0: Focus search on
1: Focus search off
III-2: Lens AF stop button function 0: AF stop
1: AF start
2: AE lock
3: AF point: M->Auto / Auto->Ctr
4: One Shot <-> AI Servo
5: IS start
III-3: AF point selection method 0: Normal
1: Multi-controller direct
2: Quick Control Dial direct
III-4: Superimposed display 0: On
1: Off
III-5: AF-assist beam firing 0: Enable
1: Disable
2: Only external flash emits
III-6: AF during Live View shooting 0: Disable
1: Enable
III-7: Mirror lockup 0: Disable
1: Enable

C.Fn IV: Operation / Others

Option
Values
IV-1: Shutter button / AF-ON button 0: Metering + AF start
1: Metering + AF start / AF stop
2: Metering start / Meter+AF start
3: AE lock / Metering + AF start
4: Metering + AF start / disable
IV-2: AF-ON / AE lock button switch 0: Disable
1: Enable
IV-3: SET button when shooting
(only when Live View is diabled)
0: Normal (disabled)
1: Change quality
2: Change Picture Style
3: Menu display
4: Image replay
IV-4: Dial direction during Tv/Av 0: Normal
1: Reverse direction
IV-5: Focusing Screen 0: Ef-A
1: Ef-D
2: Ef-S
IV-6: Add original decision data 0: Off
1: On
IV-7: Live View exposure simulation 0: Disable (LCD auto adjust)
1: Enable (simulates exposure)

My Menu

The 'My Menu' feature on the EOS 40D allows you to produce a custom menu made up of any of the cameras menu options (including custom functions) which means that previously buried but useful options such as Mirror lockup can now be brought to a top level menu.


Timings & File Sizes

The EOS 40D's performance was good with no stand-out issues. Power on is virtually instant, and off to shot taken is a bat-of-an-eyelid quarter of a second, record review (the time taken for the camera to display the image after shutter release) was around one second and playback never takes more than a second, and once cached faster than half a second. Continuous shooting was slightly slower than specified and the fastest speeds can only be achieved with shutter speeds of 1/500 sec or faster. A large buffer and good CF throughput speeds mean that the EOS 40D is always ready to take the next shot and enables you to 'pump' the shutter release without being concerned about hold-ups.

Timing Notes: All times calculated as an average of three operations. Unless otherwise stated all timings were made on a 3888 x 2592 JPEG Fine (approx. 3,200 KB per image).

The media used for these tests were:

  • 2 GB SanDisk Extreme IV CF card
  • 2 GB Lexar Pro 133x CF card
  • 16 GB SanDisk Extreme III CF card

Media comparison

Action
Time, secs
(2 GB SanDisk)
Time, secs
(2 GB Lexar)
Time, secs
(16 GB SanDisk)

Power Off to On

<0.1 <0.1 <0.1
Power Off to Shot 0.25 0.25 0.25
Sleep to On <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
Power On to Off *1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
Record Review RAW *2 1.1 1.1 1.1
Record Review JPEG *2 0.9 0.9 0.9
Enter Live View 1.4 1.4 1.4
Exit Live View <0.2 <0.2 <0.2
Play RAW 0.5 / 0.3 0.5 / 0.3 0.5 / 0.3
Play JPEG 1.1 / 0.5 1.1 / 0.5 1.1 / 0.5
Play Image to Image RAW <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
Play Image to Image JPEG 0.8 0.8 0.8

*1 If the camera decides that an automatic 'sensor cleaning' is required then power-off take around 1.5 seconds.
*2 Time taken from the shutter release being pressed to the review image being displayed on the LCD monitor.

Continuous Drive mode

Frame rate vs. shutter speed

Our normal continuous shooting test shutter speed is around 1/500 sec, this normally avoids any slow-down due to the shutter mechanism. However we soon discovered that this wasn't fast enough to achieve the 40D's maximum rate. To achieve maximum shooting rate you need to be at 1/4000 sec or faster (which is a bit disappointing) and will then get 6.3 frames per second at the best (not the specified 6.5 fps). The graph below shows the relationship between shutter speed and frame rate on the EOS 40D.

Continuous drive tests

To test continuous drive mode the camera had the following settings: Manual Focus, ISO 100, Shutter Priority (1/4000 sec). Measurements were taken from audio recordings of the tests. Media used were the same as above.

The tests carried out below measured the following results for JPEG and RAW:

  • Frame rate - Initial frame rate, this was always 6.3 fps (+/- 0.01 fps)
  • Number of frames - Number of frames in a burst (until buffer full)
  • Buffer full rate - Frame rate if shutter release held down after burst (buffer full)
  • Next burst - How soon after the burst the buffer has emptied / CF compartment light goes out

Burst of JPEG Large/Fine images

Timing
2 GB SanDisk
Extreme IV CF
2 GB Lexar
Pro 133x CF
16 GB SanDisk
Extreme III CF
Frame rate 6.3 fps 6.3 fps 6.3 fps
Number of frames 128 128 98
Buffer full rate 3.0 fps 3.0 fps 1.5 fps
Next burst (buffer 75 indicated) 20.7 sec 20.4 sec 45.1 sec

Burst of RAW images

Timing
2 GB SanDisk
Extreme IV CF
2 GB Lexar
Pro 133x CF
16 GB SanDisk
Extreme III CF
Frame rate 6.3 fps 6.3 fps 6.3 fps
Number of frames 19 19 19
Buffer full rate 1.0 fps 1.0 fps 0.7 fps
Next burst (buffer 17 indicated) 16.2 sec 16.5 sec 22.8 sec

First of all it's probably worth mentioning that we couldn't achieve Canon's advertised 6.5 frames per second, despite testing the fastest shutter speed and various combinations of settings. The other thing to consider is that you can only achieve the fastest frame rates (6.0 fps and faster) from 1/500 sec upwards (I do think Canon should report that caveat in their specifications for the camera). With that said the 40D's performance is still impressive enough, a big buffer means that with the fastest card you can shoot for twenty seconds at full speed before the camera slows to a still pretty acceptable three frames per second.

File Flush Timing

Timings shown below are the time taken for the camera to process and "flush" the image out to the storage card. Timing was taken from the instant the shutter release was pressed to the time the storage card activity lamp beside the compartment door went out. Media used were the same as above.

Image type
Time, secs
(2 GB SanDisk)
Time, secs
(2 GB Lexar)
Time, secs
(16 GB SanDisk)
Approx.
size
3888 x 2592 RAW + JPEG 2.0 2.1 2.6 14,800 KB *1
3888 x 2592 RAW 1.6 1.7 2.0 11,600 KB
3888 x 2592 JPEG Fine 0.9 1.0 1.3 3,200 KB
3888 x 2592 JPEG Std 0.7 0.8 1.1 1,400 KB

*1 File size reported here is the size of the RAW and Fine quality JPEG files added together.

As we should expect the EOS 40D delivers very fast throughput, with the best performing card (the SanDisk Extreme IV) we get over 7 MB/sec for both RAW and RAW+JPEG formats. This combined with a large buffer means that you'll almost never find yourself waiting for images to write to the card (unless perhaps you shoot a burst of RAW+JPEG, pretty unlikely).

USB transfer speed

To test the EOS 40D's USB transfer speed we transferred approximately 128 MB of images (mixed RAW and JPEG) from a SanDisk Extreme IV 2 GB CF card.

Method
Transfer rate
Canon EOS 40D (PTP device) 7.5 MB/sec
CardBus PCMCIA adapter 10.5 MB/sec
SanDisk Extreme IV USB 2.0 card reader 13.3 MB/sec

The EOS 40D just like the EOS 30D doesn't have a 'mass storage device' option, instead communication is carried out using PTP (via WIA on Windows), that said transfer rates are much better than we have seen before via PTP, up to 7.5 MB/sec (more than twice the EOS 30D). That said if you want real performance then just pick up a fairly inexpensive USB 2.0 card reader.

Image parameters

The EOS 40D, like all current Canon Digital SLRs, provides presets of image parameters in different 'Picture Styles'. There are six default and three user defined Picture Styles, all of which can have any of their four image parameters (sharpness, contrast, saturation and color tone) adjusted. In addition the user defined Picture Styles can be 'based' on any of the preset Picture Styles. This is important because as well as having slightly different image parameters each preset Picture Style also has a slightly different contrast and color map.

Image parameter adjustments

  • Picture Style: Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Neutral, Faithful, Monochrome, User def. 1 - 3
  • Color space: sRGB, Adobe RGB
  • Image parameter adjustments
    • Sharpness: 0 to 7
    • Contrast: -4 to +4
    • Saturation: -4 to +4
    • Color tone: -4 to +4

Picture Style

As mentioned above, each Picture Style can be thought of as being similar to different types of 'film', each one is made up of a tone curve, color map (including differing hue responses) and default sharpness. The camera comes with six programmed Picture Styles but you can download other styles from Canon. The disappointing aspect of Picture Style (still) is that the tone curve and color map are not revealed to the user, you have to experiment to understand the effect of each Picture Style. An approximate summary of the available Picture Styles are as follows:

Picture Style Canon description Tone curve Color
Standard Vivid, crisp general setting usable for variety of conditions. Type 1
(more contrast)
Slightly more saturation
Portrait Produces a soft texture and beautiful expression of skin color. Type 1
(more contrast)
Medium saturation, skin tones get a pink hue
Landscape Sharp expression with particularly vivid results for blues skies and green hues. Type 1
(more contrast)
High saturation, blue and green emphasis, hue chg.
Neutral With post-processing in mind, saturation and contrast are low. Type 2
(neutral, flatter)
Low saturation, neutral hues
Faithful Faithful production of the subject's colors, with no exaggeration. Type 2
(neutral, flatter)
Low saturation, colormetrically accurate
Monochrome Monochrome expression in black & white, sepia, etc. Type 1
(more contrast)
B&W, can use filters (red, green, orange, etc.)

For a reference of how each of these Picture Styles relate to older EOS digital camera parameter settings please refer to the chart at the bottom of this page on canon.co.jp. One new addition which came along at the same time as the EOS 40D is the Canon Picture Style Editor, a piece of software which allows you to produce your own custom Picture Styles which can include complex color maps.

Picture Style default parameters

You can see an interactive representation of the contrast and color difference between each Picture Style in the 'Photographic tests' section of this review.

  Standard Portrait Landscape Neutral Faithful B&W
Sharpness 3 2 4 0 0 3
Contrast 0 0 0 0 0 0
Saturation 0 0 0 0 0 n/a
Color Tone 0 0 0 0 0 n/a

Picture Styles 'real life' scene example

Below are six images in different Picture Styles produced from the same RAW image. Each was saved at a reduced size to aid full size display / download speed (in these examples we're only interested in tone and color).

Standard Portrait Landscape
Neutral Faithful Monochrome (no filter)

Landscape Picture Style

Below are three images in different Picture Styles produced from the same RAW image. Each was saved at a reduced size (as above). Here you can see the advantage of using the Landscape Picture Style when for shots with foliage and blue skies, stronger blues and a richer green hue.

Standard Landscape Monochrome (red filter)


Image parameters (contd.)

Sharpness

The sharpness setting of zero appears to mean 'apply no sharpening at all', hence this is the image as captured (soft because of the anti-alias filter). The default setting for Standard Picture Style is two and three for Landscape.

Sharpness: 0 (Neutral and Faithful default)
Sharpness: 1

Sharpness: 2 (Portrait default)

Sharpness: 3 (Standard and Monochrome default)

Sharpness: 4 (Landscape default)
Sharpness: 5

Sharpness: 6

Sharpness: 7

Contrast adjustment

Adjusting the tone alters the shape of the 'S curve' used to map the linear image data captured by the sensor into the correct gamma. A lower contrast setting maintains more of the original data's dynamic range but leads to a flatter looking image. A higher contrast setting stretches the grayscale (dark to light) of the image and could lead to clipping of both shadow detail and highlights. The EOS 40D provides a wide range of adjustment with nine steps from -4 to +4.

  Thumbnail Luminosity histogram
-4
-2
0
+2
+4

Image parameters (contd.)

Saturation adjustment

Saturation adjustment allows you to control the strength of color in the final image. At the -4 setting you get quite a muted color response but this could be useful for post-processing, anything above +2 can lead to color channel clipping.

  Thumbnail 25% crop
-4
-2
0
+2
+4

Color tone (hue) adjustment

Color tone subtly adjusts the hue of the image, a negative setting makes red tones appear more blue/purple, a positive setting makes them appear more yellowish.

  Thumbnail 25% crop
-4
-2
0
+2
+4

Software

The EOS 40D is provided with the 'Canon EOS Solutions Disk 15' which includes:

  • Canon ZoomBrowser EX 5.8 - Easy to use image browsing and organization with a unique interface. Includes rudimentary image editting, printing and e-mail. Allows RAW conversion via the RAW Image Task plug-in (version 2.7 provided). - Windows only.
     
  • Image Browser 5.8 - Mac OS X only. *
     
  • Canon EOS Utility 2.1 - Automatic or Manual transfer of images via WIA, also allows for the adjustment of camera settings and remote 'tethered' shooting. *
     
  • Canon EOS 40D PTP/WIA driver - Windows only.
     
  • Canon PhotoStitch 3.1 - Panorama stitching utility.
     
  • Canon Digital Photo Professional 3.1 - Advanced image workflow and editing, specialized in RAW conversion with a range of adjustment and output options. *
     
  • Picture Style Editor 1.0 - Create custom Picture Styles. *

* Universal Binaries (Intel / PowerPC) for Mac OS X.

RAW conversion

As is normal in our digital SLR reviews I like to compare the supplied RAW conversion software, any optional manufacturer RAW conversion software and some third party RAW converter. In the case of the EOS 40D we had the supplied RAW Image Task and Digital Photo Professional as well as Adobe Camera RAW 4.3 beta.

  • JPEG - Large/Fine, Default settings
  • RIT - RAW Image Task 2.7
  • DPP - Digital Photo Professional 3.1
  • ACR - Adobe Camera RAW 4.3 beta

Color reproduction

Place your mouse over the label below the image to see the color from a GretagMacbeth ColorChecker chart produced using each RAW converter. As we would expect there is no difference between JPEG from the camera and RAW Image Task which appears to contain the exact same algorithms as the camera. This time around there's no discernable difference between JPEG, RAW Image Task and Digital Photo Professional. Adobe Camera RAW takes a slightly more conservative approach to color response and has a less contrasty tone curve.

           
           
           
           
JPEG Standard RAW Canon RIT RAW Canon DPP RAW Adobe ACR

Sharpness and Detail

Again RAW Image Task produced the exact same output as out-of-the-camera JPEG, the sharpest and most detailed image was from Digital Photo Professional closely followed by Adobe Camera RAW.

J
P
E
G

R
I
T

D
P
P
A
C
R

Resolution

These crops demonstrate that more detail is available from Digital Photo Professional and Adobe Camera RAW conversion of RAW files than can be obtained from JPEG or RAW Image Task. That said a lot of this detail could be described as 'false' (produced beyond Nyquist), although frankly the majority of the time this is useful as it improves the apperance of 'texture'.

JPEG from camera RAW Image Task (RAW)
Digital Photo Professional (RAW) Adobe Camera RAW 4.3 beta (RAW)

High ISO noise reduction

Both Digital Photo Professional and Adobe Camera RAW have selectable noise reduction options, a full comparison of these can be found in our ISO Sensitivity / Noise levels section of this review.

ISO / Sensitivity accuracy

In a new addition to our reviews we are now measuring the actual sensitivity of each indicated ISO sensitivity. This is achieved using the same shots as are used to measure ISO noise levels, we simply compare the exposure for each shot to the metered light level (using Sekonic L-358), middle gray matched. We estimate the accuracy of these results to be +/- 1/6 EV.

Unlike the EOS 30D the EOS 40D proved to have the same sensitivity as indicated, much in line with what we've seen from other recent Canon digital SLRs and has been the case for most other brand SLRs.

Indicated
sensitivity
Canon EOS 40D
(actual sensitivity)
Nikon D200
(actual sensitivity)
Pentax K10D
(actual sensitivity)
ISO 100 ISO 100 ISO 100 ISO 100
ISO 200 ISO 200 ISO 200 ISO 200
ISO 400 ISO 400 ISO 400 ISO 400
ISO 800 ISO 800 ISO 800 ISO 800
ISO 1600 ISO 1600 ISO 1600 ISO 1600
ISO 3200 ISO 3200 ISO 3200 n/a

ISO Sensitivity / Noise levels

ISO equivalence on a digital camera is the ability to increase the sensitivity of the sensor. The works by turning up the "volume" (gain) on the sensor's signal amplifiers (remember the sensor is an analogue device). By amplifying the signal you also amplify the noise which becomes more visible at higher ISO's. Many modern cameras also employ noise reduction and / or sharpness reduction at higher sensitivities.

To measure noise levels we take a sequence of images of a GretagMacBeth ColorChecker chart (controlled artificial daylight lighting). The exposure is matched to the ISO (ie. ISO 200, 1/200 sec for consistency of exposure between cameras). The image sequence is run through our own proprietary noise measurement tool (version 1.4 in this review). Click here for more information. (Note that noise values indicated on the graphs here can not be compared to those in other reviews). Room temperature is approximately 22°C (~72°F), simulated daylight lighting.

Canon EOS 40D vs. Nikon D200 vs. Pentax K10D

  • Canon EOS 40D: Canon 50 mm F1.4 lens, Aperture Priority, Manual WB,
    Default Parameters (Standard PS), High ISO NR (Default; Off), JPEG Large / Fine
     
  • Nikon D200: Nikkor 50 mm F1.4 Macro lens, Aperture Priority, Manual WB,
    Default Parameters (Normal), High ISO NR (Normal), JPEG Large / Fine
     
  • Pentax K10D: Pentax 50 mm F1.4 lens, Aperture Priority, Manual WB,
    Default Parameters (Natural), JPEG Large / Fine
Canon EOS 40D ISO 100 Nikon D200
ISO 100
Pentax K10D
ISO 100

Canon EOS 40DISO 200 Nikon D200
ISO 200
Pentax K10D
ISO 200

Canon EOS 40DISO 400 Nikon D200
ISO 400
Pentax K10D
ISO 400

Canon EOS 40DISO 800 Nikon D200
ISO 800
Pentax K10D
ISO 800

Canon EOS 40DISO 1600 Nikon D200
ISO 1600
Pentax K10D
ISO 1600

Canon EOS 40DISO 3200 Nikon D200
ISO 3200
Pentax K10D n/a

From ISO 100 to 400 there's very little to choose between these three cameras, at ISO 800 we begin to see some chroma noise in the K10D's gray crop as well as the effects of luminance noise reduction in the detail of the D200 crop. At ISO 1600 the difference grows, the EOS 40D and K10D maintaining more detail than the D200 but both with more visible chroma noise (thanks to Nikon's stronger chroma noise reduction). At ISO 3200 the 40D is looking much better than the D200 with considerably better detail reproduction and lower (although color mottled; this can be reduced, see next page) noise levels overall.

Luminance noise graph

Indicated ISO sensitivity is on the horizontal axis of this graph, standard deviation of luminosity on the vertical axis.

Chroma (color) noise graph

Indicated ISO sensitivity is on the horizontal axis of this graph, standard deviation of color on the vertical axis.

ISO Sensitivity / Noise levels (contd.)

In-camera High ISO noise reduction

A new feature introduced on the EOS 40D is optional 'High ISO Noise Reduction' which can be enabled via C.Fn II-1. As you can see from the graph below this appears to apply stronger chroma noise reduction while maintaining luminance detail (it made almost no difference to luminance noise). This leads to images which have less noticeable color blotch type noise and more film like grain, the only downside to using this option is reduced buffer space in continuous drive. The slight white balance shift you see in the crops below the graph are simply because we didn't re-capture the white balance preset after enabling noise reduction.

Indicated ISO sensitivity is on the horizontal axis of this graph, standard deviation of luminosity on the vertical axis (note that the standard deviation scale here is magnified 2x compared to the graphs on the previous page).

In-camera High ISO noise reduction Off / On (ISO 400 - 3200)

Canon EOS 40D
ISO 400
ISO NR Off
Canon EOS 40D
ISO 400
ISO NR On
Nikon D200
ISO 400

Canon EOS 40D
ISO 800
ISO NR Off
Canon EOS 40D
ISO 800
ISO NR On
Nikon D200
ISO 800

Canon EOS 40D
ISO 1600
ISO NR Off
Canon EOS 40D
ISO 1600
ISO NR On
Nikon D200
ISO 1600

Canon EOS 40D
ISO 3200
ISO NR Off
Canon EOS 40D
ISO 3200
ISO NR On
Nikon D200
ISO 3200

RAW noise reduction

As noted earlier both Digital Photo Professional and Adobe Camera RAW have selectable noise reduction options, both providing control over chrominance and luminance noise reduction independently. Digital Photo Professional provides three levels for each (Off, Low, High), Adobe Camera RAW provides a 0-100 scale for each. It's clear that even when the EOS 40D has its 'High ISO noise reduction' option disabled (as it is by default) there is still some noise reduction being applied by the camera.

The graph below demonstrates the differences between various noise reduction options compared to in-camera JPEG. As you can see the camera applies considerably more noise reduction by default than either DPP or ACR and that out of the two ACR does a better job at suppressing noise with its default settings. DPP's noise reduction worked but wasn't as effective as that of ACR which provides much more flexibility with its larger range of NR.

Noise reduction comparison at ISO 1600, graph

  • JPEG = JPEG direct from the camera (High ISO NR off / on)
  • DPP [a] [b] = Digital Photo Professional [luminance NR] [chrominance NR]
  • ACR [a] [b] = Adobe Camera RAW [luminance NR] [chrominance NR]

Standard deviation is on the horizontal axis of this graph, different output options on the vertical axis.

Noise reduction comparison at ISO 1600, test chart crops

  • JPEG = JPEG direct from the camera (High ISO NR off / on)
  • Canon DPP [a] / [b] = Digital Photo Professional [luminance NR] / [chrominance NR]
  • Adobe Camera RAW [a] / [b] = Adobe Camera RAW [luminance NR] / [chrominance NR]

JPEGHigh ISO NR Off (default) JPEGHigh ISO NR On n/a

Canon DPP Off / Off (default) Canon DPP Off / High Canon DPP High / High

Adobe Camera RAW 0 / 25 (default) Adobe Camera RAW 25 / 25 Adobe Camera RAW 75 / 25


Dynamic Range

Our new Dynamic Range measurement system involves shooting a calibrated Stouffer Step Wedge (13 stops total range) which is backlit using a daylight balanced lamp (98 CRI). A single shot of this produces a gray scale wedge from (the cameras) black to clipped white (example below). Each step of the scale is equivalent to 1/3 EV (a third of a stop), we select one step as 'middle gray' and measure outwards to define the dynamic range. Hence there are 'two sides' to our results, the amount of shadow range (below middle gray) and the amount of highlight range (above middle gray).

To most people highlight range is the first thing they think about when talking about dynamic range, that is the amount of highlight detail the camera can capture before it clips to white. Shadow range is more complicated, in our test we stop measuring values below middle gray as soon as the luminance value drops below our defined 'black point' (about 2% luminance) or the signal-to-noise ratio drops below a predefined value (where shadow detail would be swamped by noise), whichever comes first.

Picture Style options

As we have previously revealed the various Picture Styles use either one of two tone curves, the first more contrasty curve for Standard, Portrait, Landscape and Monochrome Picture Styles and a slightly flatter curve for Neutral and Faithful Picture Styles. Neither curve delivers more dynamic range and they both clip highlights at the same point.

Image Highlight tone priority

One feature new to the EOS 40D (although previously seen on the EOS-1D Mark III) is designed to deliver more highlight range. It's available via C.Fn II-3, once enabled the usable ISO range becomes ISO 200 - 1600 (ISO 100 and 3200 no longer available). In this mode the camera must be applying slightly less gain than normal combined with a different tone curve to deliver almost a whole stop (0.9 EV) more highlight range, that's pretty impressive.

ISO Sensitivity and Dynamic Range

The EOS 40D produced a fairly consistent nine stops (around 9 EV) of dynamic range from ISO 100 to 1600 dropping to 7.4 EV at ISO 3200 (due to shadow noise). While these are higher figures (by some two thirds of a stop) than we are used to seeing from most other digital SLRs the EOS 40D's improvement is in shadow range, highlight range (that above middle gray) still clipping at around 3.4 EV. We can make some assumption that this improved shadow range is thanks to the new 14-bit processing pipeline.

Sensitivity Shadow range Highlight range Usable range
ISO 100 -5.7 EV 3.4 EV 9.1 EV
ISO 200 -5.7 EV 3.4 EV 9.1 EV
ISO 400 -5.5 EV 3.4 EV 8.9 EV
ISO 800 -5.5 EV 3.4 EV 8.9 EV
ISO 1600 -5.5 EV 3.4 EV 8.9 EV
ISO 3200 -4.0 EV 3.4 EV 7.4 EV

Dynamic Range compared

As you can see the EOS 40D produced slightly more highlight range than the D200 and over a third of a stop more than the K10D. Its biggest advantage however is at the shadow end where it extends to almost six stops below middle gray compared to around five stops for the other cameras. The 40D also features a softer 'roll off' at the highlight end which will deliver less hard-clipped looking white highlights.

Camera (ISO 100)
Shadow range
Highlight range
Usable range
Canon EOS 40D -5.7 EV 3.4 EV 9.1 EV
Nikon D200 -5.0 EV 3.2 EV 8.2 EV
Pentax K10D -4.5 EV 2.8 EV 7.3 EV
Canon EOS 30D -5.1 EV 3.3 EV 8.4 EV

The wedges below are created by our measurement system from the values read from the step wedge, the red lines indicate approximate shadow and highlight range (the dotted line indicating middle gray).




RAW headroom

Experience has told us that there is typically around 1 EV (one stop) of extra information available at the highlight end in RAW files and that a negative digital exposure compensation when converting such files can recover detail lost to over-exposure. As with previous reviews we settled on Adobe Camera RAW for conversion to retrieve the maximum dynamic range from our test shots.

As you can see the default Adobe Camera RAW conversion delivers less dynamic range than JPEG from the camera (a more contrasty tone curve and less noise reduction in shadows). The best we could achieve was nearly eleven stops (11 EV) of total dynamic range, more importantly almost a stop of that is in highlights (although with no guarantee of color accuracy).

  • ACR Default: Exp. 0.0 EV, Blacks 5, Contrast +25, Curve Medium
  • ACR Best: Exp. -1.0 EV, Shadows 0, Bright. 70, Contrast -50, Curve Linear




WARNING: Although ACR was able to retrieve the 'luminance' (brightness) of wedge steps which were previously clipped there's no guarantee of color accuracy as individual channels may clip before others. This can be seen fairly clearly in the examples below, on the right the negative digital exposure compensation has revealed some more detail in the background but this soon turns into gray as one or more of the color channels clips.

Adobe Camera RAW default conversion Adobe Camera RAW with -3.0 EV digital comp.


Color reproduction

Here you can see a generated GretagMacbeth ColorChecker chart, place your mouse over any of the labels below it to see the color reproduction in that mode. Select a camera/setting combination from the 'Compared to' drop-down to comparative boxes inside each patch.

Unsurprisingly (but sort of nice from a consistency point of view) the EOS 40D delivered exactly the same color response as the EOS 30D and EOS 400D, their now standardized Picture Style's at least mean that going from one Canon SLR to another you should get the same color. The color hue response is also virtually the same as the Nikon D200 and Pentax K10D although both used different tone curves which lead to slightly different 'brightness'.

Canon EOS 40D Compared to:  
           
           
           
           
Standard Portrait Landscape Neutral
Faithful Monochrome Adobe RGB

Artificial light White Balance

It's getting a bit old to say this in every Canon SLR review but the facts are pretty obvious, the EOS 40D doesn't do automatic white balance in artificial light, full stop. If you want white whites and your indoors or in any mixed light situation you will almost definitely need to take a manual preset or use the Kelvin temperature option. The whole 'we believe photographers want a representation of the light color in the scene' argument falls down when you consider that your eye doesn't see the light in any way as yellow as the camera captures it (and in any case if that's the intention then give the photographer the choice to have 'Accurate white AWB' or 'Representative AWB').

Incandescent - Auto WB
Red: 15.9%, Blue: -24.1%, Poor
Incandescent - Incandescent preset WB
Red: 10.3%, Blue: -16.0%, Poor
Fluorescent - Auto WB
Red: 7.4%, Blue: -11.8%, Average
Fluorescent - Fluorescent preset WB
Red: 6.8%, Blue: -6.8%, Average

The manual white balance dance (again)

Again (mentioned in previous Canon SLR reviews) something else which can get frustrating is the 'Now select manual white balance' message you are presented after taking a manual white balance reading (assuming you're not already in manual white balance), why not simply switch the camera to manual white balance, wouldn't this remove a step for the user?

Long Exposure noise reduction / Night shots

Our usual 30 second exposure test produced no hot pixels from the EOS 40D, so the optional long exposure noise reduction option (dark frame subtraction using an equal exposure with the shutter closed) made no difference here.

Noise reduction Off Noise reduction On
ISO 100, 30 sec, F8 ISO 100, 30 sec, F8
(Brightness boosted by 50% in these crops)

Flash

Overall a good performance from the internal flash, no color balance issues and it coped very well with a white background (which typically throws most flash metering systems).

Highlight tone priority

The 'Highlight tone priority' option on the EOS 40D is activated by C.Fn II-3 , according to the 40D user manual it "Improves the highlight detail. The dynamic range is expanded from the standard 18% gray to bright highlights. The gradation between the grays and highlights becomes smoother." it goes on to warn "noise in the shadow areas may be slightly more than usual." We have already examined the effect of this option on Dynamic Range, below is a fairly good example of the difference enabling Highlight tone priority has on a real life shot (note that to produce the over-exposed areas in these shots we had to use +1.33 EV exposure compensation).

Highlight tone priority off Highlight tone priority on
ISO 200, 1/200 sec, F8 ISO 200, 1/200 sec, F8 (Highlight tone priority)

Overall Image Quality / Specifics

I always go into a review such as this half-hoping to discover Canon has finally slipped up and we could find something critical to say about image quality, but I'm afraid for the competition the EOS 40D is another strong performer. Despite sharing identical specifications (10.5 total megapixels, 22.2 x 14.8 mm) the EOS 40D's sensor does appear to be different (or at least its backend electronics) to the EOS 400D (Digital Rebel XTi) as it did manage to deliver lower noise and higher dynamic range (topping nine stops, which is, apart from the Fujifilm S5 Pro, the best out-of-the-camera SLR performance we've had to date).

The EOS 40D's images always deliver lots of detail although you do get the feeling that they could be a little crisper and have slightly less visible sharpening if the anti-alias filter were less strong (this is done to avoid moire). You do also perhaps get the feeling that the obsession with keeping noise down means that in some cases images look almost unnaturally 'clean' (I've seen people refer to this as plastic). As mentioned above Canon's canned and now standard-across-the-range Picture Style tone and color combination do produce consistent performance between models.

by facestar 2007. 12. 28. 12:51

Canon PowerShot G9 Review,
Simon Joinson, October 2007


Review based on a production Canon PowerShot G9, Firmware version 1.00

Until the arrival of the G7 last September the majority of observers had written off Canon's 'prosumer' G range, presuming that the arrival of affordable digital SLRs had effectively killed the market for high-end compacts such as this. Barely a year later the G7 has been replaced by the G9, a relatively minor update that increases the pixel count from 10MP to 12MP and the screen size from 2.5 to 3.0 inches and - more importantly given the outcry caused by its omission from the G7 - the return of raw shooting capabilities. Other minor tweaks include a better grip and the addition of wireless flash capabilities. Everything else; the 6x stabilized zoom, flash hot shoe, classic all-metal design and solid build, expansive feature set and extensive manual control system is carried over from the G7.

The G7 receive very mixed responses upon its arrival last year, though as we noted at the time, much of this was because it suffered in comparison to its predecessors (such as the G6) - the lack of defining features such as raw mode, remote control, info panel and rotating LCD made the G7 feel very much like a glorified A series model rather than the flagship it was obviously intended to be. Although there's still no vari-angle screen Canon has addressed a couple of the main complaints about the G7 (the lack of raw and difficulty of shooting single-handed due to lack of grip), and the price - around $500 - has stayed the same. So is it enough to return the G series to its former glory? Let's find out.

Note that some sections of this review (feature descriptions where nothing has changed) are reproduced from the G7 review.

Headline features

  • 12.1 Megapixels (1/1.7” sensor) with RAW mode for maximum image control
  • 6x optical zoom lens with optical Image Stabilizer and SR coating
  • DIGIC III and iSAPS for lightning fast response, superb image quality and advanced Noise Reduction
  • Face Detection AF/AE/FE and Red-Eye Correction in playback
  • 3.0” high-resolution, PureColor LCD II with extra wide viewing angle
  • ISO 1600 and Auto ISO Shift
  • Compact body with dedicated ISO and Multi Control dials
  • 25 shooting modes including full manual control and 2 custom settings
  • Extra telephoto reach with Digital Tele-Converter and Safety Zoom
  • Hot shoe support for Canon Speedlite flashes and optional lens accessories

Powershot G9 vs G7: What's changed?

The G9 is an incremental upgrade in the truest sense; externally the body is almost identical, and there are only three really key changes; the raw mode, the screen and the sensor.

  • Higher resolution (12MP vs 10MP)
  • Slightly larger sensor (1/1.7 as opposed to 1/1.8 inch)
  • Redesigned front grip and rear thumb rest
  • Enhanced Face Detection technology
  • Red-eye correction in playback
  • Auto ISO shift
  • Compatibility with ST-E2 wireless flash transmitter
  • Marginally better battery life (240 shots vs 220 shots, CIPA standard)
  • Two custom White Balance settings (as opposed to one)

PowerShot G9 Key specifications

Street price • US: $480
• UK: £330
Body Material Metal/Plastic
Sensor • 1/1.7" Type CCD
• 12.1 million effective pixels
Image sizes • 4000 x 3000
• 3264 x 2448
• 2592 x 1944
• 1600 x 1200
• 640 x 480
• 4000 x 2248 (16:9)
Movie clips • 1024 x 768 @ 15fps
• 640 x 480 @ 30 / 15fps
• 320 x 240 @ 30 / 15fps
• 160 x 120 @ 15fps
• AVI Motion JPEG with WAVE monaural audio
Lens

• 35-210mm (35mm equiv)
• F2.8-4.8
• 6x optical zoom

Focus

• TTL autofocus
• AiAF (Face Detection / 9-point)
• Single / Continuous AF
• Manual focus
• Focus lock
• 1-point AF (center or flexizone)
• 1 cm minimum focus range (macro)

Metering • Evaluative
• Center-weighted average
• Spot (Linked to center or selected AF point)
Shutter speed

• 15-1/2000 sec

Aperture • F2.8-F8.0 (wide)
• F4.8-F8.0 (tele)
Shooting mode • Auto
• Program AE
• Shutter Priority AE
• Aperture Priority AE
• Manual
• Custom (2 modes)
• Stitch Assist
• Movie
• Special Scene
Sensitivity • Auto
• High ISO Auto
• ISO 80
• ISO 100
• ISO 200
• ISO 400
• ISO 800
• ISO 1600
White Balance • Auto
• Daylight
• Cloudy
• Tungsten
• Fluorescent
• Fluorescent H
• Flash
• Underwater
• Custom
Image parameters

My Colors (My Colors Off, Vivid, Neutral, Sepia, B&W, Positive Film, Lighter Skin Tone, Darker Skin Tone, Vivid Blue, Vivid Green, Vivid Red, Custom Color)

Continuous • Normal: approx 2fps
• AF: approx 0.8fps
Flash • Auto, Manual Flash On / Off, Slow Sync, Red-eye reduction
• Second curtain sync
• Range: 30cm - 4.0m (wide) / 2.5m (tele)
• Hot shoe
Storage • SD / SDHC / MMC card compatible
• 32 MB card supplied
Viewfinder • Real-image zoom
• Dioptre correction
LCD monitor • 2.5-inch P-Si TFT
• 207,000 pixels
• Adjustable Brightness
• 100% coverage
Connectivity • USB 2.0 High speed
• A/V out (NTSC/PAL switchable)
Power • Rechargeable Li-ion battery NB-2LH/NB-2L
• Charger included
• Optional AC adapter kit
Other features

Orientation sensor
• DPOF
• PictBridge
• Index view
• Histogram
• 4x digital zoom
• Sound memo
• Direct print (Canon & PictBridge)
• 2 and 10 sec self-timer (plus custom)
• 25 languages

Optional accessories • Speedlite 220EX/ 430EX/ 580EX
• Tele-converter (2.0x) TC-DC58C
• Wide-converter (0.75x) WC-DC58B
• Lens adapter/Hood set LA-DC58H
• Waterproof Case WP-DC11
• Waterproof Case Weight WW-DC1
• Soft Case DCC-600
• High Power Flash HF-DC1
• AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC20
• Rechargeable Li-ION battery pack NB-2LH
• Car Battery Charger CBC-NB2
Weight (no batt) 320 g (11.3 oz)
Dimensions 106.4 x 71.9 x 42.5 mm
(4.2 x 2.8 x 1.7 in)

Design

Like the G7 before it, the G9 is an undoubtedly handsome, serious-looking camera with classic 'rangefinder' styling and a build quality that puts most digital SLRs to shame. The external skin of the body is nearly all-metal (only the top plate is plastic) and the attractive matt-black finish exudes quality; and impression that's reinforced by the weight; at around 370g with battery and card the G9 is one of the heaviest compacts on the market and is, for want of a better word, nicely 'dense'.

Although superficially very similar to the G7 there are differences. Most obvious is the larger screen, which now takes up an even larger proportion of the back of the camera and has squashed the optical finder and meant a couple of the buttons (playback and shortcut/direct print) had to move out of the way - and shrunk a little in the process. One small - but welcome - change is a small thumb rest on the top right hand corner of the back plate and a slightly more prominent finger grip on the front of the body. This might not look like much but it improves handling significantly - far more than appearances might suggest. The only other immediately noticeable change is that the cosmetic ring around the base of the lens (which is removed when using the wide or tele converter) is now painted black. I preferred the chrome of the G7, but this is a small detail.

In your hand

The more I used the G7 the more I grew to appreciate how different it is to the vast majority of compacts that have passed through our offices over the last couple of years. It's one of those rare cameras that people can't resist picking up and playing with; it has that satisfying tactile quality and weight that comes with the kind of self-indulgent over-engineering normally reserved for swiss watches. Compared to the G7 - and now the G9 - even most entry level digital SLRs feel like plastic toys, and despite sharing many internal components with much cheaper compact cameras it really does have the air of a serious photographic tool about it.

But of course the classic 'rangefinder' styling and clean lines come at a price - unlike most cameras in this class the G7's lack of anything to really 'get hold of' meant it only really felt safe supported with both hands. The G9 is much better, thanks to the improved grip, but it's still essentially a fairly heavy smooth block - hardly the ideal design for a camera.

Body elements

The G9 uses an NB-2LH Li-Ion battery that sits under a plastic covering door (the only vaguely flimsy part of the entire camera) on the base. The battery is supplied with an external charger (which takes around 105 mins). Battery life from the 720 mAh pack isn't great, but at around 240 shots (CIPA standard) it is marginally better than the G7 - and the battery type is very common, making inexpensive spares easy to find.

The SD card slot is located in the same compartment. The G9 is compatible with standard SD cards up to 2GB, and SDHC cards for higher capacities. You can also, if you wish, use MMC / MMCPlus cards.

Annoyingly you cannot open the battery door - and therefore cannot change the memory card - when the camera is mounted on a tripod. Grrr.

The G7's screen was very nice, but the G9's screen is even better; it's bigger (3.0 inch), sharper (up from 207k to 230k pixels) and brighter, and has a very wide viewing angle. Like the G7 the G9's screen has an effective anti-reflective coating, but again it is prone to smearing unless you shoot wearing white gloves. And wearing a balaclava.

The optical viewfinder is fairly bright but is very small and to be honest - like most such cameras - I found it all but unusable in most circumstances. Obviously with a 6x zoom (and a 210mm long end) there's only so much you can expect from an optical 'tunnel' finder, but we were impressed by how well it deals with parallax and how accurate it is for framing. Note that although it looks smaller than the G7's finder, it is identical.
The shutter release sits inside a small circular zoom rocker and has a slightly more positive action than the G7 I used (there is less travel, and it's easier to find the 'half press' point). Below the shutter release is the main power button and to the left the main mode dial - complete with two custom modes for saving your own preffered settings.
The G9's slim built-in flash has a 4.0m (13.1 ft) reach at the short end of the zoom, falling to 2.5m (8.2 ft) at full telephoto. Naturally there's lots of control, from standard flash modes to front/rear curtain slow synch, flash AE-compensation and three-step output control in manual mode (16 steps when using an external flash). We also found the flash worked perfectly in macro mode, down to around 11 inches.
The G9's lens offers an impressive optically stabilized 35-210mm (equiv) 6x zoom range, biting at the ankles of the 'super zoom' models such as Canon's own S5 IS. What it doesn't have is the ultra wide aperture that was the signature of every G series model before the G7. The F2.8-4.8 range is nothing special, and does mean you have to rely on higher ISO settings than you might like - especially at the long end of the zoom.

One of the big differences between the G9 and the majority of other compact digicams is the inclusion of a fully dedicated flash hot shoe, compatible with Canon's 220EX, 430EX and 580EX II guns (and several dedicated flashguns from independent suppliers). With Canon's flashguns you'll get most of the features you would using an SLR, including power zooming. To the left is the unique ISO dial, which we like a lot.
The zoom retracts fully into the body when powered down. At the wide end of the zoom it extends by around 3cm, zooming to the long end adds about another 1cm.

Canon currently supplies two add-on lenses for the G9; a 2.0x teleconverter (TC-DC58C) and the huge 0.75x wide converter (WC-DC58B), shown here, which takes the wideangle down to around 26mm equiv. The lenses bayonet on and off (after the removal of the cosmetic chrome ring).

Note this is a picture of the G7.

The rear controls. Canon adopted another new control system for the G7 that is carried through to the G9. Around the conventional four-way controller (which is used in record mode purely to change macro, flash, focus and drive modes) is a rotating ring that changes exposure settings and navigates menus. It takes some getting used to (especially if you're used to using a camera with a standard 4-way controller), but is very quick once you do, and it's really grown on me.
As well as an AE/FE lock button (not shown) the G9 has a customizable shortcut button that can be assigned to control several useful functions including white balance, ND filter and AF lock.
The USB (2.0 high speed) and AV ports are located under a plastic cover on the side of the camera (viewed from the rear). There is no DC-in port (you can use the G9 mains powered, but this requires the purchase of a separate 'dummy battery' type adaptor.

Operation and controls

It is perhaps inevitable that the G9 takes a little longer to master than your average compact camera; it has a hefty feature set and a is aimed at the kind of user that wants that control at his - or her - fingertips. The slightly bulkier body has allowed Canon to include a large number of buttons without completely filling every square inch of the surface, but it all still feels a little crammed in, and - as mentioned earlier - there's really not a lot of room for your thumb to rest if you're trying to shoot single-handed.

Like the G7 before it the G9 is not a camera everyone will take to immediately - at times it is frustratingly counterintuitive and some aspects of the control system/user interface are surprisingly inconsistent. But after a few day's use it all starts to 'make sense', and you start to appreciate the G9 as a true photographic tool. It's not an easy task to make a camera this small - and with this many features - transparent and intuitive in use, but Canon hasn't done a bad job at all.

In this way the G9 is much more like an SLR; you really do have to learn to use it, and to learn its foibles, before you can really start to take advantage of the large feature set. I started off hating the user interface, but I soon learned to love it.

It's also worth mentioning that the G9 is unusually fairly customizable; as well as the shortcut button (which can be assigned to control any of a number of functions) there are two custom modes that allow you to save your favorite settings.

Rear of camera

The rear of the G9 is fairly well covered with buttons and switches, putting just about every commonly-accessed photographic control at your fingertips; I found no need to enter the menu system at all when out shooting.

Top of camera

The top plate of the G9 is equally busy; from the left is the ISO dial, flash hot shoe, mode dial, shutter release and zoom control and power switch. From this angle you can clearly see the slab-like minimalist styling and almost total lack of anything to really get hold of (though you can, just, see the slightly enlarged front 'fingertip' grip).

Display and menus

The most basic preview screen showing focus point, AE compensation setting and - as here - the setting being used in aperture priority / shutter priority mode. As usual you can change the amount of information shown on-screen, and there is a 'grid' option (shown here) for those of us who struggle with straight horizons and - of course - a preview histogram. It can get get a little crowded on-screen with everything showing, but the extra screen real estate means it's marginally better than the G7 in this respect.
Half-press the shutter release and the camera will calculate exposure (AE) and focus (AF) indicating the aperture and shutter speed chosen, along with a camera shake warning if necessary. As with all modern Powershots the ISO in use is indicated - even in AUTO ISO mode. If you hold down the AE lock button with the shutter half-pressed you get a program shift function with a very pretty display of aperture and shutter speed combinations.
In shutter or aperture priority mode turning the control ring moves up and down the scale with a very pleasing faux-analog display as shown here. In manual mode the +/- button switches focus between the aperture and shutter speed settings; a nice 'needle' exposure meter also appears on the right of the screen.
As usual the FUNC menu offers a wide range of controls over shooting and image parameters. Like its predecessors the G9 has a 3 stop neutral density filter you can use if you need to cut down on the light. You get the usual array of 'MyColors' effects and - more usefully - 5 levels of Sharpness, Contrast, Saturation, Red, Green, Blue and Skintone.
Of course the big news is that the G9 now supports RAW capture. The record menu offers the option to save a Large/Fine JPEG at the same time as a RAW file (you can't save a 'Super Fine' but the visible difference is minimal).
There are three focus modes; 9-point AiAF (where the camera chooses the focus point 'intelligently'), FlexiZone (choose your own focus point from 375 across the screen) and 'face detection' (which does what its name suggests, and works very well). Manual focus is a simple case of pressing the MF button and turning the control dial to move up and down the scale. You can choose to have the area around the focus point magnified in manual focus mode (not shown).
The scene (SCN) mode adds 13 subject programs covering most of the common shooting situations, plus a (low resolution) ISO 3200 mode and Canon's unusual Color Accent and Color Swap modes. Record mode menu allows you to customize everything from flash synch to the spot AE point and self-timer delay. It is also here where you'll find the control for image stabilization. A new feature first seen on the S3 IS allows you to customize the on-screen display in record mode (there are two custom settings, activated by repeated presses of the DISP button).
The shortcut button (direct print button in playback mode) can be customized to control one of eight functions (including White Balance, metering mode, IS mode and AF-lock). Bizarrely Canon has removed some of the options (including file size/quality and MyColors options). It's not a big thing, but it's odd to see features being removed... The G9 has a useful ISO 80-1600 sensitivity range, controlled by the dedicated dial on the top of the camera. As usual if you use either of the Auto ISO settings (standard or HI) the camera doesn't save the ISO used in the file's exif data.

Playback menus

One of the three alternative play mode views includes a histogram display and exposure information. You can also get this handy focus check display which zooms in on the focus point (the SET button switches from one focus point to the other in AiAF mode). You can also set this as an option for the instant review display in record mode.
Turning the control dial in playback mode allows you to scroll quickly through images (you scroll through full screen images using the left and right keys). The G9 provides play magnification up to to 10x. You can move around the image using the 4-way controller. Press the zoom controller towards the wide angle to switch to a 3x3 thumbnail index.
The G9 allows you to organize saved shots into 'categories', which you can assign to any image if you're the type who leaves hundreds of pictures on your card and needs to categorize them to make finding them easier. The beefed up Jump feature has its own menu, allowing you to move from shot to shot based on various criteria.
You can apply 'My Colors' effects to saved images, which is much better than committing to them at the point you take the picture. The G9 has Canon's fancy new playback options, including slideshow transitions and a useful playback mode orientation sensor.
The play menu offers the usual range of options, including protecting, rotating and deleting images, plus a sound recorder. The G9 also has Canon's new separate Print menu, which now allows you to select a 'range' of images in addition to the options offered by the G7.
The G9 has a new improved red-eye correction option in playback mode (it uses face detection technology so you don't need to find the eyes yourself). Finally the two page setup menu, where basic camera settings (and card formatting) are accessed.

Timing & Performance

Overall performance is roughly the same as the G7, which is generally speaking a good thing - in most respects the G7 was a very speedy camera. That said, I'd hoped Canon would use the G9 upgrade as an opportunity to improve on the slightly under-par shutter lag when using the LCD and to speed up the focus (particularly in low light and at the long end of the zoom). Whilst side by side tests showed that the G9 is marginally faster at finding focus it's still far from class-leading.

The focus speed is perfectly acceptable in undemanding shooting conditions, especially given the huge zoom range, but there are faster cameras on the market - even the S5 IS, with twice the zoom range, consistently beats it at the wide end of the zoom. The G9's autofocus is actually quite slow in low light or macro mode. Shutter lag when using the LCD is also a little disappointing (though to be fair I didn't personally notice any problems when out shooting; I don't really 'do' action). This is down to the lag in the live view itself (which is around 0.07 secs) - the time between pressing the shutter and taking the picture is a very short 0.05 seconds (approx) - so if you need to use the G9 on a 'hair trigger' - don't use the LCD screen. Note that the shutter lag with flash (one the G7's problem areas) has been improved - down from 0.5 seconds to around 0.3 seconds.

The larger files created by the 12MP sensor have also impacted on the continuous shooting speed, which now tops out at around 1.5 frames per second (the G7 managed 2.0 fps), though again this will only be of concern if you shoot a lot of 'action' - and there are plenty of cameras out there better suited than this one to that particular type of photography.

On a more positive note the G9 is one of the only compact camera we've ever used that offers a genuinely usable RAW mode; shot to shot times are 3.0 seconds at worst (including focus time) and you can even shoot continuously at around one shot every 1.1 seconds in RAW mode. That's pretty impressive buffering for a non-SLR camera.

Timing Notes

All times calculated as an average of three operations. Unless otherwise stated all timings were made on a 4000 x 3000 Super-Fine JPEG image (approx. 5,300 KB per image). The media used for these tests was a 1.0GB SanDisk Extreme III SD card.

Action Details
Time, secs

Power: Off to Record

  1.2
Power: Off to Play Image displayed 1.3
Power: Record to Off Lens retracted and all activity ceased 1.6
Power: Play to Off When buffer is empty (lens extended) 1.4
Power: Play to Off When buffer is empty (lens already retracted) < 0.2
Record Review Image displayed 0.8
Mode: Record to Play   1.7
Mode: Play to Record   ~ 1.3
Play: Magnify To full magnification (10x) 0.9
Play: Image to Image Time to display each saved image (fade effect transition) ~ 0.5
Play: Image to Image Time to display each saved image (no effect) *1 ~ 0.3
Play: Thumbnail view 3 x 3 thumbnails 0.5

Action Details
Time, seconds
Zoom from Wide to Tele 35 to 210 mm (12 x) 1.7
Half-press Lag (0->S1) Wide angle (AiAF or FlexiZone focus) ~ 0.4 *2
Half-press Lag (0->S1) Telephoto (AiAF or FlexiZone focus) ~ 0.5 *2
Half to Full-press Lag (S1->S2) LCD live view ~ 0.12 *3
Half to Full-press Lag (S1->S2) Optical Viewfinder ~ 0.05
Full-press Lag (0->S2) LCD live view, wide angle ~ 0.6
Off to Shot Taken LCD live view 2.7
Shot to Shot Flash off, JPEG Super Fine 2.3
Shot to Shot Flash off, RAW + JPEG 3.0
Shot to Shot Flash on (red-eye reduction off) *4 2.3
Shot to Shot Flash on (red-eye reduction on) *4 2.7
*1 You can also hold down the left or right buttons and scroll very quickly through images at approx 5 frames per second.
*2 Under ideal conditions. The G9 focus slows down in low light at longer focal lengths and when shooting at or near the closest focus distance.
*3 With the flash on the shutter lag extends to around 0.3 seconds
*4 In this test the subject distance is only 3 feet (0.9 m) - the recycle time will increase at greater subject distances and after a few consecutive shots.

Lag Timing Definitions

Half-press Lag (0->S1)
Many digital camera users prime the AF and AE systems on their camera by half-pressing the shutter release. This is the amount of time between a half-press of the shutter release and the camera indicating an auto focus & auto exposure lock on the LCD monitor / viewfinder (ready to shoot).
 

(Prime AF/AE)
Half to Full-press Lag (S1->S2)
The amount of time it takes from a full depression of the shutter release button (assuming you have already primed the camera with a half-press) to the image being taken.
 

(Take shot, AF/AE primed)
Full-press Lag (0->S2)
The amount of time it takes from a full depression of the shutter release button (without performing a half-press of the shutter release beforehand) to the image being taken. This is more representative of the use of the camera in a spur of the moment 'point and shoot' situation.
 

(Take shot, AF/AE not primed)

Continuous mode

The tables below show the results of our continuous shooting test, indicating the actual frame rate along with maximum number of frames and how long you would have to wait after taking the maximum number of frames before you could take another shot. Media used for these tests was a 1.0GB SanDisk Extreme III SD card. Shutter speed was kept above 1/200 sec during these tests.

Continuous drive mode

The G9 has two continuous shooting modes (standard and AF-continuous), both of which allow you to shoot pretty much indefinitely (we gave up counting after about 70 shots) with a fast card. The Continuous AF mode shows the normal live preview between frames (and attempts to refocus between shots), but the normal Continuous mode only shows a very brief review image after each shot (no live preview), and the focus is fixed after the first shot. It's worth noting that the figures below (and those quoted by Canon) are only for ISO settings of under 400; at higher ISO's the frame rate drops to around half these values.

Image Type
Mode
Avg. frames
per sec
Frames in a burst *1
After
burst
*2
12MP RAW + JPEG *3 Continuous 0.7 fps No Limit n/a
12MP RAW + JPEG *3 Continuous AF 0.7 fps*4 No Limit n/a
12MP/6MP/4MP Super-Fine Continuous 1.5 fps No limit n/a
10MP/6MP/4MP Super-Fine Continuous AF 0.8 fps *4 No limit n/a
10MP/6MP/4MP Super-Fine

Continuous mode (flash on)

1.1 fps No limit n/a

*1 In a single "burst" (finger held down on shutter release).
*2 With the shutter release held down. With a fast card it is impossible to fill the buffer
*3 Average speed - it will slow down if the camera has trouble focusing

Although the performance is a step down from the G7 it's not a bad showing at all, and the fact you can shoot at a reasonable rate in RAW mode is very impressive - as is the ability to shoot almost indefinitely at 1.1fps with the flash turned on (though this only works at short distances and in fairly good light).

File Write / Display and Sizes

Timings shown below are the time taken for the camera to process and "flush" the image out to the storage card, the timer was started as soon as the shutter release was pressed and stopped when activity indicator went out. This means the timings also include the camera's processing time and as such are more representative of the actual time to "complete the task". The media used for these tests was a 1.0GB SanDisk Extreme III SD card.

Image Type
Time to store
(secs)

Time to display
(secs)
*3

File size *1
(approx.)
Images on a *2
1.0GB Card
12MP RAW 2.5 ~0.3 12,500 KB 57
12MP RAW + JPEG 2.5 ~0.3 15,500 KB *4 47
12MP JPEG Super-Fine ~1.2 ~0.4 5,300 KB 189
12MP JPEG Fine ~1.1  ~0.4 3,000 KB 318
12MP JPEG Normal ~1.1  ~0.2 1,500 KB 658
8MP JPEG Super-Fine ~1.3  ~0.3 3,200 KB 286
5MP JPEG Super-Fine ~1.2 ~0.3 2,300 KB 391

*1 All file sizes are an average of three files. As is the case with JPEG it's difficult to predict the size of an image because it will vary a fair amount depending on the content of the image (detail and noise).
*2 Camera estimation.
*3 With transition effects turned off
*4 Combined size of RAW and JPEG files

The G9 can process and save a 5MB plus JPEG in around 1.2 seconds, and more impressively a 12.5MB RAW file in under 3.0 seconds, leaving us in no doubt that Canon has not only increased the buffer size, but has beefed up the entire image pipeline, producing performance that, with a fast card, is excellent.

White Balance

The G9 features a grand total of eight white balance settings including the default automatic mode. There's also two manual (custom) white balance options, which are created by aiming the camera at a white (or gray) subject and pressing the SET button. Automatic white balance appeared to work well outdoors and not terribly in mixed lighting, but as per previous Canon digital cameras less well in artificial fluorescent or incandescent light, where it produced a pronounced color cast. It is advisable to switch to the tungsten preset (or set a custom WB) when shooting indoors if you don't like a warm cast to your indoor shots.

Incandescent - Auto WB
Red 11.6%, Blue -17.0%
Poor
Incandescent - Incandescent preset WB
Red -1.7%, Blue -1.9%
Good
Fluorescent - Auto WB
Red 3.8%, Blue -17.9%
Poor
Fluorescent - Fluorescent preset WB
Red 1.4%, Blue -5.1%
Average

Flash Performance

The built-in flash unit has a specified range of 4.0 m at wide angle and 2.5 m at telephoto (when the ISO is set to auto) - which is fine for social snaps and the occasional bit of fill-in, but is hampered by the relatively small maximum aperture as you move up the zoom range. In use we found the flash to work very well indeed, with most indoor flash shots perfectly exposed. The FUNC menu offers a Flash Exposure Compensation setting (-2.0 to +2.0), and the AF illuminator helps focus in low light. We found the red-eye reduction to work well at shorter distances but to be less effective if you move further away and zoom in. One thing worth noting is that the shutter lag when using flash (because of the pre-flash metering) increases to around 0.3 seconds (though this is an improvement over the G7). On a more positive note you can use the flash in continuous (burst) mode.

Of course the inclusion of a dedicated hot shoe means you can expand the G7's flash capabilities as and when you need to.

Skin tone - Slight warm tone. Color chart -Slight warm tone, excellent exposure

Macro Focus

Macro performance is, unsurprisingly, identical to the G7, with the minimum focus distance at the wide (35mm equiv.) end of the zoom a very impressive 1cm, allowing you to capture an area around an inch across. Of course it's not always practical or desirable to get that close, which is why macro performance at the long end of the zoom is also important. At the 210mm equiv. end of the zoom the G9 can focus down to 50cm, capturing an area just over 10cm across. There is some corner softness at the long end, but distortion is very low.

Wide macro - 26 x 19 mm coverage
153 px/mm (3886 px/in)
Distortion: Average
Corner softness: Average
Equiv. focal length: 35 mm
Telephoto macro - 104 x 78 mm coverage
38 px/mm (972 px/in)
Distortion: Low
Corner softness: Above average
Equiv. focal length: 210 mm

Barrel and Pincushion Distortion

The G9 exhibits pretty low distortion given the large focal length range - 1.3% barrel distortion at the wide end, and only the barest measurable distortion (0.3%) at the full 210mm telephoto end. There is also virtually no vignetting at either end of the zoom. There is a hint of corner softness and chromatic aberration when shooting at either end of the zoom with the aperture wide open.

Barrel distortion - 1.3% at Wide angle
Equiv. focal length: 35 mm
Pincushion distortion - 0.2% at Telephoto
Equiv. focal length: 210 mm

Specific image quality issues

Perhaps unsurprisingly the G9's JPEG output isn't significantly different to the G7; the extra two million pixels make little if any difference in 'real world' photography, the color, tonality and contrast are almost identical, and the limitations of such small sensors still painfully obvious if you look too closely. At ISO 80 the output, especially outdoors in good conditions is simply superb (if a little 'over the top' color and sharpening-wise), and aside from the usual dynamic range issues there really isn't much to complain about.

At anything over ISO 100 the effects of noise reduction can be seen on low contrast detail (such as distant foliage or very fine texture), but it's important to note that you'll only see this at 100% on-screen, and at more reasonable enlargement sizes the output is perfectly usable at up to ISO 400.

The ability to bypass the G9's noise reduction (using ACR to process RAW files) means that more experienced users are now free to eke the maximum detail out of the lens/sensor, an important development and one that puts the G9 head and shoulders above its predecessor. The difference in the amount of detail you can get at, say, ISO 160 when shooting raw as opposed to JPEG is remarkable, and you'll only really realize the G9's potential if you shoot raw and expose carefully.

Purple fringing & Chromatic Aberrations

Although nowhere near as bad as we've seen on some Canon compacts (and actually seems better than the G7), the G9 does suffer from occasional mild purple fringing, particularly at the wide end of the zoom and in contre-jour situations such as this. We also saw some red fringing around a couple of blown highlights in over-exposed shots, but this was rare. In some of our test charts you can see fairly obvious chromatic aberration, but it's not something we detected in 'real world' shots.

100% crop 35mm equiv., F2.8

Exposure / Dynamic range / clipping

As we saw with the G7 (and virtually every high resolution compact we test) the G9 suffers from highlight clipping in bright contrasty conditions, a result of the limited dynamic range of sensors with such small pixels. As we see so often things aren't helped by a tendency to over exposure when faced with such scenes, meaning you need to watch the histogram and manually intervene if you want any chance of rescuing highlight detail. Shooting raw helps (there's a little headroom, but not a lot), but the key thing is to watch your exposures when shooting in very contrasty situations (low, bright winter sunlight, for example).

100% crop 35mm equiv., F4.0


ISO Sensitivity / Noise levels

ISO equivalence on a digital camera is the ability to increase the sensitivity of the sensor. This works by turning up the "volume" (gain) on the sensor's signal amplifiers (remember the sensor is an analogue device). By amplifying the signal you also amplify the noise which becomes more visible at higher ISO's. Many modern cameras also employ noise reduction and / or sharpness reduction at higher sensitivities.


To measure noise levels we take a sequence of images of a GretagMacBeth ColorChecker chart (controlled artificial daylight lighting). The exposure is matched to the ISO (ie. ISO 200, 1/200 sec for consistency of exposure between cameras). The image sequence is run through our own proprietary noise measurement tool (version 1.4 in this review). Click here for more information. (Note that noise values indicated on the graphs here can not be compared to those in other reviews.)

Canon PowerShot G9 vs Nikon COOLPIX P5100 vs Canon PowerShot G7

  Canon PowerShot G9
ISO 80
Nikon Coolpix P5100
ISO 64
Canon PowerShot G7
ISO 80
Crops

  Canon PowerShot G9
ISO 100
Nikon Coolpix P5100
ISO 64
Canon PowerShot G7
ISO 100
Crops
  Canon PowerShot G7
ISO 200
Nikon Coolpix P5100
ISO 200
Canon PowerShot G7
ISO 200
Crops

  Canon PowerShot G9
ISO 400
Nikon Coolpix P5100
ISO 400
Canon PowerShot G7
ISO 400
Crops

  Canon PowerShot G9
ISO 800
Nikon Coolpix P5100
ISO 800
Canon PowerShot G7
ISO 800
Crops
  Canon PowerShot G9
ISO 1600
Nikon Coolpix P5100
ISO 1600
Canon PowerShot G7
ISO 1600
Crops

With tiny, high pixel count chips noise is always going to be an issue, and to a large degree this is more a test of the effectiveness (both measurable and visible) of a camera's noise reduction system. Designers have to balance the desire to produce smooth, clean results with the need to retain as much detail as possible (if you blur away the noise, you blur away image detail too).

When we reviewed the G7 I commented on how much better it would have been had Canon used a lower resolution sensor with larger pixels, but I guess it was kind of inevitable that the G9 would have even more pixels (though to be fair the sensor is also a little larger). At lower ISO settings the difference in the end result (noise-wise) is negligible (the amount of noise and the detail loss through noise reduction are very, very similar). At ISO 800 the G9 looks like it's applying slightly higher noise reduction than its predecessor (presumably because the sensor is producing more noise), and at ISO 1600 the appearance is very different - there's little if any difference in the amount of detail lost, but the G9 result looks softer (and the G7 looks noisier). If anything the G7 actually produces better results at ISO 800 and above, though we're splitting hairs, and you always have the option with the G9 to shoot raw.

Unsurprisingly, given that they almost certainly share the same sensor, the G9 and Nikon P5100 results are very similar (from a noise point of view), with both pretty useless at anything over ISO 400 for serious work. We found that the G9 produced very noisy images at ISO 800 in low light - noisier than these crops might suggest.

Low contrast detail

What the crops and graph don't show is the effect of noise reduction on low contrast fine detail such as hair, fur or foliage. An inevitable side effect of noise removal is that this kind of detail is also blurred or smeared, resulting in a loss of 'texture'. In a new test the crops below show the effect of the noise reduction on such texture (fur) as you move up the ISO range.

100% Crops
ISO 80 ISO 100 ISO 200
ISO 400 ISO 800 ISO 1600

We were actually pretty impressed with the G7's performance in the low contrast smearing test, and the G9 is roughly the same at lower ISO settings. Sure there's some loss of detail at anything over ISO 100, but it's less destructive than we've seen with some other high resolution/small sensor compacts recently (don't forget we're looking at 100% crops from a 12MP file here - you'd need to be producing very large prints to be looking this close in the real world). ISO 800 and ISO 1600 are strictly in the 'emergency use only' file (and ISO 400 isn't for anything too detailed), but Canon has to be given credit for retaining a good balance of noise reduction and detail in the ISO 80-200 range.

Real world example

Although most photographers shooting outdoors are going to be looking to avoid using anything but ISO 80 when photographing detailed landscapes, there are always going to be times - in poor light, at the long end of the zoom and so on - when the ability to turn up the ISO in such situations can be very useful. The G9's noise reduction has visible effect at anything over base ISO, but you need to look very closely to see serious blurring of distant foliage at ISO 200, and even at ISO 400 the results are far from unusable. As always you're going to get the best results at ISO 80, but I'd feel perfectly happy going up to ISO 200 for a shot like this if I had to, something you can't say about a lot of today's compact cameras. Note that you can remove the noise reduction totally if you shoot raw and process using Adobe ACR.

100% Crops
ISO 80 ISO 100
ISO 200 ISO 400

Luminance noise graph

Cameras compared:
Canon PowerShot G9, Canon PowerShot G7, Nikon COOLPIX P5100

Indicated ISO sensitivity is on the horizontal axis of this graph, standard deviation of luminosity is on the vertical axis.

Noise is low up to ISO 400 (thanks to an effective NR system). As you move up the range the G9's stronger noise reduction really kicks in, and at the highest settings measurable (and visible) noise is actually lower than the G7.

RGB noise graph

Indicated ISO sensitivity is on the horizontal axis of this graph, standard deviation of each of the red, green and blue channels is on the vertical axis.

Image stabilization

The optical image stabilization system used on the G9 works pretty well for most everyday photography - though don't expect miracles. There are three modes: Continuous (IS on all the time), 'Shoot only' (IS is activated at the moment the exposure is made) and Panning (for horizontally panned shots).

The first option makes framing easier - the IS system steadies the preview image, and we found it more consistently effective at extremes (where the shutter speed is more than 3 stops slower than would normally be used for the focal length you're shooting at) than the shoot only mode.

Shoot only - which doesn't steady the preview image, but is theoretically more efficient because it minimizes the amount of corrective movement required by waiting until the instant the picture is taken - is perfectly effective when you're nearer to the correct shutter speed (and once you're within 1 or 2 stops it is actually more reliable). You may find you get different results than me; we have no quantitative tests for stabilization, and every person's 'shake' is different; users often disagree on which mode works best, so you just have to find which best suits your style of shooting.

Overall I was very impressed with the G9's system, though the design of the G7 means it is more prone to camera shake than some of its larger 'SLR-like' competitors, such as the Panasonic FZ50.

These tests are rather extreme - up to four stops slower than you could safely use without IS - and in 'real life' shots - where you are maybe using a shutter speed two stops slower than normal - the system is remarkably effective- as long as you support the camera carefully with two hands and don't try to 'grab' shots too quickly.

The stabilization test

In this simplified version of our SLR IS test, ten hand-held shots were taken of a static scene with the stabilization off and on. The shutter speed was decreased and repeated (from 1/200 sec to 1/13 sec). The zoom was set to its maximum position (210mm equiv.), the test target was 3 m away from the camera. The test was repeated three times and an average taken.

The resulting images were then inspected and given a blur score - 'Sharp' (no visible blurring at 100%), 'Mild Blur' (the kind of camera shake that is tolerable at small print sizes) and 'Heavy Blur' (virtually unusable due to camera shake) and 'Very Heavy Blur' (little discernible detail).

As the charts below show the IS system does give you about a three stop advantage over shooting without IS, and even dropping down to four stops below the recommended minimum for a 210mm lens I was getting usable shots half the time, with one in four perfectly sharp. Impressive stuff.

Hand-held, no stabilization (210mm equiv.)

As you can see from the chart below even at 1/200th second I was unable to get more than half the shots I took at 1/200 second completely sharp (this is probably due to the design of the G9, which is built for style over comfort). By the time you get to 1/50th sec (2 stops down from the recommended minimum) it's almost impossible to get a sharp - or even usable - result.

Hand-held, stabilization on (210mm equiv.)

With stabilization on the results are much better - we got no blurred shots at all above 1/200th sec, and the majority of shots down to 1/25 sec have little or no blur. Even down to 1/13 sec - a good four stops below the recommended minimum - you've still got a 50:50 chance of getting something usable, and if you take a few 'safety shots' you'll get at least one completely sharp.



Software and RAW conversion

RAW mode

By far the most common complaint about the G7 was the loss of the raw shooting mode that had been a feature of every previous G model, and it came as no surprise when Canon finally relented and added it back in to the the G9 (it's been a couple of years since we saw a Raw shooting mode on any Canon compact). As well as allowing photographers maximum control over parameters such as white balance (and to a degree, exposure) after the shot has been taken, it also allows them to overcome some of the issues we see with all small sensor compacts (over enthusiastic noise reduction, tone curve and dynamic range issues). We were also very pleased to see that Canon has managed to produce a raw mode on a compact that is actually usable - the shot-to-shot time is surprisingly short (it's not unheard of for compact cameras to make you wait 10 seconds or more between shots in raw mode).

Supplied software

As usual Canon supplies a comprehensive suite of applications with the G9, including an updated version of its ZoomBrowser for Windows and Image Browser for Mac (now a universal binary), which hits version 6.0 and, unusually for a compact camera these days, a remote capture utility for controlling the camera over a USB connection. The Raw Image Task utility has also been upgraded and now offers a sort of 'baby version' of the DPP software supplied with EOS cameras.

The Raw conversion software offers a fairly comprehensive set of controls (including a new Adaptive Noise Reduction filter and a full set of 'MyColors' presets) with a friendly face, but lacks the level of sophistication of more 'manual' utilities such as Adobe's Camera Raw converter. By default the supplied software produces output that is basically identical to camera JPEGs - it is effectively a software emulation of the camera's internal processor.

JPEG & RAW Resolution compared

Although the G9's JPEG resolution is very good there is a slight advantage to shooting raw (though you'll only see it if you use a third party raw converter such as ACR).

As the crops below show the camera is by default applying quite a lot of sharpening during JPEG processing and when processing raw files using the supplied software. The raw files processed using ACR (using the default settings) look very soft by comparison - perfect for post-processing - and have a little more usable resolution. Note here we're using a Beta build of ACR 4.3.

Canon Raw Image Task
RAW -> TIFF
Default settings
JPEG from camera Adobe Camera Raw
(4.3 beta)

RAW -> TIFF (Auto)

ISO 80 Studio shot comparison (JPEG vs RAW)

As mentioned above, Canon's Raw Image Task processor produces results that are - from a detail and noise point of view - identical to the out of camera JPEGs. Color is also identical (though obviously you have a lot of control over this in the raw software, so this is just the 'starting point'). The ACR result shows how much sharpening is being done by Canon (the default setting in ACR uses relatively low sharpening, though you can of course turn this up to match Canon's 'look').

Out of camera JPEG, Super Fine, default settings
Canon Raw Image Task , RAW-TIFF, default settings
Adobe Camera Raw , RAW-TIFF, default (auto) settings

ISO 400 Studio shot comparison

At ISO 400 shooting raw starts to give you more options on how you deal with the noise issues that are an inevitable result of squeezing 12 million pixels onto such a small sensor. Again the Canon convert or produces results that are indistinguishable from the camera JPEG,. but ACR allows you to experiment with the amount of noise reduction used (or to apply none at all if you prefer a dedicated NR application such as Noise Ninja). Note that the Adaptive Noise Reduction filter in the raw converter makes very little difference at all (see next page for more details). As mentioned earlier in the review the G9's ISO 400 JPEGs are actually pretty good, but the noise reduction does remove detail, and you can get some of this back by using ACR.

Out of camera JPEG, Super Fine, default settings
Canon Raw Image Task , RAW-TIFF, default settings
Adobe Camera Raw , RAW-TIFF, default (auto) settings


Software and RAW conversion contd...

ISO 800 Studio shot comparison

Once again you can pull a little more detail out of the scene if you shoot high ISO in raw mode and convert using ACR, though be prepared for quite a lot of work as you attempt to balance the noise reduction and detail/sharpness.

Out of camera JPEG, Super Fine, default settings
Canon Raw Image Task , RAW-TIFF, default settings
Adobe Camera Raw , RAW-TIFF, default (auto) settings

ISO 1600 Studio shot comparison

ACR reveals just how noisy ISO 1600 is, and just how heavy Canon's noise reduction is. You'll preserve a little more detail by converting from raw using ACR, but you'll also have a huge amount of noise to deal with.

Out of camera JPEG, Super Fine, default settings
Canon Raw Image Task , RAW-TIFF, default settings
Adobe Camera Raw , RAW-TIFF, default (auto) settings

Noise reduction options (ISO 1600)

Both ACR and Canon's Raw Image Task offer a level of control over noise reduction, though in the case of the latter it doesn't seem to make a huge amount of difference even at ISO 1600, with a huge amount of detail lost whichever end of the scale you set the slider. ACR's noise reduction routines - if turned up to the max - are no better, producing a slightly sharper result, but one that has a distinctly 'watercolor' appearance. If you seriously want to play with noise reduction on a camera that produces results this noisy at high ISO you are going to have to invest in some dedicated software - and don't expect miracles.

Canon Raw Image Task
Adaptive Noise Reduction = 0
Canon Raw Image Task
Adaptive Noise Reduction = 10
Adobe Camera Raw
All noise reduction set to 0
Adobe Camera Raw
All noise reduction set to maximum

Low contrast detail recovery

Dropping to a more reasonable ISO setting (ISO 400) it's possible to recover a lot of the very finest low contrast detail lost in the in-camera noise reduction process, though you'll obviously have a more 'grainy' image as a result.

Out of camera JPEG, ISO 400
Fine, default settings
Adobe Camera Raw, ISO 400
ACR 4.3 beta, luminance noise reduction zero, chroma noise reduction maximum

Dynamic Range: RAW vs JPEG

The G9, like all small sensor cameras we test these days suffers from dynamic range issues, most specifically the rather harsh clipping of highlights in high contrast scenes. With most compacts we can only guess at what part the tone curve applied in camera (as opposed to the inherent lack of dynamic range of the sensor itself) has to play, but the raw data tells us a lot more.

After spending several hours with the G9's raw files I can report that they give you a little, but not a lot of headroom in the highlights. Using ACR's 'Recovery' or Highlight/Shadow tools it's possible to pull back a little of the highlight detail that's lost in the in-camera JPEG processing, and more importantly to apply custom tone curves to your own taste (or more suited to the subject matter). But don't expect miracles; pulling down the highlights can easily introduce color casts to highlights (the G9's built-in tone curve seems designed to just hit the spot where the green channel starts to clip), and if it looks completely white in the JPEG the chances are there's no more information in the raw file.

That said as the examples below show even a little headroom is better than none, and if you're prepared to put a little work into the processing, even with seemingly irredeemable files the return is often worth the effort.

Out of camera JPEG default settings RAW+ACR 'Recovery' set to maximum
Out of camera JPEG default settings RAW+ACR Custom tone curve
Out of camera JPEG default settings RAW+ACR 'Recovery' set to maximum

Movie mode

The only major difference between the G9's movie mode and that of its predecessor is the inclusion of an extra 'interval timer' mode, which takes a frame every one or every two seconds and saves them into a single movie file, which is a fun (if a little esoteric) option.

Standard movie options include three sizes (High Resolution, VGA and Compact -160x120) and two frame rates, 15 and 30 fps (you cannot choose 30fps in High Resolution or Compact modes). You can also use many of the parameters available in stills mode, including (if you really want to), the 'special effects' in the MyColors menu.

The movie quality is excellent (the AVI files are large; about 1.7MB/s for VGA/30fps) with no really obvious artefacts and good exposure, though they can get a little noisy in low light. The large 1024x768 movies look very jerky compared to the 30fps VGA clips, and the digital zoom (you can't use the optical zoom) produces very 'blocky' looking results, but as stills cameras go, the G9 is a pretty good movie camera.

There is a dedicated movie mode on the main mode dial too, which is where the screen captures here were taken. The main difference is that you can preset a couple of options. As with stills recording you can choose the amount of information overlaid on the live preview image.
You can, if you so desire, shoot your movies using the Color Accent and Color Swap effects. There is also a new 'Interval Timer' option for producing time lapse movies.
There is a simple brightness control which can be used during the recording of a clip (the zoom can also be used). In movie mode (as opposed to just pressing the movie button) you can preset the brightness level.
In movie mode the FUNC menu offers quick access to white balance, My Colors effects and movie size / frame rate. There is a also a cut down record menu in Movie mode.
Whilst recording you get a basic screen showing elapsed time (you can optionally turn on the grid too).
In playback mode you get some basic controls for playing movies, slow motion, fast forward and rewind and edit.
Choose edit and you can trim the start and end of the movie clip, and save the result as a new file or overwrite the existing clip.

Sample movie

640 x 480 pixels @ 30 fps
File size: 11.42 MB
6.16 seconds

Click on the thumbnail to view the movie (caution: large file!)

by facestar 2007. 12. 28. 12:43

Canon PowerShot SX100 IS Full Review,
December 2007, Lars Rehm & Simon Joinson

Review based on a production Canon SX100 IS

The PowerShot SX100 IS is the first model in Canon's new SX series of budget super zoom compact cameras, and in the Powershot line-up slots in somewhere between the tried and tested A-Series and the more upmarket S5 IS. Canon's engineers combined the materials and build quality of the former with the long lens, some features and design of the latter to merge them into a brand new camera that goes head to head with Panasonic's popular TZ series (and the new Sony H3). The SX100 IS comes with a 8.0MP sensor, a 10x zoom, optical image stabilization and a comprehensive range of manual photographic controls, all nicely wrapped up in a compact silver or black plastic body. Canon says the SX series offers exceptional performance in the hands of any member of the family, so let's find out how it performed in our capable hands, starting, as ever, with the headline features.

  • 8.0 Megapixels
  • 10x optical zoom with optical Image Stabilizer (36-360mm equiv.)
  • Comprehensive range of photographic controls with P, Av, Tv and M modes
  • DIGIC III imaging processor
  • Face Detection
  • Digital Tele-Converter and Safety Zoom
  • 2.5” LCD with 100% coverage
  • 19 shooting modes

PowerShot SX100 IS specifications

Street price • US: $300
• UK: £200
Body Material

Plastic

Sensor • 1/2.5 " Type CCD
• 8.0 million effective pixels
Image processor DIGIC III
Image sizes

• 3264 x 2448
• 2592 x 1944
• 2048 x 1536
• 1600 x 1200
• 640 x 480
• 3264 x 1832

Movie clips

• 640 x 480 @ 30fps
• 320 x 240 @ 30fps
• 160 x 120 @ 15fps

Lens

• 36-360mm (35mm equiv)
• 10x optical zoom
• F2.8-4.3

Optical Stabilization

Yes (lens-shift)

Focus TTL autofocus
Metering • Evaluative
• Center-weighted average
• Spot
Shooting modes

• Auto
• Program AE
• Shutter Priority AE
• Aperture Priority AE
• Manual
• Portrait
• Landscape
• Night Snapshot
• Kids & Pets
• Special Scene
• Stitch Assist
• Movie

Scenes modes • Portrait
• Landscape
• Night Snapshot
• Kids & Pets
• Night Scene
• Indoor
• Foliage
• Snow
• Beach
• Fireworks
• Aquarium
Shutter speeds

15-1/2500 sec

Apertures F2.8-4.3
Exposure compensation +/-2EV in 1/3EV stop increments
ISO Sensitivity • Auto
• High ISO Auto
• ISO 80
• ISO 100
• ISO 200
• ISO 400
• ISO 800
• ISO 1600
White Balance • Auto
• Daylight
• Cloudy
• Tungsten
• Fluorescent
• Fluorescent H
• Custom
Image parameters My Colors (My Colors Off, Vivid, Neutral, Sepia, Black & White, Custom Color)
Continuous • Approx 0.8fps until card is full (AF / LiveView)
• Approx 1.3fps until card is full (LCD monitor off)
Flash • Auto, Flash On, Flash Off, Slow Sync, Red-eye reduction
• +/- 2EV in 1/3 stop increments
• Face Detection FE compensation
• Safety FE
• Flash exposure lock
• Manual Power Adjustment (3 levels)
• Range (Auto ISO): 50cm - 3.0m (wide) / 2.0m (tele)
Storage • SD, SDHC, MMC, MMCplus , HC MMCplus compatible
• 16 MB card supplied
Viewfinder No
LCD monitor • 2.5-inch P-Si TFT
• 172,000 pixels
• 100% coverage
• 15 levels of brightness adjustment
Connectivity • USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
• AV out (PAL / NTSC switchable)
Power • 2x AA Alkaline or NiMH batteries
• Optional AC adapter ACK800

In the box*

PowerShot SX100 IS Body
AA-size Alkaline Battery (x2)
16MB SD Memory Card
Wrist Strap
AV cable
USB interface cable
Software CD-ROM

Other features

• Histogram
• 2,10 sec or custom self timer
• Face Detection

• Optional
High Power Flash (HF-DC1)

Weight (no batts)

266g (9.4 oz)

Dimensions 108.7 x 71.4 x 46.7 mm (4.3 x 2.8 x 1.8 in)



Design

At a beauty pageant the SX100 IS probably wouldn't make it into the final 12; Canon took a rather 'form follows function' approach when designing their first budget superzoom compact camera. That's not necessarily a bad thing; build quality and materials have been adopted from Canon's popular A series, which has established itself as a reliable user-friendly range of cameras. Externally curves are the predominant shapes on the SX100 IS; hard edges can't be found anywhere on the body. Its dimensions and weight make it a camera more suitable for being carried in a bag rather than your shirt pocket. Having said that, for a 10x zoom it is pretty compact.

The control layout is usually pretty consistent throughout the Canon range and the designers haven't changed their ways this time around. This is no bad thing, as the Canon interface is one of the most intuitive we have come across - though in this model the number of external controls is surprisingly small considering the camera's comprehensive set of features. All everyday shooting functions can be accessed via the excellent FUNC menu - and Canon has even managed to integrate a dedicated ISO button (something still missing from the A series cameras). Luckily the function of the otherwise rather pointless print button can now be customized, you can choose between White Balance, Digital Zoom and a few more options.

The SX100 IS has also inherited a cut-down version of the G9's rotating controller/jog-dial combination, once you've got used to its operation you'll find it very useful for browsing menus and images, it really speeds things up. Although the SX100 IS has a lot more plastic than the more upmarket Powershots, it feels well constructed and solid.

In your hand

The SX100 IS is quite significantly larger and heavier than your typical stylish super-slim compact but nonetheless (or rather because of that) it handles very well. The grip, which houses the batteries, is a very helpful feature, the camera always feels stable in your hands. The shutter button and zoom lever are perfectly positioned too, operation with one hand is not a problem at all.

Body elements

No revolutionary innovations to be found here; Canon has stuck to the formula that is well known from the the A-series and has only added a few modifications here and there. Anybody who has used a more recent Canon compact camera before won't find any surprises when they pick up the SX100 IS.

The top of the camera is home to the main power button, mode dial and shutter release (in the middle of the circular zoom rocker). Like the A series models, the shutter release has a nice positive feel and a distinct 'half press' point.

The 10x zoom's design is apparently 'based on the proven lens configuration of the Powershot S5 IS' 12x lens (according to Canon). It covers a 35mm equivalent range of 36-360mm - we'd love it to start a little wider, but you can't have everything. The maximum aperture ranges from f/2.8 at wide angle to f/4.3 at the tele end. Lens based image stabilization helps to steady your shot at the long end of the zoom.

The built-in flash is a flip-up type and has a range of up to 3.0m (W) or 2.0m (T).

The card and two AA batteries sit under a hinged door on the base of the camera. The SX100 IS is compatible with the SDHC standard and comes with a 16MB card. Alkaline Batteries provide power for approximately 140 shots. This number increases to 400 when using NiMH batteries (CIPA standard).

Connections for the optional AC adapter, USB 2.0 and the A/V interface are hidden underneath a plastic flap on the right side of the camera.
The rear controls should be familiar to anyone who has used a Powershot before; the four-way controller (which now rotates) is located in the centre. It has direct-access buttons for focus, flash, ISO, drive mode, self-timer and the Func menu. Above sits the play button and at the bottom you'll find the exposure compensation button which doubles as a delete button in play mode.

Uncharacteristically for a Canon Powershot there is also a row of buttons underneath the screen. From left to right: The print button (the function of which luckily can be customized), the face selector button, the display button (which controls the amount of information shown on screen) and the Menu button.

The SX100 IS has a bright 2.5-inch screen with a wide viewing angle. It has a, for this screen size, a pretty average resolution of 172,000 pixels (a sure fire indication of the camera's budget positioning). The screen is bright and contrasty (and has a good refresh rate). LCD brightness can be adjusted in the menu although in direct sunlight you'd sometimes wish the SX100 had an optical viewfinder as well.


Operation and controls

Evolution rather than revolution is Canon's credo when it comes to development of compact camera user interfaces. If you've used a Canon Powershot recently most of the control elements will be familar to you. Having said that, Canon's human-machine-interface designers have included a couple of novelties in the control layout of the SX100 IS. The row of buttons underneath the screen has not been seen on a Powershot in this form before (there is also a brand new dedicated face selector button for picking the 'main face' in an image when using face detection) and the SX100 IS has inherited a simplified version of the combined jog-dial/four-way-controller combination from Canon's flagship compact camera, the G9.

The user interfaces on recent Canon compacts have always been amongst the most user friendly and intuitive in their class and the SX100 IS is no exception. Considering the large amount of features available on the SX100 IS the external controls are comparatively minimal but the excellent design of the FUNC menu means a number of crucial settings such as White Balance or Flash compensation are never more than a couple of button presses away. ISO, drive mode and exposure compensation even get their own dedicated buttons, plus you can customise the function of the (otherwise rather useless) print button.

One setting that we'd like to see included in the Func menu is the AF mode. If you want to switch between continuous and single AF you have to dive deep into the menus which can be slightly annoying if you change over a lot.

Rear of camera

Nothing earth-shattering new on the rear view of the SX100 IS. Most Canon users will find themselves in fairly familiar territory. From the top we've got the play/record mode switch. You can also start the camera in play mode by pressing this button. The jog-dial/four-way controller serves for menu navigation and provides access to the ISO, focus, flash, drive and self-timer settings. Below the wheel you can find the exposure compensation button (also used to switch between aperture and shutter speed settings in manual mode and as a delete button in playback mode). The direct print button (customizable), the new face selector button (for selecting and tracking faces in face detection mode) and the display and menu buttons have been placed underneath the 2.5 inch screen.

Top of camera

The SX100 IS' top plate has been designed in a very minimalist way. As you can see, the top of the camera is home to only the main power switch, the mode dial and zoom control/ shutter release unit.

Controls & Menus

Canon's on-screen display and menu structure has - despite minor modifications here and there - remained fairly consistent across camera ranges and generations, it is admirably intuitive and understandable. Even first time Canon users will find their way around the settings pretty quickly. The SX100 IS has also a decent smattering of external buttons, allowing for quicker access to the most crucial settings (ISO, focus, drive mode; white balance can be programmed onto the print direct button).

Pressing the DISP button cycles between two preview settings; preview image only (with information on exposure compensation and IS mode only) and - as shown above - full information. There's plenty of information displayed around the edges of the frame. Note that the amount of information displayed will depend which mode you are shooting in. There is also an optional grid, which can help keep things straight. Half press the shutter and the camera will set the focus and exposure, indicating the center focus point (or chosen face in face detect mode - there is no AiAF on the SX100 IS), plus the shutter speed and aperture chosen by the AE (auto exposure) system. If the shutter speed is too slow you will also see a camera-shake warning.
Users of previous PowerShots will be perfectly at home with the record mode FUNC menu, which offers fast access to a wide range of controls over shooting and image parameters including metering, white balance, MyColors, flash compensation and file size and quality. The SX100 IS has now a dedicated ISO button (on the four way controller) which allows for quick access to this important setting.
In shutter and aperture priority modes the setting is changed using the jog-dial. In manual exposure mode the +/- button toggles the setting changed by the left/right arrow keys between the shutter speed and aperture. Half press the shutter and the display shows how far you are from the metered exposure as an EV value. Record mode menu allows you to change everything from AF mode to digital zoom and red-eye reduction. It is also here where you'll find the options for image stabilization.
In a rather smart move Canon has made the direct print button customizable, you can use it to either change white balance, set the custom wihite balance, use the digital tele-converter, display the grid or switch the display off. The setup menu - accessible in both record and playback modes - offers control over various camera-related parameters, including power management, file numbering, date and time and card formatting.
The play menu offers the usual range of options, including protecting, rotating and deleting images, plus a sound recorder. One of the three alternative play mode views includes a histogram display and exposure information.
In play mode there is also an option for viewing thumbnails (3x3). Saved images can be magnified up to 10x by using the zoom lever.
In review mode there is a display option which shows you an enlarged version of the focus area. If the SX100 IS is set to Face Detection focus and exposure will be optimized for a detected face. If there is more than one face in the frame you can select and track the 'main face' using the face selector button.
Face detection also works in review mode. You can chose faces using the face selector button and zoom in to check the focus. The SX 100 IS has Canon's now standard Print menu, which simplifies the direct print process (something I must confess I've rarely used on any camera).

Timing & Performance

The SX100 IS uses the latest incarnation of Canon's imaging processor, the DIGIC III. Other recent Canon compacts (using the same processor) have performed very well in our tests, so it comes as no surprise that the SX100 IS generally feels very responsive and snappy as well. The lens covers a very long range, so not surprisingly it takes slightly longer to extend and retract when switching the camera on or off than a shorter lens but it all stays well within acceptable limits.

If we have to complain about one thing it has to be the long flash recycling times. Especially when batteries are weak it can take up to almost ten seconds until the flash is ready for the next shot, pretty annoying when there is a whole group of people waiting for their photo to be taken. The AF slows down a little at the long end and in low light but still performs well for a 'budget' superzoom. Overall with the SX100 IS you get a responsive camera for your money, that is fun to use. Image review and shutter lag are very good for a camera in this price bracket.

Timing Notes

All times calculated as an average of three operations. Unless otherwise stated all timings were made on a 3264 x 2448 Superfine JPEG image (approx. 3,370 KB per image). The media used for these tests was a 1 GB SanDisk Extreme III SD card.

Action Details
Time, secs

Power: Off to Record

  1.7
Power: Off to Play Image displayed 1.3
Power: Record to Off All activity ceased 2.0
Power: Play to Off When buffer is empty ~0.2
Record Review Image displayed 0.8
Mode: Record to Play   1.6
Mode: Play to Record Lens already extended 2.0
Mode: Play to Record Lens not extended 3.0
Play: Magnify To full magnification (10x) 0.8
Play: Image to Image Time to display each saved image 0.4
Play: Thumbnail view 3 x 3 thumbnails 0.2

Action Details
Time, seconds
Zoom from Wide to Tele 36 to 360 mm (10 x) 2.2
Half-press Lag (0->S1) Wide angle ~0.3 *1
Half-press Lag (0->S1) Telephoto ~0.6 *2
Half to Full-press Lag (S1->S2) LCD live view ~0.2
Half to Full-press Lag (S1->S2) Viewfinder  
Full-press Lag (0->S2) LCD live view, wide angle ~0.6
Off to Shot Taken LCD live view 2.5
Shot to Shot Flash off 1.6
Shot to Shot Flash on 5.9*3
Shot to Shot Flash on, red eye

6.7*3

*1 Focus speed is fractionally faster if you use center AF rather than Face Detection. Focus speed in low light can slow down marginally
*2 Focus at the tele end can marginally slow down in low light
*3 Shot to Shot times with Flash can go up to 10 seconds with weak batteries

Lag Timing Definitions

Half-press Lag (0->S1)
Many digital camera users prime the AF and AE systems on their camera by half-pressing the shutter release. This is the amount of time between a half-press of the shutter release and the camera indicating an auto focus & auto exposure lock on the LCD monitor / viewfinder (ready to shoot).
 

(Prime AF/AE)
Half to Full-press Lag (S1->S2)
The amount of time it takes from a full depression of the shutter release button (assuming you have already primed the camera with a half-press) to the image being taken.
 

(Take shot, AF/AE primed)
Full-press Lag (0->S2)
The amount of time it takes from a full depression of the shutter release button (without performing a half-press of the shutter release beforehand) to the image being taken. This is more representative of the use of the camera in a spur of the moment 'point and shoot' situation.
 

(Take shot, AF/AE not primed)

Continuous mode

The tables below show the results of our continuous shooting test, indicating the actual frame rate along with maximum number of frames and how long you would have to wait after taking the maximum number of frames before you could take another shot. The media used for these tests was a 1 GB SanDisk Extreme III SD card. Shutter speed was kept above 1/200 sec during these tests.

Continuous drive mode

In continuous shooting mode the SX100 IS averages 1.3 frames per second which is pretty much normal for a camera in this class but a lot lower than the Panasonic TZ3 (which manages 3 frames a second, though only for a limited number of shots). With the SX100 IS shooting at this rate is only limited by the size of the memory card, so you do not need to worry about buffering. In Continuous AF mode things slow down a little as the camera refocuses before each shot.

Image Type
Mode
Avg. frames
per sec
Frames in a burst *1
After
burst
3264 x 2448 JPEG Super Fine Continuous 1.3 fps unlimited n/a
3264 x 2448 JPEG Super Fine Continuous AF 0.8 fps unlimited n/a
2592 x 1944 JPEG Fine Continuous 1.2 fps unlimited n/a

*1 In a single "burst" (finger held down on shutter release).

Continuous shooting is good but not brilliant for this camera class - it is definitely a bonus though that continuous shooting is not limited by the size of a fast memory buffer. Ultimately few 'super zoom' cameras offer the performance needed for true 'sports action' photography, and the SX100 IS is no exception.

File Write / Display and Sizes

Timings shown below are the time taken for the camera to process and "flush" the image out to the storage card, the timer was started as soon as the shutter release was pressed and stopped when activity indicator went out. This means the timings also include the camera's processing time and as such are more representative of the actual time to "complete the task". The media used for these tests was a 1 GB SanDisk Extreme III SD card.

Image Type
Time to store
(secs)

Time to display
(secs)

File size *1
(approx.)
Images on a *2
1GB Card
3264 x 2448 JPEG Super Fine ~1.2 ~0.2 3,370 KB 286
3264 x 2448 JPEG Fine ~0.9 ~0.2 1,720 KB 476
3264 x 2448 JPEG Normal ~0.6 ~0.2 730 KB 983
2592 x 1944 JPEG Fine ~0.7 ~0.2 1,084 KB 695
2048 x 1536 JPEG Fine ~0.5 ~0.2 690 KB 1086

*1 All file sizes are an average of three files. As is the case with JPEG it's difficult to predict the size of an image because it will vary a fair amount depending on the content of the image (detail and noise).
*2 Camera estimation.

With write times averaging around 1.2 seconds for a 8MP Super Fine JPEG the SX100 IS performs very well indeed for a camera at this level. If write times are high up on your list of priorities it makes sense to invest in some fast memory cards in order to take advantage of the cameras performance.

White Balance

The SX100 IS has five white balance presets (Daylight, Cloudy, Tungsten, Fluorescent, Fluorescent H) in addition to the default Auto and a custom (measured) mode. We did not experience any problems with Auto White Balance when shooting our outside galleries and the SX100 IS also copes well with most mixed light sources. However, it struggled to correct the color cast caused by shooting under artificial lighting.

While the performance under fluorescent light is about average, Auto White Balance really struggled with incandescent light sources, producing very warm results. According to Canon this is intentional in order to preserve the 'warm' atmosphere created by incandescent light bulbs. If you prefer your colors more neutral you should switch to the incandescent preset which produces much better results although far from perfect. In those instances when color temperature is crucial, manual White Balance is your best bet.

Incandescent - Auto WB
Red 12.0%, Blue -21.3%
Poor
Incandescent - Incandescent preset WB
Red 3.2%, Blue -6.4%,
Average
Fluorescent - Auto WB
Red 1.6%, Blue -14.7%,
Average
Fluorescent - Fluorescent preset WB
Red 2.4%, Blue -4.9%,
Average

Flash Performance

The built-in flash has a range (using auto ISO) of up to around 3.0 m (9.8 feet) at the wide end of the zoom, dropping to 2 m (6.6 feet) at the long end. We found color accuracy to be very reliable with the flash producing very slightly warm results. This is in most cases desirable as it produces natural skin tones in flash portraits. As expected from an AA battery powered camera, flash recycling times can be very long. When battery power is low you might as well go away and make a cup of tea for yourself and your subjects while waiting for the flash to recharge. Flash recycling times can get pretty close to the 10 sec mark, so always make sure you carry a fresh pair of AAs when you know you are going to use the flash a lot.

Skin tone - Slightly warm tone, good underexposure
Color chart -good color accuracy,
slight underexposure

Macro Focus

Like a number of cameras in the superzoom league the SX100 IS features a macro mode that lets you focus down to a very close distance at wide angle: 1 cm in this case. The real-life applications of this feature are quite limited though. This close up you are quite likely to shade the subject with the camera itself, not to mention that any mobile subject would have made a getaway long before you get that close. Having said that the macro mode is fun to play with and you can get some interesting results.

At the wide end of the zoom (1 cm minimum focus distance) it captures an area 27mm (1.1 inches) across. At the long end of the lens the minimum distance is approximately 100cm, covering an area of 115mm (4.5 inches) across. There is quite some distortion at the wide end; that's hardly a surprise considering the lens is covering an extremely wide angle at this setting. Distortion at the tele end exists (and there's a touch of chromatic aberration), but is hardly noticeable. There is some corner softness although it won't be visible in anything but the largest of prints.

Wide macro - 27 mm x 20 mm coverage
121 px/mm (3063 px/in)
Distortion: High
Corner softness: Average
Equiv. focal length: 36 mm
Telephoto macro - 115 mm x 86 mm coverage
28 px/mm (716 px/in)
Distortion: Low
Corner softness: Fairly low
Equiv. focal length: 360 mm

Barrel and Pincushion Distortion

The distortion measurements for the SX100 IS are not bad at all considering the long zoom range. Barrel distortion at the wide end is pretty average at around 1.0%. This will be visible on straight objects close to the edge of the frame but it is not any worse than the competition. At the long end there is only very minor pincushion distortion at 0.2%, nothing that would be of any relevance unless test charts are one of your favorite subjects..

Barrel distortion - 1.0% at Wide angle
Equiv. focal length: 36 mm
Pincushion distortion - 0.2% at Telephoto
Equiv. focal length: 360 mm

Specific image quality issues

The SX100 IS is a very close relative to Canon's trusted A-Series cameras and it does therefore not come as a surprise that the image output is very similar both in terms in quality and 'character'. The SX100 IS produces admirably refined results at lower ISO settings that match image quality of far more expensive cameras - as long as you don't expect miracles and don't spend too long looking at 100% crops. Colors are natural, and auto white balance in daylight generally works accurately (although sometimes slightly on the warm side). Exposure is spot on in almost any shooting situation and so is the focus unless you try to track a fast moving object. Canon's approach to in-camera sharpening is fairly subtle. If you prefer your images slightly sharper, that's your choice, and you can easily apply an unsharp mask in post-processing, at least you've got the option (which you don't have if out-of-cam images are over-sharpened already).

Almost as expected from a camera with a 1/2.5 in sensor there is some highlight clipping in very bright, high contrast conditions. This is common to virtually all high pixel count small sensor compacts. These cameras struggle to capture the full tonal range in scenes with a large dynamic range (high contrast, very bright days). The reason for this is usually a combination of the limited dynamic range of the small sensors and a steep tone curve. The problem can be mitigated by applying some negative exposure compensation and/or reducing contrast in the My Colors menu.

Noise and NR at low ISO settings

Shooting in anything less than perfect light brings out some of the nastier characteristics of the tiny sensors used in compact cameras and the SX100 IS is no different. There are visible shadow noise and blurring of fine texture such as foliage (caused by noise reduction) even at base ISO. This is common to most small sensor cameras and by no means worse on the SX100 IS than on the competition's comparable cameras, but that doesn't make it any less unpleasant, and limits the usefulness of the output for large prints.

100% crop 360mm equiv., F4.3, ISO 80

Fringing

Color fringing around highlights is certainly not unique to the SX100 IS but some other manufacturers (such as Panasonic) have managed to rid of it through in-camera processing. Unfortunately Canon has not adopted this approach yet. Having said that red fringing on the SX100 IS is only visible in the typical high contrast scenarios and well within acceptable limits, we have certainly seen much worse in the past. Just something to watch out for.

100% crop 360mm equiv., F4.3

ISO Sensitivity / Noise levels

ISO equivalence on a digital camera is the ability to increase the sensitivity of the sensor. The works by turning up the "volume" (gain) on the sensor's signal amplifiers (remember the sensor is an analogue device). By amplifying the signal you also amplify the noise which becomes more visible at higher ISO's. Many modern cameras also employ noise reduction and / or sharpness reduction at higher sensitivities.

To measure noise levels we take a sequence of images of a GretagMacBeth ColorChecker chart (controlled artificial daylight lighting). The exposure is matched to the ISO (ie. ISO 200, 1/200 sec for consistency of exposure between cameras). The image sequence is run through our own proprietary noise measurement tool (version 1.5 in this review). (Note that noise values indicated on the graphs here can not be compared to those in other reviews.)

Canon SX100 IS vs Panasonic DMC-TZ3 vs Sony DSC-H3

Canon SX100 IS
ISO 80

n/a

n/a

 
Canon SX100 IS
ISO 100
Panasonic DMC-TZ3
ISO 100
Sony DSC-H3
ISO 100
Canon SX100 IS
ISO 200
Panasonic DMC-TZ3
ISO 200
Sony DSC-H3
ISO 200

Canon SX100 IS
ISO 400
Panasonic DMC-TZ3
ISO 400
Sony DSC-H3
ISO 400
Canon SX100 IS
ISO 800
Panasonic DMC-TZ3
ISO 800
Sony DSC-H3
ISO 800
Canon SX100 IS
ISO 1600
Panasonic DMC-TZ3
ISO 1250
Sony DSC-H3
ISO 1600

With tiny, high pixel count chips noise is always going to be an issue, and to a large degree this is more a test of the effectiveness (both measurable and visible) of a camera's noise reduction system. Designers have to balance the desire to produce smooth, clean results with the need to retain as much detail as possible (if you blur away the noise, you blur away image detail too).

Canon's approach to noise reduction in the past has been unusually light-handed, clear preference was given to detail retention over image 'cleanliness'. More recently Canon's software engineers have modified this approach and there is now clearly more noise reduction applied to images (with a touch of mild smearing of low contrast detail visible even at ISO 80). That said at all settings from ISO 200 to ISO 800 the Canon is doing a decent job of balancing noise and noise reduction.

Ultimately, you can't work around the fact that a 1/2.5 inch sensor simply is prone to noise. There is very mild noise visible in shadow areas even at base ISO, and once you get to ISO 800 there is enough noise to show on even the smallest prints. The amount of noise produced by these tiny sensors won't be much different from manufacturer to manufacturer; the noise reduction algorithms applied however are. Both Canon and Sony are trying to preserve detail by not pushing luminance NR too hard with varying degrees of success across the ISO range (at low ISO settings Canon wins, at higher settings Sony is nosing ahead).

Panasonic has chosen a completely different route, applying an abundance of both chroma and luminance noise reduction resulting in smooth but blurred pictures with comparatively little detail at all higher ISO settings.

Note that the Sony DSC-H3 does not offer manual white balance. For this test we used Cool Fluorescent white balance which produced the best results with our studio lights.

Luminance noise graph

Cameras compared: Canon SX100 IS, Panasonic TZ3, Sony H3

Indicated ISO sensitivity is on the horizontal axis of this graph, standard deviation of luminosity is on the vertical axis.

RGB noise graph (ISO 80-1600)

Cameras compared: Canon SX100 IS, Panasonic TZ3, Sony H3

Indicated ISO sensitivity is on the horizontal axis of this graph, standard deviation of each of the red, green and blue channels is on the vertical axis.

Both graphs show what we've observed in both our test shots and our 'real life' samples. - the SX100 IS (still) applies comparatively low levels of noise reduction, so the results are a little noisier than those of some other cameras. On the plus side the SX100 IS retains a little more detail. This is quite evident in comparison to the TZ3 which has significantly lower (measured) noise levels but blurs a lot of detail away. The Sony H3 actually manages to balance noise reduction and detail retention remarkably well - probably the best here.

Low contrast detail

What the crops and graph don't show is the effect of noise reduction on low contrast fine detail such as hair, fur or foliage. An inevitable side effect of noise removal is that this kind of detail is also blurred or smeared, resulting in a loss of 'texture'. In this test the crops below show the effect of the noise reduction on such texture (hair) as you move up the ISO range.

100% Crops, F3.5
ISO 80 ISO 100 ISO 200
ISO 400 ISO 800 ISO 1600

These crops illustrate perfectly how the SX100 IS's noise reduction algorithms smear and blur image detail at higher ISO sensitivities (and that there is a little loss even at the lowest ISO settings). Noise and noise reduction artefacts are clearly visible from ISO 200 upwards. At ISO 400 you really start to lose a lot of detail and at ISO settings higher than that the hair starts to transition into an indefinable yellowish mass - save these settings for emergency use only.

So then, the SX100 IS is not significantly different to most other compact cameras in the noise department. Try and avoid ISO settings higher than 400 and you're ok, the image stabilization should help with that. If you really have to use ISO 800 or 1600 you probably shouldn't print it any larger than postcard size.


Image stabilization

The optical image stabilization used on the SX100 IS is certainly one of the better systems we have tested recently. The camera has three modes: Continuous (IS on all the time), 'Shooting' (stabilization is only activated when the button is half-pressed to lock exposure) and 'Panning' (only stabilizes the effect of vertical camera shake, for photographing horizontally moving objects). Continuous mode makes framing easier - the system steadies the preview image - but obviously uses more battery power (it's on all the time).

The system makes handheld shots at 2 or even 3 shutter speeds slower than normal perfectly possible, although your hit-rate will decrease significantly once you get beyond that. The 100% crops below show the effectiveness of the IS system when shooting at full focal lengths at speeds as low as 1/10th sec.

Real world example: 360mm (equiv), 1/10th Second, hand-held
Stabilization off Stabilization on

The stabilization test

In this simplified version of our SLR IS test, ten hand-held shots were taken of a static scene with the stabilization off and on. The shutter speed was decreased for each shot (from 1/500 sec to 1/15 sec). The zoom was set to its maximum position (360mm equiv.), the test target was 5 m away from the camera. The test was repeated 3 times and an average taken.

The resulting images were then inspected and given a blur score - 'Sharp' (no visible blurring at 100%), 'Mild Blur' (the kind of camera shake that is tolerable at small print sizes) and 'Heavy Blur' (virtually unusable due to camera shake) and 'Very Heavy Blur' (little discernible detail).

As the charts below show the IS system does give you a couple or even three stops advantage. At 1/50 (which is roughly three stops below the recommended minimum shutter speed (using the focal length reciprocal rule of thumb) you still have a 7/10 chance of getting a usable shot. And even at shutter speeds as slow as 1/15 sec 50% of shots are either sharp or only mildly blurred.

Hand-held, no stabilization (360mm equiv.)

As you can see from the chart below only at 1/250h sec or above can we be confident of getting sharp results from the majority of shots, and once you get to 1/50th sec and below the majority of shots are blurred, and none are sharp.

Hand-held, stabilization on (360mm equiv.)

With image stabilization activated the results improve significantly - you have a hit-rate of 100% usable images at all shots down to 1/125 sec. Even as shutter speeds as slow as 1/15th sec you have a one in five chance of getting a completely sharp and an 50% chance of getting an at least acceptable image.



Movie mode

Canon's movie mode is pretty similar on most of their Powershot compact cameras, with only some slight variations here and there. So don't expect any surprises when you switch the SX100 IS to movie mode. As is now the norm on most compact cameras the SX100 IS offers a maximum movie size of 640x480 pixels - enough to fill most television screens at 30 frames per second. It also offers the option to shoot at a smaller size and lower frame rate (useful if you want to send videos by email).

Just as other Canon Powershots we recently reviewed the image quality is good, the movies are very smooth and show very few compression artefacts. You can't use the optical zoom while recording. Digital zoom however works although inevitably the quality drops a little. The AVI files are comparatively large - at the best quality setting (640x480 / 30fps) you need more than 2MB for every second of movie. So if you shoot a lot of movies you should think about getting some some big, fast SD cards too.

Here's the screen you see when you first turn the mode dial to movie mode. The jog-dial lets you switch between the standard and compact movie mode presets. Icons indicate the frame size, metering and the amount of recording time left on the card.
On-screen information when recording movies is fairly basic - elapsed time and low battery warning if necessary.
The FUNC menu gives you options for white balance, MyColors and movie size (640x480, 640x480 Long Play or 320x240 pixels). In compact mode the camera records 160x120 at 15fps.

Pressing the menu button in movie recording allows you to change digital zoom, safety MF, grid lines and IS mode settings.

In playback mode a thumbnail of the first frame of the movie appears when scrolling through saved images. Press the FUNC/SET to play movies. You can view a histogram and full shooting information for the movie by pressing the DISP button.

When viewing movies a set of controls appears along the bottom of the frame allowing you to play, jump to either end and pause, move one frame at a time or play in slow motion.



Sample movie

640x480 pixels @ 30fps
5.0 seconds
File size: 10.5 MB

Shot at wide angle (36mm equiv.)

Click on the thumbnail to view the movie (caution: large file!)



by facestar 2007. 12. 28. 12:27

Olympus SP-560UZ Review,
Richard Butler, December 2007


Review based on a production Olympus SP-560UZ with firmware V3.1

Olympus was one of the first manufacturers to realize that building digicams around small sensors allows much longer zooms to be offered without the bulk of the camera becoming unmanageable. With its "Ultra zoom" range, starting back in 2000 with the 1.3MP C-2100UZ, Olympus almost single-handedly created a niche for digicams offering 10X optical zooms in relatively compact formats. Over the years, that niche has developed into a popular and fiercely fought market segment.

Realizing that the utility of a 10X zoom was great enough to make many users overlook the compromises that such a large zoom range entails, Olympus decided to investigate whether customers would put up with still more compromises if the zoom range was even greater. The result was the SP-550UZ with its astonishing 18X zoom range. And, just a few months later, the Olympus was joined on the market by similar offerings from Panasonic and Fuji, suggesting it wasn't alone in its thinking. So here we have Olympus' second-generation 18X zoom camera, the SP-560UZ. The question is, having lost its unique selling point, can the Olympus still make a convincing pitch for your money, and have the SP-550's shortcomings been overcome? Let's find out...

Headline features

  • 18X optical zoom, giving a 27mm-486mm equiv. range
  • Dual IS, combining sensor shift technology with high ISO settings
  • 8.0 million pixel sensor
  • ISO 6400 at 3.1MP
  • ISO 3200 at full resolution
  • RAW mode
  • Face detection
  • Face detection-combined In-camera red-eye reduction
  • Rapid continuous shooting (up to 15fps at 2MP)
  • 25 scene modes
  • Smile mode (waits for subject to smile)
  • Expression Edit
  • Shadow Adjust
  • Control of off-board flashguns, with latest firmware

SP-560UZ key specifications

Street price • US: $375
• UK: £260
Body Material Plastics
Sensor

• 1/2.35" Type CCD
• 8.5 million pixels total
• 8.0 effective pixels

Image sizes

• 3264 x 2448
• 3264 x 2176 (3:2)
• 2560 x 1920
• 2304 x 1728
• 2560 x 1920
• 2304 x 1728
• 2048 x 1536
• 1920 x 1080 (16:9)
• 1600 x 1200
•1280 x 960
• 1024 x 768
• 640 x 480

Movie clips • 640 x 480 @ 30 fps
• 320 x 240 @ 15 fps
•160 x 120 @ 15 fps
• AVI Motion JPEG with WAVE monaural audio
Lens

• 27 - 486 mm (35 mm equiv)
• F2.8 - F4.5
• 18x optical zoom

Focus

• TTL contrast-type auto focus
• Single / Continuous AF
• Manual focus
• Center / Moveable area / Multi / Face Detect

Focus distance

• Normal: 10 cm (wide) / 1.2 m (tele) - Infinity
• Macro: 10 cm (wide) / 1.2 m (tele) - Infinity
• Super macro (60mm equiv.) 1 cm - Infinity

Metering

• 'ESP' metering
• Center weighted
• Spot

Shutter speed

• 15-1/2000 sec (extremes depending on exposure mode)

Aperture • F2.8-F8 (wide)
• F4.5-F8 (tele)
Shooting mode • Auto
• Picture Stabilization (auto High ISO)
• Natural Light
• Natural Light with Flash
• Movie
• Program
• Aperture Priority
• Shutter Priority
• Manual
• Scene modes
Scene modes

• Portrait
• Landscape
• Landscape with portrait
• Sport
• Night
• Night with portrait
• Indoors
• Candle
• Self portrait
• Available Light
• Sunset
• Fireworks
• Cuisine
• Behind glass
• Document
• Auction
• Shoot and select (fast-moving subject)
• Shoot and select (constantly moving subject)
• Smile shot (Takes a photo when your subject smiles)
• Beach
• Snow
• Under water wide 1
• Under water wide 2
• Under water macro
• Quick shutter

Sensitivity

• Auto (Up to ISO 400)
• High Auto (Up to ISO 800)
• ISO 64
• ISO 100
• ISO 200
• ISO 400
• ISO 800
• ISO 1600
• ISO 3200
• ISO 6400 (3.1 MP)

White Balance • Auto
• Fine
• Shade
• Fluorescent (daylight)
• Fluorescent (warm white)
• Fluorescent (cool white)
• Incandescent
• Custom
Continuous

• 1.1 fps for around
• 7 fps, ~28 frames at 3.1MP (ISO 400 or higher)
• 15 fps, ~40 frames at 1.2MP (ISO 400 or higher)

Flash

• Built-in pop-up
• Range: 4.5 m (w), 2.3 m (t) (ISO 200), 6.4m (w), 4.0m (t) (ISO 400)
• Modes: Auto, On, Off, Slow Sync Front and Rear, Red eye reduction
• Optional off-board flash remote control

Storage • 47 MB internal memory
• xD-Picture Card (not included)
Viewfinder

• Electronic viewfinder (EVF)

LCD monitor • 2.5" TFT LCD
• 230,000 pixels
• Brightness boost
• Approx. 97% coverage
Connectivity • USB 2.0 High speed
• A/V out (NTSC/PAL switchable)
Power • 4 x AA batteries alkaline or NiMH (alkaline included)
• Charger optional
Other features

• DPOF
• PictBridge
• Index view
• Histogram
• 2 and 10 sec self-timer
• Hardware-based Face Detection AF/AE

Optional accessories

Leather case SP-550UZ
CLA-10 conversion lens adapter
TCON-17 1.7x Teleconverter (requires CLA-10)
Compact AC Power Adapter C-8AC
PT-037 Underwater case
Leather case

Weight (no batt) 460 g (16.2 oz) inc memory card and batteries, 365g without.
Dimensions 116 x 78.5 x 78 mm (4.6 x 3.1 x 3.1 in)

Design

Considering its extreme zoom range, the SP-560UZ is a pretty compact camera. It's also a fairly pretty compact camera, with a smooth, understated appearance. The rather retro, convincingly metallicized mode dial gives off really nice 'camera' (rather than consumer electronics), vibes. It's just a pity that the surrounding buttons and levers don't continue the aesthetic. Olympus should also be commended for the excellent choice of materials employed on the SP-560UZ - the faux-magnesium alloy finish and use of thick plastics and weighty chunks of rubber make the camera feel much better built than its competitors. Whether this translates into real-world durability isn't really something we can sensibly test but it does make the camera feel a bit special.

In your hand

The SP-560UZ is a very comfortable camera to hold. The front of the body has been molded into a smooth rubber grip. Although it isn't as bulky or prominent as a grip on an SLR, it fits very comfortably in the hand and the prominent thumb support on the back of the camera encourages a good grasp on the body.

As we already pointed out in our review of the FujiFilm S8000fd, the the lens in the Olympus and the Fuji are remarkably similar. Specification-wise, they both cover the range from 4.7 to 84.2mm with a maximum aperture that falls from f/2.8 to 4.5 across the zoom range.

Body elements

The SP-560UZ uses AA batteries which have been well-sited within the body to leave the whole thing feeling well balanced. Rechargeable AA's won't last as long as a dedicated Li Ion battery would but they're cheaper and much more readily replaceable in those 'I've put the batteries to charge - at home, 200 miles away' moments.

Unlike its FujiFilm opposite number, the SP-560UZ accepts only the unloved xD Picture Card format. xD cards are not available in the larger capacities or the faster speeds of the more popular SD / SDHC format. The effects of this choice will become apparent on our timings page.

The SP560-UZ's 2.5-inch screen has a high resolution (230,000 pixels), LCD display. In bright light, the Electronic View Finder (EVF) can be used instead.

The SP-560UZ has a similarly small electronic viewfinder to that found on the Fuji S8000fd, though Olympus give no details of size, resolution or refresh rate. It appears to show the same view as the LCD and features adopter adjustment for the wearers of glasses.
Hidden under a rubber flap are the SP-560UZ's power input socket and a combined USB/AV socket.

The SP-560UZ features a very nice mode dial, the appearance of which is let-down somewhat by the slightly plasticy zoom lever and surrounding buttons. We'd also question the need to include a 'play' mode on the mode dial when there is a 'play' button on the back of the camera.

The lens is likely to be the main reason most people buy the SP-560UZ.

A lens covering such an extreme zoom range inevitably brings compromises but if you're willing to accept these drawbacks, then it's a very flexible tool.

Like the FujiFilm S8000fd, the Olympus lens covers a range from 27mm to 486mm in 35mm equivalent terms. Starting at a relatively wide 27mm equiv. is just as much a factor in making this camera flexible as is the extremely long 486mm end of things.

Mounting the flash further away from the lens than would be possible in a compact camera helps reduce red-eye. This, combined with pre-flash and in-processing all-but eliminates red

Operation and controls

The SP-560UZ lies in the gulf between the point-and-shoot compact and a fully-fledged DSLR. As such it tries to let the user interact to whatever degree they see fit: it has plenty of scene modes to tailor its settings to the image being shot and will happily detect faces and meter accordingly. Alternatively it has the spot metering and manual controls that the more hands-on user will want. Including both sets of features without overwhelming one group of users or frustrating the other is a delicate balance. So how does the SP-560UZ manage? Let's find out...

Rear of camera

The SP-560UZ takes advantage of its large size to offer a large selection of buttons. There are no real surprises here, with the utterly ubiquitous four-way controller giving access to exactly the same options as pretty much everyone else's cameras. The button above the screen switches between the LCD screen and the electronic viewfinder, while the one at the bottom right activates the 'shadow adjust' feature that tries to boost the lighting in regions of shadow (Not massively unlike the active D-lighting feature in the latest Nikon DSLRs).

Top of camera

The nice detail design can't stop the overall appearance of the SP-560UZ looking a little peculiar. It's an odd agglomeration of curves, bumps and blocks but one that feels comfortable in the hand. It won't win any beauty contests, but it has rather grown on us.

"One touch" White Balance

Custom white balance is one of the great underused benefits of digital photography - it is the best way of ensuring accurate color in your photographs, yet only a handful of users seem to use or appreciate it. The user interface of the SP-560UZ goes some way to explaining this puzzle.

The Olympus features a "One Touch" White Balance function. We know this because it says so in the manual (not the printed one that some users might read, but the PDF one included on a CD). The fleeting references it makes do little to help locate this quasi-mythical function but at least reassure you that there is something waiting for you at the end of your quest.

It's not available through the quick-access 'Function' menu - From there you can engage a custom white balance but not set one. Instead, the "One touch" screen is tucked away, four menus deep. We have yet to find a way of setting a custom white balance and engaging it in fewer than nine button presses. Presumably "Nine Touch" white balance sounds less snappy. What makes this farce even harder to forgive is that Olympus used to include White Balance as one of the features that could be assigned to a custom button on its compact cameras. On the SP-560UZ there are 15 functions that can be assigned to the custom button but white balance, irrespective of number of touches, isn't one of them.

Display

In use the SP-560UZ behaves in a fairly predictable manner and is easy to get along with. A quick-access 'Function' menu attempts to bring the most frequently changed options a bit closer to hand but, as we have seen with White Balance, only allows options to be selected, not modified. This makes quick access to a manual white balance setting or auto-bracketing pretty useless, as you have to wade into the full menus to define their behavior.

The record screen offers the usual options. You can just see just the image with focus points or detected faces overlaid. Alternatively, two levels of shooting information can be overlaid.

There is a manual focus mode (in addition to the four auto focus modes). However, the zoomed-in focus confirmation window is so low resolution that you're still left guessing. It's also one of only two instances that requires buttons to be held, rather than pressed. (It's in the manual)
Digging around in the setup menu allows you to turn on either grid lines, to help with composition and lining your shots up, or diagonals across from corner-to-corner. Also hidden in the menus is the choice of whether to highlight the areas of the image that will be clipped to under- or over-exposure, or to show a live histogram.
The function menu gives quick access to some of the functions you might want to change frequently. If you want to tweak their behavior, you have to dig around in the menus. Playback mode, meanwhile, also gives a choice of just the image or the image with one of two levels of shooting information.
And, if you've turned histograms or highlight clipping on in record mode (it can't be accessed from playback mode, oddly), then you can choose to see a histogram or the clipped areas in the photos you're reviewing. Another cute feature of playback mode is the calendar view, that arranges your images by when they were taken. Which is useful as long as you only take a handful on each day. Fill the card in a day and its usefulness as a navigation tool diminishes.
The SP-560UZ features 25 separate scene modes. A pertinent question might be whether it's easier to learn how exposure works and use the camera manually, rather than trying to memorize whether there is a relevant scene mode for the shot you want.

So specific are some of the modes that, at first, we wondered whether "Under water wide mode 1" was expressly designed for taking pictures of submerged villages. It could be for the tiny minority of users who buy the optional under water casing, of course.

Menus

The Olympus isn't the first camera to struggle somewhat under a user interface that probably once worked well but has now had so many features added to it that it needs to be totally re-thought. The camera menu and setup menus that are themselves already one, inexplicably icon-driven, layer into the menus, contain 46 options between them, many of which have further settings and sub-options.

Annoyingly, you can't just press the shutter button to jump back out of the menus, instead having to re-press the menu button to climb back out of the menu level you've delved into. You can still shoot images while viewing menus but the menus then jump back up, preventing you framing or reviewing your image.

Pressing the menu button gives you the choice of which menu you wish to proceed to. The camera and setup menus have most of the option you might want in them. It's unclear why image quality isn't in the function or camera menu or why silent mode and reset are given such direct access, at the expense of more regularly used features.

The camera menu covers 24 options over five screens. The options stretch from metering and focusing behavior through to time lapse and panorama mode.
The setup menu offers another 22 options, including four that define how, when and how loudly the camera beeps and clicks. This is also where you choose from the 15 different functions that can be assigned to the custom button. Image quality gets its own icon in the top level menu. Yet, with the exception of engaging RAW mode (which we wouldn't bother with on this camera), it's an option we'd rarely use.
In playback mode you are also faced with a level of icons before reaching any menus. The distinction between 'edit' options and the 'perfect fix' methods of, er, editing images, is nothing if not subtle. Edit allows you to tweak the colors of, crop, frame or create calendars with your photos. There's even an option to blur everything but the faces in your shots. Handy.

The perfect fix menu allows you to lighten the shadows of your image (Much like the adjust shadow mode) or correct for red-eye. These are presumably for occasions on which you've forgotten to engage these modes before shooting. ...the Setup menu that includes all sorts of other options, including the highlight color used on the menu system. It doesn't let you stop or delay the lens automatically retracting while in playback mode, though.

As well as all the scene modes, there's a guide mode that tries to help you achieve particular results. It even lets you jump to the settings its recommending but struggles when there are two settings to change (you end up having to go back through the menus to engage the second change). One really good feature in the guide mode is the ability to preview the effects of the different white balance modes. It's particularly good for judging which of the three fluorescent settings to use.

Timing & Performance

In use the Olympus is a fairly pleasant camera to take photos with. As long as you avoid RAW mode (see below), it is acceptably brisk. Playback mode can get a bit bogged-down when trying to scroll through multiple images or, really, any action that involves reading from or writing to the xD card, but on the whole, it's a camera that you can use without the speed really getting in your way. The focus lag will rule out any quick 'grab shots,' but on the record side of things, the performance is within expected margins.

Timing Notes

All times calculated as an average of three operations. Unless otherwise stated all timings were made on a 3264 x 2448 Fine JPEG image (approx. 3,250 KB per image). The media used for these tests was a 512MB H-Type Olympus xD card.

Action Details
Time, secs

Power: Off to Record

Ready to take first picture 2.7
Power: Off to Play Image displayed 2.8
Power: Record to Off All activity ceased 2.6
Power: Play to Off When buffer is empty ~0.2
Record Review Image displayed ~0.8
Mode: Record to Play   ~1.2
Mode: Play to Record   0.6
Play: Magnify To full magnification (10x) 8MP image 1.0
Play: Image to Image Time to display each saved image ~0.4
Play: Thumbnail view 3 x 3 thumbnails ~0.6

Action Details
Time, seconds
Zoom from Wide to Tele

2.4

Half-press Lag (0->S1) Wide angle

~0.8

Half-press Lag (0->S1) Telephoto ~0.8-1.5 *1
Half to Full-press Lag (S1->S2) EVF live view ~0.2
Half to Full-press Lag (S1->S2) LCD live view ~0.2
Full-press Lag (0->S2) LCD live view, wide angle ~1.1
Off to Shot Taken LCD live view ~3.3
Shot to Shot Flash off ~2.4-2.9*1
Shot to Shot Flash on (with red eye reduction off) 2.5
Shot to Shot Flash on (with red eye reduction on) ~6.0
*1 The SP-560UZ tele focus speed varies, hence we're quoting a range rather than an average figure.

Lag Timing Definitions

Half-press Lag (0->S1)
Many digital camera users prime the AF and AE systems on their camera by half-pressing the shutter release. This is the amount of time between a half-press of the shutter release and the camera indicating an auto focus & auto exposure lock on the LCD monitor / viewfinder (ready to shoot).
 

(Prime AF/AE)
Half to Full-press Lag (S1->S2)
The amount of time it takes from a full depression of the shutter release button (assuming you have already primed the camera with a half-press) to the image being taken.
 

(Take shot, AF/AE primed)
Full-press Lag (0->S2)
The amount of time it takes from a full depression of the shutter release button (without performing a half-press of the shutter release beforehand) to the image being taken. This is more representative of the use of the camera in a spur of the moment 'point and shoot' situation.
 

(Take shot, AF/AE not primed)

Continuous mode

The tables below show the results of our continuous shooting test, indicating the actual frame rate along with maximum number of frames and how long you would have to wait after taking the maximum number of frames before you could take another shot. The media used for these tests was a 512MB H-Type Olympus xD card. Shutter speed was kept above 1/200 sec during these tests.

Continuous drive mode

The Olympus has a variety of shooting modes, including a 15fps mode that is more like a movie mode than a conventional continuous shooting option. However, as soon as you engage one of the fast modes, the sensitivity defaults to a minimum of ISO 400 that, combined with low resolution, mean that the results are of little real use as photographs.

Image Type
Mode
Avg. frames
per sec
Frames in a burst *1
After
burst
*2
8MP JPEG Fine Continuous long period 1.1 fps ~17

~12sec

8MP JPEG Normal Continuous long period 1.1 fps ~28

~13sec

3.1MP JPEG Fine (ISO 400+) High speed 15 7 fps ~38 ~18 sec
1.2MP JPEG Fine (ISO 400+) Ultra high speed 15 15 fps 40 ~13 sec

*1 In a single "burst" (finger held down on shutter release).
*2 Once the buffer is full the SP-560UZ stops to for the images to be written to the card. You can shoot another shot after just a few seconds but need to wait longer to get another full burst
*3 The SP-560UZ refocuses between each shot in 'Long Period' continuous shooting mode, so this figure in an average - the actual frame rate will depend on how fast the camera can focus.

File Write / Display and Sizes

Timings shown below are the time taken for the camera to process and "flush" the image out to the storage card, the timer was started as soon as the shutter release was pressed and stopped when the activity indicator went out. This means the timings also include the camera's processing time and as such are more representative of the actual time to "complete the task". Again a 512MB H-Type Olympus xD card was used.

Image Type
Time to store
(secs)

Time to display
(secs)

File size *1
(approx.)
Images on a *2
512MB Card
8MP RAW (No JPEG) ~10.4 ~10.4 11,850 KB 43
8MP JPEG Super High Quality ~2.1 ~2.1 3,250 KB 127
8MP JPEG High Quality ~1.8 ~0.8 1,900 KB 249
5MP JPEG Standard Quality ~1.5 ~0.8 1,700 KB 204

*1 All file sizes are an average of three files. As is the case with JPEG it's difficult to predict the size of an image because it will vary a fair amount depending on the content of the image (detail and noise).
*2 Camera estimation.

Unfortunately, although the xD picture card was considered fast at its launch in 2000, it's now some way behind the competition. Unlike the most recent offerings from FujiFilm (Which co-developed xD with Olympus), the SP-560UZ cannot accept SD of SDHC cards. The side-effect of this dedication to an outdated standard is appalling write times. The SP-560UZ takes over 10 seconds to write a RAW file (Using the fastest available, H-Type xD card). This is still between four and five times longer than the Panasonic FZ-18 takes.

If you want to use RAW mode, get used to seeing this screen. You may find yourself looking at it, cursing, while interesting, photogenic things happen around you.

This is a great shame because compact cameras, which are more likely to have compromised lenses and limited processing power, arguably benefit more from RAW conversion than DSLRs. Unfortunately, the use of xD card makes the SP-560UZ's RAW mode slow to the point of being unusable. If you choose to shoot a full quality JPEG alongside your RAW file, you'll have to wait around 18 seconds before you can next shoot an image. This isn't quite long enough to go and make yourself a cup of tea but does give you time to reach the kitchen, fill the kettle and turn it on.


White Balance

The SP-560UZ offers six white balance presets (sunny, cloudy, tungsten lightbulb, and three fluorescent settings) as well as the usual auto white balance and a custom (manual) setting. Outdoors we found the auto white balance to be excellent, though in artificial light (as our tests show) it rarely produces a 'neutral' result - even using the manual presets. If you don't like color casts when shooting indoors at night you need to switch to custom white balance.

Incandescent - Auto WB
Red 6.1%, Blue -9.1%
Average
Incandescent - Incandescent preset WB
Red 2.7%, Blue -10.7%
Average
Fluorescent - Auto WB
Red 3.1%, Blue -19.1%
Poor
Fluorescent - Fluorescent preset WB
Red 5.2%, Blue -12.6%
Average

Flash Performance

The flash on the SP-560UZ offers pretty reasonable performance, reaching 4.5m (feet) at the wide end of the zoom at ISO 200. Its combination of preflash and post-processing also does well at avoid red-eye. It also offers the choice of front- or rear-curtain synch, giving a better choice over flash behavior than most similar cameras. Recycle times can be pretty pedestrian, but that is likely to be affected by the chemistry of the batteries you choose to use.

Skin tone
Good color, excellent exposure
Color chart
Excellent color, good exposure

Wireless flash

As well as having two synchro flash modes, the SP-560UZ has a feature not shared by any other compact we can think of: the ability to wirelessly control and off-board flash. With 'RC' mode engaged, the SP-560UZ can trigger the Olympus FL-50R or FL-36R flashguns. Arguably much more useful than a hot shoe, this allows much more professional lighting than most compacts can achieve (if you're willing to buy a flash that will cost nearly as much as the camera again). It can only control a single flash but even this allows much more subtle lighting than is possible with the onboard flash.

FL-50R flash used wirelessly Onboard flash

Macro Focus

The SP-560UZ has two macro modes; standard and 'super'. The standard macro mode lets you get as close as 10cm at the wide end of the lens (120cm at the long end), while the 'Super Macro' option reduces the closest focus distance to a very impressive 1cm (under half an inch), capturing an area just over an inch high. However, although the macro performance is pretty good, there is very little overlap between the focusing distances covered by Macro mode and those available in normal shooting modes, so you have to engage Macro mode to focus closer than 70cm at the wide end and 1.5m at the long end.

Although it's lovely to be able to say that the SP-560UZ can focus down to a 1cm distance, the reality is that it's almost impossible to ever do so. Because the lens is so large, it blocks out most light hitting your subject when you get that close.

Wide macro - 98 x 73 mm coverage
33 px/mm (846 px/in)
Distortion: Average
Corner softness: Average
Equiv. focal length: 27 mm
Wide Super Macro - 53 x 40 mm coverage
61 px/mm (1552 px/in)
Distortion: Moderate
Corner softness: Average
Equiv. focal length: 56 mm

Barrel and Pincushion Distortion

Considering the zoom range - 27-486mm equivalent - distortion is kept to a (just) acceptable level, though it is visible at both ends of the zoom.

Barrel distortion - 1.0% at Wide angle
Equiv. focal length: 27 mm
Pincushion distortion - 1.0% at Telephoto
Equiv. focal length: 486 mm

Specific image quality issues

As with all the cameras we review, we take around 500 real-world images in addition to the studio shots. You can see some of the best of these in the samples gallery at the end of the review but we also look through them to search for any characteristics that are visible in the real world that might not appear in our more formal tests. The SP-560UZ is a camera that has to make compromises in some areas in order to do all the things it does. And, to be completely fair, it does most things pretty well. It takes pleasant images with quite subtle, realistic color representation.

However, a couple of factors count against the Olympus when you're out and about using it. The low base ISO sensitivity means you risk losing image sharpness by shaking the camera during the relatively long exposures it brings, or losing it to noise and noise reduction if you try to up the shutter speed by increasing the ISO setting. The camera struggles to focus as soon as the light levels start to drop, again risking blurred photos. It also loses some sharpness and contrast at the long end of the zoom because of its ambitious design. The combined effect of these problems is that around 10 percent of our images (shot in a variety of conditions), were marred in some way.

Purple fringing

It a zoom as long as the one on this camera, fringing was always likely to feature, especially if our suspicions about it sharing a lens with the CA-prone Fuji S8000fd are correct. And, sure enough, it is visible in images taken at the long end of the lens. That said, it does appear better controlled than on the Fuji, suggesting that Olympus are devoting some degree of processing to the problem.

100% crop

486 mm equiv., 4.5

Contrast / tone curve

In common with many cameras built around small sensors, the SP-560UZ struggles in scenes with extremes of light and shade though its metering does a good job and rarely gives up on the highlights altogether. In extreme circumstances it will do, however. It is also somewhat prone to letting the red channel overexpose and 'clip' when confronted with saturated reds in a scene.

100% crop

45 mm equiv., F3.3

ISO Sensitivity / Noise levels

ISO equivalence on a digital camera is the ability to increase the sensitivity of the sensor. The works by turning up the "volume" (gain) on the sensor's signal amplifiers (remember the sensor is an analogue device). By amplifying the signal you also amplify the noise which becomes more visible at higher ISO's. Many modern cameras also employ noise reduction and / or sharpness reduction at higher sensitivities.

To measure noise levels we take a sequence of images of a GretagMacBeth ColorChecker chart (controlled artificial daylight lighting). The exposure is matched to the ISO (die. ISO 200, 1/200 sec for consistency of exposure between cameras). The image sequence is run through our own proprietary noise measurement tool (version 1.4 in this review). Click here for more information. (Note that noise values indicated on the graphs here can not be compared to those in other reviews.)

Olympus SP560-UZ vs Panasonic Lumix FX18 vs Fuji FinePix S8000fd

Olympus SP-560UZ
ISO 50

n/a

Fujifilm FinePix S8000fdISO 64

Olympus SP-560UZ
ISO 100
Panasonic Lumix FZ18
ISO 100
Fujifilm FinePix S8000fd
ISO 100
Olympus SP-560UZ
ISO 200
Panasonic Lumix FZ18
ISO 200
Fujifilm FinePix S8000fd
ISO 200
Olympus SP-560UZ
ISO 400
Panasonic Lumix FZ18
ISO 400
Fujifilm FinePix S8000fd
ISO 400
Olympus SP-560UZ
ISO 800
Panasonic Lumix FZ18
ISO 800
Fujifilm FinePix S8000fd
ISO 800
Olympus SP-560UZ
ISO 1600
Panasonic Lumix FZ18
ISO 1600
Fujifilm FinePix S8000fd
ISO 1600
Olympus SP-560UZ
ISO 3200
n/a Fujifilm FinePix S8000fd
ISO 3200
Olympus SP-560UZ
ISO 6400
n/a Fujifilm FinePix S8000fd
ISO 6400

Like all such cameras the SP-560UZ struggles with noise at anything but the lowest ISO setting, and once you get beyond ISO 400 the output is firmly in the 'emergency use only' camp.

Compared to its main competitors the SP-560UZ does a pretty good job of suppressing chroma noise up as far as ISO 1600. Some luminance noise starts to creep into the gray and black samples from ISO 200 upwards and appears to have been blurred somewhat by noise reduction, reducing contrast and definition from the image sample. A fraction less luminance noise reduction might have left more detail, even if it resulted in 'grainy' noise.

Noise reduction really kicks in at ISO 800 with the amount of chroma noise visibly dropping and no real rise in luminance noise visible compared to the ISO 400 image. Unfortunately, this means the amount of detail in the image is drastically reduced and only suffers more from then onwards.

Luminance noise graph

Cameras compared:
Olympus SP560UZ, Fujifilm FinePix S8000fd, Panasonic FZ18

Indicated ISO sensitivity is on the horizontal axis of this graph, standard deviation of luminosity is on the vertical axis.

RGB noise graph

Indicated ISO sensitivity is on the horizontal axis of this graph, standard deviation of each of the red, green and blue channels is on the vertical axis.

Low contrast detail

What the crops and graph don't show is the effect of noise reduction on low contrast fine detail such as hair, fur or foliage. An inevitable side effect of noise removal is that this kind of detail is also blurred or smeared, resulting in a loss of 'texture'. In a new test the crops below show the effect of the noise reduction on such texture (fur) as you move up the ISO range.

100% Crops
ISO 50 ISO 100 ISO 200 ISO 400
ISO 800 ISO 1600 ISO 3200 ISO 6400

This test attempts to re-create the conditions that appear in real-world images. Whether it's grass, distant leaves, hair or fur, fine detail of a similar color can easily confuse noise reduction routines, which can just smear all of the results together and remove or distort fine texture in the final images. With the SP-560UZ you can see the definition of the hair starts to reduce at ISO 200 - the brightest and darkest details are still well represented but everything in between is starting to posterize to one or two shades.

By ISO 800, as the previous test would lead us to expect, all the detail begins to get swirled together and, although not visible in the ISO test, blotches of chroma noise are starting to appear. At ISO 1600 and above, I defy anyone to guess what the item being photographed was.


Zoom range

Olympus created the first 18X zoom camera with the rather disappointing SP-550UZ. While it may not have been the greatest all-round camera, it does appear to have grabbed the attentions of the technicians and marketers at other camera makers. As a result, the SP-550UZ's successor no longer has the advantage of being the only 18X zoom on the market.

One of the most useful aspects of the lens is not so much the extraordinary length of the telephoto end of the zoom (which is only truly useful in a very specific situations), but the wide-angle end of the lens that extends to a really handy 27mm. This is as wide as the kit lens supplied with most contemporary DSLRs and obviates the need to lie in gutters, back yourself into corners or only befriend contortionists and structural elements of human pyramids, in order to get your chosen subject in shot.

27mm (equiv) Wide framing compared 486mm (equiv) Tele

Image stabilization

The SP-560UZ, like its rivals from Panasonic and Fuji, features an optical Image Stabilization system (in this case, like the Fuji S8000fd, using a moving sensor). This is pretty much essential with such a long lens because the longer the zoom, the more it will tend to show signs of being shaken. As a result, a long focal length usually requires fast shutter speeds so that there simply isn't time for the camera to noticeably shake while the shutter is open. The traditional approximation used was that most photographers can consistently, steadily hand-hold a camera down to around 1/equivalent focal length. Consequently, a 486mm equivalent zoom requires high shutter speeds or some kind of stabilization to be useful.

The stabilization test

In this simplified version of our SLR IS test, eight hand-held shots were taken of a static scene with the stabilization off and on. The shutter speed was decreased by a third of a stop and repeated (from 1/250 sec to 1/50 sec). The zoom was set to its maximum position (486mm equiv.), the test chart was 4.5 m away from the camera. This procedure was repeated ten times.

The resulting images were then inspected and given a blur score - 'Sharp' (no visible blurring at 100%), 'Mild Blur' (the kind of camera shake that is tolerable at small print sizes) 'Heavy Blur' (unusable due to camera shake) and 'Very Heavy Blur' (little discernible detail).

As the charts below show we were able to get a measurable one and a third stop advantage. More importantly we were able to get 'usable' results around half the time at shutter speeds of 1/60th of a second, rather than the one-in-ten hit rate we could manage hand-held.

Hand-held, no stabilization (486mm equiv.)

Already at 1/250th of a second we're not guaranteed to get a sharp shot every time and below 160th of a second, less than half of the images we take are properly sharp.

Image stabilization on (486mm equiv.)

With IS on, you're still not certain to get steady shots every time at 1/200th of a second. However, we found that you could still expect around half your photos to be sharp at 1/60th of a second, when you would be very lucky to get any at all with IS turned off. Overall, this doesn't appear to be quite as effective as the system employed in the Fuji S8000fd and means you'll still benefit from taking a couple of shots to be sure of getting a perfect one. It is still a feature worth having, not least because it stabilizes the image on the viewfinder, rendering distant detail distinctly.

Expression Edit

In one of the stranger features tucked away in the SP-560UZ's labyrinthine menus (and afforded one whole sentence in the full instruction manual), is the heroically gimmicky Expression Edit function. And, to be fair to the limited space given to it by the manual, it is pretty self-explanatory: it's a post-shooting special effect that manipulates the facial features of a picture in which the camera has detected a face.

Here is a picture of the glamorous model whose services we use for the fine detail noise reduction test. She may not be one of London's great beauties but she is nothing if not amenable. And, when the moment came, was the only 'person' we could find willing to have the end results of this function shown in public.
 

So there you have it, a function that turns your friends into the four rather un-nerving caricatures: Happy, Grumpy, Skeptical and Terrified. And turn them into ex-friends if you put the images up on the Internet.

Shadow Adjust

On a slightly more sensible note, the SP-560UZ has a 'Shadow Adjust' mode which uses a combination of changed exposure and tone curve alterations to brighten faces it has recognized (it will also lift shadows in contrasty scenic shots). Here are the results of switching the mode on and off:

Shadow Adjust off (Face not recognized) Shadow Adjust on


Movie mode

Movie mode on the Olympus is a lot like that featured in most compacts. It creates video at 640x480 pixels (VGA in slightly old-school computer terminology), at 30 frames per second. There are also two lower resolution options, both at 15 frames per second.

The Olympus's video quality is really very reasonable, with smooth-running results showing little in the way of artefacts. Movies are stored in the all-but-universal AVI standard. Like most compacts, you can't use the zoom during filming, though you can specify white balance which helps if you're shooting indoors. Sound quality suffers from the same limitations as many of its peers - a tiny microphone built into the body means that you pick up the sound of hands shifting around on the body or any slightest breeze, but not a lot else. Add to this the long lens, which can mean your subject is too far away to be heard and you may find yourself wishing you could mute the sound recording.

Unlike stills recording you cannot choose the amount of information overlaid on the live preview image. This doesn't matter, as you're given everything you might sensibly need.
A thumbnail of the video, in pretty sproket-hole frame, represents the video during review mode.
When playing back the video, you are able to play, advance incrementally through the video or jump to the beginning and end. There are no editing or other controls available.

Sample movies

640x480 pixels @ 30 fps
Duration: 4.2 secs
File size: 7.8 MB

Shot at wideangle

Click on the thumbnail to view the movie (caution: large file)



Compared to... Olympus SP-550UZ

Although most consumers will compare the SP-560UZ with the 18X zoom cameras offered by Panasonic and Fuji, we thought it'd be interesting to also compare it to its predecessor, the SP-550UZ.

The SP-560UZ offers another million pixels over its predecessor but also has a larger sensor, so we'd expect the differences between the two to be pretty subtle.

Studio scene comparison (both cameras @ ISO 50)

  • Olympus SP-560UZ: Aperture Priority mode, ISO 50, Default Image Parameters,
    Manual white balance, +0.7 EV compensation

  • Olympus SP-550UZ: Aperture Priority mode, ISO 50, Default Image Parameters,
    Manual white balance, +1.0 EV compensation
     
  • Lighting: Daylight simulation, >98% CRI
Olympus SP-560UZ
Olympus SP-550UZ
ISO 50, 1/30 sec, F5
ISO 50, 1/25 sec, F5
2,749 KB JPEG
3,712 KB JPEG

At the starting pistol, both contenders are looking pretty competitive. The Olympus SP-550UZ was a groundbreaking camera in the sense that it was the first to include an 18X zoom. By comparing the SP-550UZ with the SP-560UZ, we can be sure than any differences between the two are down to the change in sensor, not the compromises induced by the absurdly long zoom.

At their base ISO settings, the cameras produce consistently pleasant images with details rendered well. There's little to choose between them, but the very slightly greater contrast and small resolution advantage in the SP-560UZ gets it off to a flying start.


by facestar 2007. 12. 28. 12:22
| 1 |